JP6719073B2 - Transmission method - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a signal transmission method.

Conventionally, in Non-Patent Document 1, the reception quality of data for BICM-ID (Bit Interleaved Coded Modulation-Iterative Detection) is improved by changing the bit labeling mode for QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation). Consideration is underway.

JP 2013-16953 JP

"Design, analysis, and performance evaluation for BICM-ID with square QAM constellations in Rayleigh fading channels" IEEE Journal on selected areas in communication, vol.19, no.5, May 2001, pp.944-957

However, due to restrictions such as PAPR (Peak-to-Average power ratio) (peak power to average transmission power), modulation methods other than QAM, such as APSK (Amplitude Phase Shift Keying) modulation, are used for communication and broadcasting systems. In some cases, it may be difficult to apply the technique of Non-Patent Document 1 relating to QAM labeling to a communication/broadcasting system.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a transmission method that contributes to improving the reception quality of data when iterative detection is performed on the receiving side in a communication/broadcasting system, for example.
Note that the present disclosure discloses means for solving each of a plurality of problems found by the present invention, not limited to the above problems. It goes without saying that each of the means for solving the problems may be used in combination with the means for solving the other problems, or may be used individually.

A transmission method according to the present invention is a transmission device that transmits data by a modulation method that shifts an amplitude and a phase, and a first modulation method and a first modulation method in which signal point arrangement and bit allocation to each signal point are different from each other. A two-modulation scheme is alternately selected for each symbol, a selection section is provided, a mapping section that performs mapping to a signal point according to the selected modulation scheme, and a transmission section that transmits the mapped modulation signal. In the first modulation method, in the IQ plane, four signal points are arranged on the circumference of the inner circle and 12 signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle. Is 16 APSK modulation in a concentric circle relationship, and 16 signal points are converted into one signal point on the circumference of the inner circle and an outer circle in the direction from the origin of the IQ plane to the signal point. When divided into four groups consisting of three signal points on the circumference, a set of adjacent signal points on the circumference of the outer circle in the same group and on the circumference of the outer circle in the same group The difference in bit allocation between any of the signal points on both ends of the and the signal point of the inner circle is 1 bit, and the signal point on the circumference of the outer circle that is the shortest on the IQ plane between the different groups. And the set of signal points on the circumference of the inner circle have a bit allocation difference of 1 bit, and the second modulation method is that in the IQ plane, there are eight signals on the circumference of the inner circle. Points are arranged, eight signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle, and the inner circle and the outer circle are concentric 16APSK modulation. When divided into a first group consisting of 8 signal points on the circumference and a second group consisting of 8 signal points on the circumference of the outer circle, adjacent signal points on the circumference in the same group The difference in the bit allocation of the group and is 1 bit.

According to the transmission method of the present invention, in particular, an error correction code having a high error correction capability such as a turbo code such as an LDPC (Low Density Parity Check) code or a Duo-binary Turbo code is applied to a communication/broadcast system. However, on the receiving side, at the time of initial detection or when iterative detection is performed, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the reception quality of data.

Example of input/output characteristics of power amplifier mounted on transmitter Configuration example of communication system using BICM-ID method Example of input/output of encoder of transmitter An example of bit-reduction encoder of transmitter An example of bit-reduction decoder of receiver Example of input/output of XOR part of bit-reduction decoder Configuration diagram of transmitter (12,4)16APSK signal point map (8,8)16APSK signal point map Block diagram for generating modulated signal Modulated signal frame structure Data symbol example Pilot symbol example (12,4)16APSK labeling example (12,4)16APSK labeling example (8,8)16APSK labeling example (8,8)16APSK signal point constellation example Image of frame structure of transmission signal in advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting Configuration diagram of receiver Example of modulation method sequence Example of modulation method sequence Configuration example of stream type/relative stream information Example of modulation method sequence Examples of symbol placement 32APSK signal point arrangement example NU-16QAM signal constellation and labeling example Image of broadband satellite digital broadcasting Block diagram for ring ratio determination Diagram for explaining band-limiting filter (4,8,4)16APSK signal point example (4,8,4)16APSK signal point example (4,8,4)16APSK signal point example Symbol placement example Symbol placement example Symbol placement example Symbol placement example Example of modulation method sequence Example of modulation method sequence Example of transmitting station configuration Example of receiver configuration Example of transmitting station configuration Example of transmitting station configuration Example of transmitting station configuration Example of frequency allocation of each signal Satellite configuration example Satellite configuration example Example of extended information configuration Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example (4,12,16)32APSK signal point constellation example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Example of TMCC signal configuration Example of TMCC information structure Example of configuration of channel part in transmitting station Examples of frame changes Example of changes on the time axis when the roll-off rate changes Example of changes on the time axis when the roll-off rate changes Example of receiver configuration Configuration of control information related to "emergency alert" Example of frame configuration when issuing an "emergency alert" Example of receiver configuration Example of frame configuration when issuing an "emergency alert" Example of frame configuration when issuing an "emergency alert" Example of frame configuration when issuing an "emergency alert" Example of frame configuration when issuing an "emergency alert" Example of frame configuration when issuing an "emergency alert" Example of receiver configuration Example of receiver configuration Example of receiver configuration Setting screen example for audio output method Example of receiver configuration Setting screen example for audio output method Example of receiver configuration Setting screen example for audio output method Display example Display example Display example Display example Example of receiver configuration Setting screen example for audio output method Example of frame transmission status Example of frame transmission status Example of frame transmission status Example of TMCC generation method Configuration example of TMCC component Configuration example of TMCC component Configuration example of TMCC estimation unit in receiving device System diagram showing the relationship between the receiving device and other equipment Configuration example of receiver System diagram showing the relationship between the receiving device and other equipment Configuration example of receiver Diagram showing the relationship between the receiving device and the remote control

(History of obtaining one aspect of the present invention)
Generally, in communication/broadcasting systems, PAPR (Peak-to-Average power ratio) (Peak-to-Average power ratio) is used to reduce power consumption of the amplifier in the transmission system and to reduce data errors in the receiver. A modulation method with low transmission power and high data reception quality is desired.
Particularly in satellite broadcasting, it is desirable to use a modulation method with a small PAPR in order to reduce the power consumption of the amplifier in the transmission system, and there are 16 signal points in the IQ (In Phase-Quadrature Phase) plane. As a modulation method, (12,4) 16APSK (16 Amplitude and Phase Shift Keying)
Modulation is often applied. The constellation of signal points on the IQ plane of (12,4) 16APSK modulation will be described later in detail.

However, in a communication/broadcast system, when (12,4) 16APSK is used, the reception quality of the data at the receiver is sacrificed. There is a desire to use the method and transmission method for satellite broadcasting.
In order to improve the reception quality, it is possible to use a modulation method having a good BER (Bit Error Ratio) characteristic. However, in any case, it is not always the best solution to adopt a modulation method that is superior in terms of BER characteristics. This point will be described below.

For example, 10.0 dB and SNR for obtaining BER = 10 ^-5 when using a modulation scheme #B (Signal-to-Noise power Ratio), when using the modulation scheme #A, obtain BER = 10 ^-5 SNR is set to 9.5 dB.
At this time, if the average transmission power is the same regardless of whether the transmitting apparatus uses the modulation methods #A and #B, the receiving apparatus uses the modulation method #B and gain of 0.5 (=10.0-9.5) dB. Can be obtained.

By the way, PAPR becomes a problem when a transmitter is installed on a satellite. The input/output characteristics of the power amplifier mounted on the transmitter are shown in FIG.
Here, it is assumed that the PAPR when using the modulation scheme #A is 7.0 dB and the PAPR when using the modulation scheme #B is 8.0 dB.
At this time, the average transmission power when the modulation scheme #B is used is 1.0 (=8.0-7.0) dB smaller than the average transmission power when the modulation scheme #A is used.

Therefore, when the modulation method #B is used, 0.5-1.0=0.5, and therefore, the reception apparatus obtains a gain of 0.5 dB when the modulation method #A is used.
As described above, in such a case, it does not mean that it is better to use a modulation method that is superior in terms of BER characteristics. The present embodiment takes the above points into consideration.
Therefore, the present embodiment aims to provide a modulation scheme/transmission method with a small PAPR and good data reception quality.

Further, in Non-Patent Document 1, improvement of the reception quality of data at BICM-ID is studied depending on how to label bits for QAM. However, for error correction codes having a high error correction capability such as turbo codes such as LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check code) codes and Duo-binary Turbo codes, the same approach as in Non-Patent Document 1 described above (that is, How to label the bits for QAM) can be difficult to achieve.

Therefore, the present embodiment applies an error correction code having a high error correction capability such as an LDPC code or a turbo code, and obtains high data reception quality when iterative detection (or detection) is performed on the receiving side. To provide a transmission method for
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
(Embodiment 1)
The transmitting method, transmitting apparatus, receiving method, and receiving apparatus of this embodiment will be described in detail.

Before making this description, an outline of a communication system using the BICM-ID method on the receiving side will be described.
<BICM-ID>
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a communication system using the BICM-ID system.
In addition, below, although BICM-ID in the case of having the bit-reduction encoder 203 and the bit-reduction decoder 215 is demonstrated, even if it does not have the bit-reduction encoder 203 and the bit-reduction decoder 215, iterative detection (Iterative detection) Detection) can be carried out.

The transmission device 200 includes an encoding unit 201, an interleaver 202, and a bit-reduction encoder.
203, mapping section 204, modulation section 205, transmission RF (Radio Frequency)
y) The unit 206 and the transmission antenna 207 are provided.
The reception device 210 includes a reception antenna 211, a reception RF unit 212, a demodulation unit 213, a demapping unit 214, a bit-reduction decoder 215, a deinterleaver 216, and a decoding unit 217.
, Interleaver 218.

FIG. 3 shows an example of input/output of the encoding unit 201 of the transmission device 200.
The coding unit 201 performs coding at the coding rate R1, and when the information bits of the bit number N _info are input, it outputs the coded bits of the bit number N _info /R1.
FIG. 4 shows an example of the bit-reduction encoder 203 of the transmission device 200.
When an 8-bit bit string b (b _{0 to} b ₇ ) is input from the bit-reduction encoder 203 and the interleaver 202 of this example, conversion is performed with a reduction in the number of bits, and a 4-bit bit string m (m ₀ to m ₃ ) to the mapping unit 204. [+] in the figure indicates an XOR (exclusive-or) section.

That is, the bit-reduction encoder 203 of this example includes a system in which the input part of the bit b _{0 and} the output part of the bit m0 are connected by the XOR part, and the input part of the bits b ₁ and b _{2 and} the output part of the bit m1. a system connected by the XOR unit, the output of the bit b _3, b input of ₄ and the output of the bit m2 and systems connected by XOR unit, bits b _5, b _6, the input unit and the bit m3 of b ₇ Part and X
It has a system connected by an OR unit.

FIG. 5 shows an example of the bit-reduction decoder 215 of the receiving device 210.
The bit-reduction decoder 215 of this example is L(m ₀ ) to L that are LLRs (Log Likelihood Ratios) of the 4-bit bit string m (m _{0 to} m ₃ ) from the demapping unit 214.
(M ₃₎ as input, applies transform with restoration of the number of bits, and outputs the _{L (b 0) ~L (b} 7) a LLR of 8-bit bit sequence b (b ₀ ~b _7), 8-bit bit string b (b _{0 to} b ₇
L(b ₀ ) to L(b ₇ ) which are LLRs of () are input to the decoding unit 217 via the deinterleaver 216.

Further, the bit-reduction decoder 215 receives L(b ₀ ) to L(b ₇ ) which are LLRs of the 8-bit bit string b(b _{0 to} b ₇ ) from the decoding unit 217 via the interleaver 218, as input. The conversion with reduction of the number of bits is performed, and L(m ₀ ) to L(m ₃ ) that are LLRs of the 4-bit bit string m(m _{0 to} m ₃ ) are output to the demapping unit 214.
In addition, [+] in the figure indicates an XOR unit. That is, bit-reduction decoder2 of this example
Reference numeral 15 denotes a system in which an input/output unit of L(b ₀ ) and an input/output unit of L(m ₀ ) are connected by an XOR unit, an input/output unit of L(b ₁ ), L(b ₂ ) and L(b ₂ ). A system in which the input/output section of m ₁ ) is connected by an XOR section, and a system in which the input/output section of L(b ₃ ), L(b ₄ ) and the input/output section of L(m ₂ ) are connected by an XOR section And an input/output unit of L(b ₅ ), L(b ₆ ), L(b ₇ ) and an input/output unit of L(m ₃ ) are connected by an XOR unit.

Here, in this example, for the 8-bit bit string b (b _{0 to} b ₇ ) before the bit number reduction, the bit b ₀ is the LSB (Least Significant Bit, least significant bit), and the bit b ₇ is the MSB (Most Significant Bit, most significant bit). Further, in the 4-bit bit string m (m _{0 to} m ₃ ) after the number of bits is reduced, the bit m ₀ is the LSB and the bit m ₃ is the MSB.

FIG. 6 shows an XOR (exclus) for explaining the operation of the bit-reduction decoder 215.
The input/output of the (ive-or) part is shown.
In FIG. 6, the bits u ₁ and u ₂ and the bit u ₃ are connected by the XOR section. In addition, L(u ₁ ), L(u ₂ ), and L(u ₃ ) which are LLRs of bits u ₁ , u ₂ , and u ₃ are also shown. The relationship between L(u ₁ ), L(u ₂ ) and L(u ₃ ) will be described later.

Next, the processing flow will be described with reference to FIGS.
On the transmitting device 200 side, the transmission bit encoding unit 201 receives the transmission bit and performs (error correction) encoding. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 3, when the coding rate of the error correction code used in the coding unit 201 is R1, when an information bit of the number of bits N _info is input to the coding unit 201, the code The number of output bits from the conversion unit 201 is N _info /R1.

The signal (data) encoded by the encoding unit 201 is interleaved by the interleaver 202 (data rearrangement), and then input to the bit-reduction encoder 203. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 3, the bit-reduction encoder 203 performs the bit number reduction processing. Note that the bit number reduction process may not be performed.
The mapping unit 204 performs mapping processing on the signal (data) subjected to the bit number reduction processing. The modulation unit 205 performs processing such as conversion of a digital signal from a digital signal to an analog signal, band limitation, orthogonal modulation, (multicarrier conversion such as OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) may be performed) of the mapped signal. I do. The signal subjected to this signal processing is wirelessly transmitted from, for example, the transmission antenna 207 via a transmission RF (Radio Frequency) processing (206) that performs transmission processing.

On the reception device 210 side, the reception RF (212) performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the signal (radio signal from the transmission side) received by the reception antenna 211 to generate a baseband signal and demodulate it. It is output to the unit 213. Demodulation section 213 performs processing such as channel estimation and demodulation, generates a demodulated signal, and outputs the signal to mapping section 214. The demapping unit 214 calculates an LLR (logarithmic likelihood ratio) for each bit based on the received signal input from the demodulation unit 213, the noise power included in this received signal, and the prior information obtained from the bit-reduction decoder 215. calculate.

Here, the demapping unit 214 processes the signal mapped by the mapping unit 204. That is, the demapping unit 214 calculates the LLR for the bit string (corresponding to the bit string m in FIGS. 4 and 5) after the bit number reduction process is performed on the transmission side.
On the other hand, in the decoding process of the subsequent stage (decoding unit 217), since all the coded bits (corresponding to the bit string b in FIGS. 4 and 5) are processed, the LLR (demapping) after bit reduction is performed. It is necessary to convert the LLR related to the processing of the unit 214 and the LLR before the bit number reduction (the LLR related to the processing of the decoding unit 217).

Therefore, the bit-reduction decoder 215 converts the LLR after the bit number reduction input from the demapping unit 214 into the LLR at the time point before the bit number reduction (corresponding to the bit string b in FIGS. 4 and 5). Details of the processing will be described later.
The LLR calculated by the bit-reduction decoder 215 is input to the decoding unit 217 after being deinterleaved by the deinterleaver 216. The decoding unit 217 performs a decoding process based on the input LLR, and thereby calculates the LLR again. The LLR calculated by the decoding unit 217 is interleaved by the interleaver 218 and then fed back to the bit-reduction decoder 215. In the bit-reduction decoder 215, the LLR fed back from the decoding unit 217 is converted into the LLR after the number of bits is reduced, and the LLR is input to the demapping unit 214. The demapping unit 214 calculates the LLR for each bit again based on the received signal, the noise power included in the received signal, and the prior information obtained from the bit-reduction decoder 215.

If the transmission side does not perform the bit number reduction processing, the bit-reduction decoder 215
No special processing in will be performed.
By repeating the above processing, a good decoding result can be finally obtained.
Here, the LLR calculation process in the demapping unit 214 will be described.
A bit string b(b ₀ , b ₁ ,..., B _N-1 ) of the number of bits N (N is an integer of 1 or 2 or more) is M (M is an integer of 1 or 2 or more) symbol points Sk( Consider the LLR output from the demapping unit 214 when it is assigned to S ₀ , S ₁ ,..., S _M-1 ).

The received signal is y, the i-th (i=0, 1,..., N−1 (i is an integer of 0 or more and N−1 or less)) bit is b _i, and the LLR for b _i is L(bi ₎ , the formula (1) is established.

Here, as will be described later, the first term on the last right side of the equation (1) is an LLR obtained from a bit other than the i-th bit, and this is referred to as external information _Le (b _i ). Further, the second term in the last right-hand side of Equation (1) is a LLR obtained based on the i-th bit of the prior probability, which put a priori information L _a (b _i).
Then, the equation (1) becomes the equation (2) and can be transformed into the equation (3).

The demapping unit 214 outputs the processing result of Expression (3) as an LLR.
Now, consider the numerator p(y|b _i =0) of the first term on the last right-hand side of equation (1).
p | A _{(y b i = 0),} b i = 0 and the received signal when it is found a probability of y, which is the symbol point is b _i = 0 when found the "b _i = 0 The product p(y|S _k )p(S _k | of the probability p(S _k |b _i =0) of becoming Sk and the “probability p(y|S _k ) of becoming y when S _k is known”. b _i =0). Considering all the symbol points, the equation (4) is established.

Similarly, for the denominator p(y|b _i =1) of the first term on the last right-hand side of equation (1), equation (5)
Holds.
Therefore, the first term on the last right side of Expression (1) becomes Expression (6).

If p(y|S _k ) of equation (6) is added with Gaussian noise of variance σ2 in the process of transmitting the symbol point Sk to become the received signal y, then it can be represented by equation (7).

Further, p(S _k |b _i =0) in the equation (6) is the symbol point S when it is found that b _i =0.
It is the probability of becoming k and is represented by the product of the prior probabilities of the bits constituting the symbol point Sk other than bi. If the j-th (j=0, 1,..., N−1 (j is an integer from 0 to N−1)) bit of the symbol point Sk is S _k (b _j ), then the equation (8) is It holds.

Now consider p(b _j =S _k (b _j )).
As a priori information, when L _a (b _j) is given, from the second term in the last right-hand side of Equation (1), a formula (9), the equation (10).

Further, from the relationship of p(b _j =0)+p(b _j =1)=1, the expressions (11) and (12) are established.

If this is used, it will become Formula (13) and Formula (8) will become Formula (14).

Here, the same formula as the formula (14) holds for p(S _k |b _i =1).
From equations (7) and (14), equation (6) becomes equation (15). As in the condition of Σ, the numerator S _k (b _i ) is 0 and the denominator S _k (b _i ) is 1.

From the above, in performing the iterative process in BICM-ID, the demapping unit 214 performs an exponential operation and a sum operation for each symbol point and each bit assigned to the point, and performs the denominator/numerator on them. Each of them will be obtained and logarithmically calculated.
Next, the processing in the bit-reduction decoder 215 will be described.

The bit-reduction decoder 215 converts the LLR after the bit number reduction calculated by the demapping unit 214 into the LLR before the bit number reduction required by the decoding unit 217, and the bit number reduction before the bit number reduction calculated by the decoding unit 217. A process for converting the LLR into the LLR after the bit number reduction required by the demapping unit 214 is performed.
In the bit-reduction decoder 215, the process of converting to LLRs before and after bit reduction is
This is performed for each [+] (each XOR section) in FIG. 5, and the operation is performed by the bit connected to the [+].

Here, in the configuration shown in FIG. 6, each bit is u ₁ , u ₂ , u _3, and the LLR of each bit is L(u ₁ ), L(u ₂ ), L(u ₃ ) and L Consider L(u ₃ ) given (u ₁ ) and L(u ₂ ).
First, consider u ₁ .
If L(u ₁ ) is given, from equations (11) and (12), equation (16) and equation (1
7) is established.

If u ₁ =0 is associated with “+1” and u ₁ =1 is associated with “−1”, the expected value E of u ₁ is E.
[U ₁ ] is given by equation (18).

In FIG. 6, u ₃ =u ₁ [+]u ₂ and E[u ₃ ]=E[u ₁ ]E[u ₂ ], so substituting equation (18) yields equation (19). Equation (20) is obtained.

In the above, the bits u ₁ , u ₂ , and u ₃ are considered, but when generalized in the case where j signals are connected, the equation (21) is obtained. For example, in FIG. 5, L(b ₇ ) is When obtaining, L(m ₃ ), L(b ₆ ), and L(b ₅ ) are used to obtain the equation (22).

If the transmission side does not perform the bit number reduction process, the above-described special process is not performed.
Although the operation of BICM-ID has been described above, it is not always necessary to perform iterative detection, but signal processing may be performed in which detection is performed only once.
<Transmitting device>
FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram of the transmission device.

The transmission device 700 includes an error correction coding unit 702, a control information generation unit 704, an interleave unit 706, a mapping unit 708, a modulation unit 710, and a radio unit 712.
The error correction coding unit 702 receives a control signal and information bits, determines the code length (block length) of the error correction code and the coding rate of the error correction code based on the control signal, and Then, error correction coding is performed based on the determined error correction coding method, and the bits after error correction coding are output to interleave section 706.

Interleaving section 706 receives the control signal and the coded bits as inputs, determines an interleaving method based on the control signal, interleaves the coded bits, and rearranges the data into a mapping section 708. Output to.
The control information generation/mapping unit 704 receives the control signal as an input, and based on the control signal, control information for operating the receiving device (for example, information about the physical layer such as an error correction method and a modulation method used by the transmitting device, , Control information other than the physical layer, etc.) is generated, mapping is performed on this information, and a control information signal is output.

The mapping unit 708 receives a control signal and rearranged data as input, determines a mapping method based on the control signal, performs mapping on the rearranged data by the determined mapping method, and outputs the baseband signal in-phase component. I and quadrature component Q are output. The modulation schemes that the mapping unit 708 can support include, for example, π/2 shift BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK, and 32APSK.

Details of (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK, and details of the mapping method that characterizes this embodiment will be described later.
Modulation section 710 receives control signal, control information signal, pilot signal, and baseband signal as input, determines a frame configuration based on the control signal, and modulates the control information signal, pilot signal, and baseband signal according to the frame configuration. Generates and outputs a signal.

The radio unit 712 receives the modulated signal as input, performs processing such as band limitation using a root roll-off filter, quadrature modulation, frequency conversion, and amplification to generate a transmission signal, and the transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna. It
<Signal point arrangement>
Next, the signal point arrangement of (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK mapping performed by the mapping unit 708, which is important in the present embodiment, and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 8, the signal points of (12,4)16APSK mapping are arranged on two concentric circles having different radii (amplitude components) on the IQ plane. In this specification, of these concentric circles, the circle with the larger radius R ₂ is called the “outer circle” and the circle with the smaller radius R ₁ is called the “inner circle”. The ratio of the radius R ₂ and the radius R ₁ is called the “radius ratio” (or “ring ratio”). Note that R ₁ is a real number and R ₂ is a real number, and R ₁ >0 and R ₂ >0. Also, R ₁ <R ₂ .

In addition, 12 signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle and 4 signal points are arranged on the circumference of the inner circle. (12,4) of (12,4)16APSK means that there are 12 signal points and 4 signal points in the order of the outer circle and the inner circle, respectively.
The coordinates of each signal point of (12,4)16APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₂ cos(π/4),R ₂ sin(π/4))
Signal point 1-2[1000]・・・(R ₂ cos(5π/12),R ₂ sin(5π/12))
Signal point 1-3[1100]・・・(R ₁ cos(π/4),R ₁ sin(π/4))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(R ₂ cos(π/12),R ₂ sin(π/12))
Signal point 2-1[0010]・・・(R ₂ cos(3π/4), R ₂ sin(3π/4))
Signal point 2-2[1010]・・・(R ₂ cos(7π/12),R ₂ sin(7π/12))
Signal point 2-3[1110]・・・(R ₁ cos(3π/4),R ₁ sin(3π/4))
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(R ₂ cos(11π/12),R ₂ sin(11π/12))
Signal point 3-1 [0011]・・・(R ₂ cos(-3π/4), R ₂ sin(-3π/4))
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(R ₂ cos(-7π/12),R ₂ sin(-7π/12))
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(R ₁ cos(-3π/4),R ₁ sin(-3π/4))
Signal point 3-4[0111]・・・(R ₂ cos(-11π/12),R ₂ sin(-11π/12))
Signal point 4-1[0001]・・・(R ₂ cos(-π/4),R ₂ sin(-π/4))
Signal point 4-2 [1001]・・・(R ₂ cos(-5π/12), R ₂ sin(-5π/12))
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(R ₁ cos(-π/4),R ₁ sin(-π/4))
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・(R ₂ cos(-π/12),R ₂ sin(-π/12))
The unit of the phase is radian. So, for example, R ₂ cos(π/4)
In, the unit of π/4 is radian. Also in the subsequent steps, the unit of phase is radian.

Also, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₂ cos(π/4),R ₂ sin(π/4))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. It means that Q is (I,Q) = (R ₂ cos(π/4),R ₂ sin(π/4)). In another example,
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・(R ₂ cos(-π/12),R ₂ sin(-π/12))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] in the data input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. It means that Q is (I,Q) = (R ₂ cos(-π/12), R ₂ sin(-π/12)).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 Will be all the same.
As shown in FIG. 9, the signal points of (8,8)16APSK mapping are arranged in two concentric circles having different radii (amplitude components) on the IQ plane. Eight signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle, and eight signal points are arranged on the circumference of the inner circle. (8,8) of (8,8)16APSK means that there are 8 signal points each in the order of the outer circle and the inner circle. Also, as in the case of (12,4)16APSK, of the concentric circles, the circle with the larger radius R ₂ is called the “outer circle” and the circle with the smaller radius R ₁ is called the “inner circle”. The ratio of the radius R ₂ and the radius R ₁ is called the “radius ratio” (or “ring ratio”). R ₁ is a real number,
R ₂ is a real number, and R ₁ >0 and R ₂ >0. R ₁ <R ₂ .

The coordinates of each signal point of (8,8)16APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₁ cos(π/8),R ₁ sin(π/8))
Signal point 1-2[0010]・・・(R ₁ cos(3π/8),R ₁ sin(3π/8))
Signal point 1-3 [0110]・・・(R ₁ cos(5π/8),R ₁ sin(5π/8))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(R ₁ cos(7π/8),R ₁ sin(7π/8))
Signal point 1-5[1100]・・・(R ₁ cos(-7π/8),R ₁ sin(-7π/8))
Signal point 1-6[1110]・・・(R ₁ cos(-5π/8),R ₁ sin(-5π/8))
Signal point 1-7[1010]・・・(R ₁ cos(-3π/8),R ₁ sin(-3π/8))
Signal point 1-8[1000]・・・(R ₁ cos(-π/8),R ₁ sin(-π/8))
Signal point 2-1[0001]・・・(R ₂ cos(π/8),R ₂ sin(π/8))
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(R ₂ cos(3π/8),R ₂ sin(3π/8))
Signal point 2-3[0111]・・・(R ₂ cos(5π/8),R ₂ sin(5π/8))
Signal point 2-4[0101]・・・(R ₂ cos(7π/8),R ₂ sin(7π/8))
Signal point 2-5[1101]・・・(R ₂ cos(-7π/8),R ₂ sin(-7π/8))
Signal point 2-6[1111]・・・(R ₂ cos(-5π/8),R ₂ sin(-5π/8))
Signal point 2-7[1011]・・・(R ₂ cos(-3π/8),R ₂ sin(-3π/8))
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・(R ₂ cos(-π/8),R ₂ sin(-π/8))
Note that, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₁ cos(π/8),R ₁ sin(π/8))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. It means that Q is (I,Q) = (R ₁ cos(π/8),R ₁ sin(π/8)). In another example,
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・(R ₂ cos(-π/8),R ₂ sin(-π/8))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] in the input data of the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. It means that Q becomes (I,Q) = (R ₂ cos(-π/8),R ₂ sin(-π/8)).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 1-5, signal point 1-6, signal point 1-7, signal point 1 -8, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4, signal point 2-5, signal point 2-6, signal point 2-7, signal point 2-8 Will be all the same.
<Sending output>
In order to make the transmission outputs of the above-mentioned two types of modulation schemes the same, the following normalization coefficient may be used.

Note that a ₍ 12,4 ₎ is a normalization coefficient of (12,4)16APSK, and a _(8,8) is a coefficient of (8,8)16APSK.

The in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b . Then, the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal is I _n and the quadrature component is Q _n . Then, when the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK, (I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×I _b ,a _(12,4) ×Q _b ), and the modulation method is In the case of (8,8)16APSK, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×I _b , a _(8,8) ×Q _b ).

In the case of (12,4)16APSK, the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b is the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. It becomes the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q. Therefore, in the case of (12,4)16APSK, the following relationship holds.
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /Four))
Signal point 1-2[1000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(5π /12))
Signal points 1-3[1100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin(π /Four))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /12))
Signal point 2-1[0010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(3
π/4))
Signal point 2-2[1010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(7π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(7π /12))
Signal point 2-3[1110]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin(3
π/4))
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(11π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(11π) /12))
Signal point 3-1[0011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -3π/4))
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -7π/12))
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin( -3π/4))
Signal point 3-4[0111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-11π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -11π/12))
Signal point 4-1[0001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -
π/4))
Signal point 4-2 [1001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -5π/12))
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin( -
π/4))
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/12))
Also, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /Four))
However, in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000], (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{(12, 4)} ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4)). In another example,
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/12))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{(12, 4)} ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(-
π/12)).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 Will be all the same.

Then, the mapping unit 708 outputs the I _n and Q _n described above as the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the baseband signal.

Similarly, in the case of (8,8)16APSK, the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b is the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. It becomes the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q of. Therefore, in the case of (8,8)16APSK, the following relationship holds.

Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(π /8)))
Signal point 1-2[0010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(3π /8)))
Signal point 1-3[0110]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(5π /8)))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(7π /8)))
Signal point 1-5[1100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -7
π/8))
Signal point 1-6[1110]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -Five
π/8))
Signal point 1-7[1010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -3
π/8))
Signal point 1-8[1000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -π/8))
Signal point 2-1[0001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /8)))
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(3π /8)))
Signal point 2-3[0111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(5π /8)))
Signal point 2-4[0101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(7π /8)))
Signal point 2-5[1101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -7
π/8))
Signal point 2-6[1111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -Five
π/8))
Signal point 2-7[1011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -3
π/8))
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/8))
Note that, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(π /8)))
However, in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000], (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{(8, 8)} ×R ₁ ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(π/8)
) Is meant. In another example,
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/8))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{(8, 8)} ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(-π/8)).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 1-5, signal point 1-6, signal point 1-7, signal point 1 -8, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4, signal point 2-5, signal point 2-6, signal point 2-7, signal point 2-8 Will be all the same.

Then, the mapping unit 708 outputs the I _n and Q _n described above as the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the baseband signal.

<Frame structure of modulated signal>
Next, a frame structure of a modulated signal when the present embodiment is applied to advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting will be described.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram regarding generation of a modulated signal. FIG. 11 shows a frame structure of a modulated signal.
It should be noted that the block relating to the modulation signal generation in FIG. 10 is the one in which the error correction coding unit 702, the control information generation and mapping unit 704, the interleave unit 706, and the mapping unit 708 in FIG. 7 are integrated and redrawn.

A TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control) signal is a control signal for controlling transmission and multiplexing such as a plurality of transmission modes (modulation method/error correction coding rate). Further, the TMCC signal indicates the allocation of the modulation scheme for each symbol (or the slot formed by a plurality of symbols).
The selecting unit 1001 in FIG. 10 switches the contact 1 and the contact 2 so that the modulated wave output symbol strings are arranged as shown in FIG. 11. Specifically, the switching is performed as listed below.

Synchronous transmission: Contact 1=d, Contact 2=e
At the time of pilot transmission: contact 1=c, contact 2=a to e are selected by the modulation method assigned to the slot (or symbol). (This will be explained in detail later.)

When sending TMCC: Contact 1=b, Contact 2=e
At the time of data transmission: contact 1=a, contact 2=a to e are selected by the modulation method assigned to the slot (or symbol). Alternatively, you may make a regular) choice, which will be discussed in more detail later.)

It is assumed that the information for the arrangement shown in FIG. 11 is included in the control signal of FIG.

The interleaving section 706 performs bit interleaving (bit rearrangement) based on the information of the control signal.
The mapping unit 708 performs mapping according to the method selected by the selection unit 1001 based on the information of the control signal.
The modulator 710 performs processing such as time division multiplexing/quadrature modulation and band limitation by a root roll-off filter based on the information of the control signal, and outputs a modulated wave.

<Example of data symbol relating to the present invention>
As described above, in advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting, (12,4)16APSK is used as a modulation method for transmitting 16 bits on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, that is, 4 bits per 1 symbol. It is adopted. One of the reasons is that (12,4)16APSK PAPR is smaller than, for example, 16QAM PAPR, (8,8)16APSK PAPR, and the broadcasting station, that is, the average transmission power of the radio waves transmitted from the satellite is increased. This is because there is an advantage that it can be done. Therefore, (12,4)16APSK has worse BER characteristics than 16QAM and (8,8)16APSK, but considering that the average transmission power can be set large, it is likely that a wide receivable area can be secured. ..
(This point is as described above.)
Therefore, in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, the modulation method (or
As a transmission method), if the PAPR is small and the BER characteristics are good, there is a high possibility that a wide receivable area can be secured. The present invention is based on this point. (Note that "good BER characteristics" corresponds to a smaller BER at a certain SNR.)
The essence of the method of constructing a data symbol, which is one of the present invention, is as follows.

“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). There is no continuous part, and there is no continuous part of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
"
(However, as described in the modification below, there is a transmission method that can obtain the same effect as the above-mentioned symbol arrangement example even if the method does not satisfy this.)

A specific example of this point will be described below.

The 136 symbols of Data#7855 shown in FIG. 11 are, as shown in FIG. 11, “first symbol”, “second symbol”, “third symbol”,... .., "135th symbol", "136th symbol".

At this time, it is assumed that the odd-numbered symbols have a modulation scheme of (12,4)16APSK and the even-numbered symbols have a modulation scheme of (8,8)16APSK.
An example of data symbols in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 12 shows 6 symbols out of 136 symbols (from “the 51st symbol” to “the 56th symbol”). As shown in FIG. 12, adjacent to (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK, (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK, (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK. It can be seen that two types of modulation schemes are alternately used between the symbols to be used.

In addition, in FIG. 12, it is as follows.
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] transmitted in the “51st symbol”, and as shown in FIG. 12, the in-phase component of the baseband signal corresponding to the signal point of ● and the quadrature The transmitting device transmits the component. (Modulation method: (12,4)16APSK)
The four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [0101] transmitted in the "52nd symbol", and as shown in Fig. 12, the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the baseband signal corresponding to the signal point of ●. The transmitting device transmits the component. (Modulation method: (8,8)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] transmitted in the “53rd symbol”, and as shown in FIG. 12, the in-phase component of the baseband signal corresponding to the signal point of ● and the quadrature The transmitting device transmits the component. (Modulation method: (12,4)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] transmitted in the “54th symbol”, and as shown in FIG. 12, the in-phase component of the baseband signal corresponding to the signal point of ● and the quadrature The transmitting device transmits the component. (Modulation method: (8,8)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] transmitted in the “55th symbol”, and as shown in FIG. 12, the in-phase component of the baseband signal corresponding to the signal point of ● and the quadrature The transmitting device transmits the component. (Modulation method: (12,4)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] transmitted in the “56th symbol”, and as shown in FIG. 12, the in-phase component of the baseband signal corresponding to the signal point of ● and the quadrature The transmitting device transmits the component. (Modulation method: (8,8)16APSK)

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, "the odd-numbered symbol is (12,4)16APSK, the even-numbered symbol is the modulation system of (8,8)16APSK" is explained, but "the odd-numbered symbol May be configured to have a modulation scheme of (8,8)16APSK and even-numbered symbols of (12,4)16APSK”.

As a result, the transmission method has a small PAPR and a good BER characteristic, the average transmission power can be set to a large value, and the BER characteristic is good, so there is a high possibility that a wide receivable area can be secured.

<Advantages of alternately arranging symbols of different modulation methods>

In the present invention, in the modulation scheme having 16 signal points on the IQ plane, in particular, (12,4)16APSK having a small PAPR and (8,8)16APSK having a slightly large PAPR,

“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). There is no continuous part, and there is no continuous part of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
I am doing it."

When (8,8)16APSK symbols are arranged consecutively, PAPR becomes large because the (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive. But in order not to be continuous,
“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). There is no continuous part, and there is no continuous part of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
In this case, since the signal points associated with (8,8)16APSK do not continue, it is possible to obtain the effect of being affected by (12,4)16APSK having a small PAPR and suppressing PAPR.

In terms of BER characteristics, when (12,4)16APSK continues, the BER characteristics are poor during BICM (or BICM-ID),
“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). There is no continuous part, and there is no continuous part of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
By this, it is possible to obtain the effect that the BER characteristic is improved due to the influence of the symbol of (8,8)16APSK.

In particular, in order to obtain the above small PAPR, it is important to set the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio of (8,8)16APSK.
From R ₁ and R ₂ used to represent the signal points in the IQ plane of (12,4)16APSK, the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4) of (12,4)16APSK is R _(12,4) = It is represented as R ₂ /R ₁ .
Similarly, from R ₁ and R ₂ used to represent the signal points on the IQ plane of (8,8)16APSK, the ring ratio R _(8,8) of (8,8)16APSK is calculated as R _{(8,8) . 8)} =R ₂ /R ₁

At this time, it is possible to obtain an effect that “when R _(8,8) <R _(12,4) is satisfied, it is more likely that PAPR can be further reduced”.

“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). If there is no continuous part and there is no continuous (8,8)16APSK symbol," the modulation method that is likely to dominate the peak power is (8,8)16APSK. Becomes
At this time, the peak power generated in (8,8)16APSK is likely to increase as R _(8,8) increases. Therefore, in order not to increase the peak power, it is better to set R _(8,8) smaller, while R ₍ 12,4) of ₍ 12,4)16APSK is set to a value that improves the BER characteristics. The freedom is high if you do it. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the relationship of R _(8,8) <R _(12,4) is good.
However, even if R _(8,8) >R _(12,4) , the effect that the PAPR of (8,8)16APSK can be made smaller can be obtained. Therefore, when focusing on improving the BER characteristic, R _(8,8) >R _(12,4) may be good in some cases.
The above-described relationship of the ring ratio is the same in the case of the modification (<Pattern for switching the modulation system etc.>) described below.
According to the embodiments described above, by arranging symbols of different modulation schemes alternately, PAPR is small and it is possible to contribute to providing good data reception quality.
The essence of the present invention is, as described above,
“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). There is no continuous part, and there is no part with (8,8)16APSK symbol continuity.
"
Is. In the following, (12,4)16APSK labeling and constellation, and (8,8)16APSK labeling and signal constellation are used to increase the possibility that the receiving device can obtain high data reception quality. The arrangement will be described.

<(12,4)16APSK labeling and signal point arrangement>

[About labeling of (12,4)16APSK]

Here, labeling of (12,4)16APSK will be described. Labeling is the relationship between the input 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] and the arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. FIG. 8 shows an example of labeling of (12,4)16APSK, but labeling may satisfy the following <Condition 1> and <Condition 2>.

For the sake of explanation, the following definitions are made.
When the transmitted 4 bits are [b _a3 b _a2 b _a1 b _a0 ], the signal point A is given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and when the transmitted 4 bits are [b _b3 b _b2 b _b1 b _b0 ]. , The signal point B is given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. At this time,
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 0.

Moreover, it defines as follows.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 4.
Then, the group is defined. In the labeling and signal point arrangement of (12,4)16APSK on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of FIG. 8, “signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4 are grouped. 1” is defined. Similarly, "Signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4 group 2", "signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3 , Signal point 3-4 is defined as group 3, and signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, and signal point 4-4 are defined as group 4.

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 1>:
X is 1,2,3,4, and the following holds for all X satisfying this.
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-4 and signal point X-1 is 1

<Condition 2>:
For the outer circle,
The number of bits with different labeling between signal points 1-2 and 2-2 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point 3-2 and signal point 4-2 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling for signal points 1-4 and 4-4 is 1
The number of different labeling bits for signal points 2-4 and 3-4 is 1
Holds, and for the inner circle,
The number of bits with different labeling for signal points 1-3 and 2-3 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling for signal points 2-3 and 3-3 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling for signal points 3-3 and 4-3 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling for signal points 4-3 and 1-3 is 1
Is established.

In view of the above, the number of bits that are different from each signal point in labeling in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane and that are close to each other is small, so that the receiving apparatus may obtain high data reception quality. Becomes higher. Then, this increases the possibility that high reception quality of data can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs the iterative detection.

[About the constellation of (12,4)16APSK]

Although the signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of FIG. 14 have been described above, the signal point arrangement and labeling method on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane are not limited to this. For example, consider the following as the coordinates and labeling on the IQ plane of each signal point of (12,4)16APSK.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(π/4)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(π/4), sin θ
×R ₂ ×cos(π/4) + cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 1-2 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(5π/12)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(5π/12), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(5π/12) + cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(5π/12))
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(π/4), sin θ
×R ₁ ×cos(π/4) + cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(π/12)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(π/12), sin
θ × R ₂ × cos(π/12) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(3π/4)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(3π/4), sin
θ × R ₂ × cos(3π/4) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(3π/4))
Coordinates on the IQ plane of signal points _{2-2: (cosθR 2 × cos (} 7π / 12) × -sinθ × R 2 × sin (7π / 12), sinθ × R 2 × cos (7π / 12) + cosθ × R ₂ ×sin(7π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(3π/4), sin
θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/4) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 2-4 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(11π/12)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(11π/12), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(11π/12) + cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(11π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 3-1 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-3π/4)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-3π/4), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-3π/4) )+ cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-2 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-7π/12)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-7π/12), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-7π/12 )+ cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-7π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 3-3 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-3π/4), sin θ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/4 )+ cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-4 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-11π/12)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-11π/12), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-11π/12) )+ cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-11π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 4-1 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-π/4)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-π/4), sin
θ × R ₂ × cos(-π/4) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 4-2 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-5π/12)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-5π/12), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-5π/12 )+ cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-5π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 4-3 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-π/4), sin
θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/4) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 4-4 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-π/12)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-π/12), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-π/12 )+ cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-π/12))
The unit of the phase is radian. Therefore, the in-phase component of the baseband signal after normalization I _n, the quadrature component Q _n is expressed as follows.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ × sin(π/4), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₂ × cos(π/4) + a _(12,4) × cos θ × R ₂ × sin(
π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 1-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(5π/12)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ × sin(5π/12), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₂ × cos(5π/12) + a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂
×sin(5π/12))
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₁ × sin(π/4), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₁ × cos(π/4) + a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × sin(
π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cos θ × R ₂ × cos(π/12)- a _(12,4
) × sin θ × R ₂ × sin(π/12), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₂ × cos(π/12) + a _(12,4) × cos θ × R ₂ × sin(π/12 ))
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(3π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ × sin(3π/4), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₂ × cos(3π/4) + a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθR ₂ × cos(7π/12) ×- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(7π/12), a _(12,4) ×sin θ × R ₂ × cos(7π/12) + a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × sin(7π/12))
Coordinates of signal points 2-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(3π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₁ × sin(3π/4), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/4) + a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 2-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(11π/12)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ × sin(11π/12), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₂ × cos(11π/12) + a ₍ 12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × sin(11π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 3-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-3π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/4) + a _(12,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂
×sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-7π/12)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-7π/12), a _(12,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/12) + a _(12,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(-7π/12) )
Coordinates of signal point 3-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₁ ×sin(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/4) + a _(12,4) ×cos θ ×R ₁
×sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-11π/12)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-11π/12), a _(12,4) ×sin θ × R ₂ ×cos(-11π/12) + a _(12,4) ×cos
θ × R ₂ × sin(-11π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 4-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-π/4), a _(12,4) ×sin θ × R ₂ ×cos(-π/4) + a _(12,4) ×cos θ × R ₂ ×sin(-π/4) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-5π/12)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-5π/12), a _(12,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/12) + a _(12,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(-5π/12) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(-π/4)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₁ × sin(-π/4), a _(12,4) × sin θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/4) + a _(12,4) × cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-π/4) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(12,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-π/12)- a _(12,4) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×sin θ × R ₂ ×cos(-π/12) + a _(12,4) ×cos θ × R ₂ ×sin(-π/12) )
Note that θ is a phase given on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and a _(12,4) is as shown in the equation (23). And

"A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK symbols in a symbol group with 3 or more (or 4 or more) consecutive symbols. There is no continuous part, and there is no continuous part of the (8,8)16APSK symbol.” In the method, the coordinates on the IQ plane of each signal point of the (12,4)16APSK are given above. And (12,4)16APSK that satisfies both <Condition 1> and <Condition 2>.

As an example satisfying the above, an example of (12,4)16APSK signal point arrangement and labeling is shown in FIG. In FIG. 15, all signal points are rotated by π/6 radians with respect to FIG. 14, and θ=π/6 radians.

<(8,8)16APSK labeling and signal point arrangement>

[About labeling of (8,8)16APSK]

Here, labeling of (8,8)16APSK will be described. FIG. 9 shows an example of labeling of (8,8)16APSK, but any labeling that satisfies the following <Condition 3> and <Condition 4> is acceptable.

For the sake of explanation, the following definitions are made.
As shown in FIG. 16, eight signal points on the circumference of the inner circle "signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 1-5, Signal point 1-6, signal point 1-7, signal point 1-8" are defined as group 1. Then, eight signal points on the circumference of the outer circle “signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4, signal point 2-5, signal point 2-6 , Signal point 2-7, signal point 2-8” are defined as group 2.

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 3>:
X is 1,2, and the following holds for all X satisfying this.
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-4 and signal point X-5 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-5 and signal point X-6 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-6 and signal point X-7 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-7 and signal point X-8 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-8 and signal point X-1 is 1

The definition of the number of bits with different labeling is as described above.
<Condition 4>:
Z is 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, and the following holds for all Z satisfying this.
The number of different labeling bits for signal point 1-Z and signal point 2-Z is 1

In view of the above, the number of bits that are different from each signal point in labeling in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane and that are close to each other is small, so that the receiving apparatus may obtain high data reception quality. Becomes higher. Then, this increases the possibility that high reception quality of data can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs the iterative detection.

[About (8,8)16APSK signal point arrangement]

Although the signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of FIG. 16 have been described above, the signal point arrangement and labeling method on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane are not limited to this. For example, consider the following as the coordinates and labeling on the IQ plane of each signal point of (8,8)16APSK.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(π/8), sin θ
×R ₁ ×cos(π/8) + cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-2 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(3π/8), sin
θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/8) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(3π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(5π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(5π/8), sin
θ × R ₁ × cos(5π/8) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(5π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(7π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(7π/8), sin
θ × R ₁ × cos(7π/8) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-5 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-7π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-7π/8), sin θ × R ₁ × cos(-7π/8) ) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-6 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-5π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-5π/8), sin θ × R ₁ × cos(-5π/8) ) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-5π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-7 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-3π/8), sin θ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/8) ) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-3π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-8 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/8)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-π/8), sin
θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/8) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(π/8), sin θ
×R ₂ ×cos(π/8) + cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(3π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(3π/8), sin
θ × R ₂ × cos(3π/8) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(3π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(5π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(5π/8), sin
θ × R ₂ × cos(5π/8) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(5π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-4 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(7π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(7π/8), sin
θ × R ₂ × cos(7π/8) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 2-5 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-7π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-7π/8), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-7π/8) )+ cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 2-6 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-5π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-5π/8), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-5π/8) ) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-5π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-7 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-3π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-3π/8), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(-3π/8) ) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-3π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-8 on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(-π/8)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(-π/8), sin
θ × R ₂ × cos(-π/8) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(-π/8))
The unit of the phase is radian. Therefore, the in-phase component of the baseband signal after normalization I _n, the quadrature component Q _n is expressed as follows.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₁ × sin(π/8), a _(8,8) × sin θ × R ₁ × cos(π/8) + a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₁ × sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cos θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(3
π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(5π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₁ ×sin(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(5π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(7π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₁ ×sin(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(7π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-5 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(-7π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₁ ×sin(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(-7π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-6 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(-5π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₁ ×sin(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(-5π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-7 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₁ ×sin(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-3π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-8 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-π /8)))
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₂ × sin(π/8), a _(8,8) × sin θ × R ₂ × cos(π/8) + a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₂ × sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cos θ × R ₂ × cos(3π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(3π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(3π/8) )
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(5π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal point 2-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cos θ × R ₂ × cos(7π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(7π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-5 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-7π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(-7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-6 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-5π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(-5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-7 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-3π/8)- a _(8,8) × sinθ × R ₂ ×sin(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(-3π/8) )
Coordinates of signal point 2-8 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(8,8) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(-π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/8) + a _(8,8) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(-π /8)))
Note that θ is a phase given on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and a _(8,8) is as shown in the equation (24). And

“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). There is no continuous part, and there is no continuous part of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
In the above method, the coordinates on the IQ plane of each signal point of (8,8)16APSK are given above, and <
It may be (8,8)16APSK that satisfies the conditions 3> and <condition 4>.

Further, for example, in a symbol group in which a symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more) consecutively, (12,4) There is no portion where the symbols of 16APSK are continuous and there is no portion where the symbols of (8,8)16APSK are continuous.” In the above description, θ of (12,4)16APSK is θ= If (N × π)/2 radians (N is an integer) and θ of (8,8)16APSK is θ = π/8 + (N × π)/4 radians (N is an integer), PAPR can be slightly reduced. There is a nature. Note that FIG. 17 is an example of signal point arrangement and labeling when θ=π/8 radians.

<Pattern for switching modulation method etc.>
In the example of FIG. 12, the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol are alternately switched (the (12,4)16APSK symbol is not continuous and (8,8) ) 16APSK symbols are not consecutive). Hereinafter, a modified example of the above method will be described.

23 and 24 are diagrams related to the modified example. The characteristics of the modified example are as follows.
-One cycle is composed of M consecutive symbols. Note that, for the following description, the continuous M symbols forming one cycle are named (defined) as a “symbol group of cycle M”. Note that description will be made below with reference to FIG.
-When the number of consecutive symbols is M+1 symbols or more, a plurality of "symbol groups of period M" are arranged. Note that this point will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 23 shows an example of the configuration of a symbol group in the case of “a symbol group of period M=5”. The feature in FIG. 23 is that the following two are satisfied.
-In the "symbol group of period M=5", the number of symbols of (8,8)16APSK is one more than the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK is two. Yes, the number of symbols in (8,8)16APSK is 3.
In the “symbol group of period M=5”, there is no place where two (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive, or there is one place where two (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive. (Therefore, there is no place where (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive for 3 symbols or more.)

When the above two conditions are satisfied, there are five methods of forming a “symbol group of period M=5” in (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) of FIG. Note that in FIG. 23, the horizontal axis represents time.

When the “symbol group with period M=5” is configured as shown in FIG. 23A, the “symbol group with period M=5” is defined as (8,8)16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK symbols, Symbols are arranged in the order of (8,8)16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK symbols, and (8,8)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group of period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the “symbol group with period M=5” is configured as shown in FIG. 23B, the “symbol group with period M=5” is defined as (12,4)16APSK symbols, (8,8)16APSK symbols, Symbols are arranged in the order of (12,4)16APSK symbols, (8,8)16APSK symbols, and (8,8)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group of period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the “symbol group with period M=5” is configured as shown in FIG. 23C, the “symbol group with period M=5” is defined as (8,8)16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK symbols, The symbols are arranged in the order of (8,8)16APSK symbols, (8,8)16APSK symbols, and (12,4)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group of period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the “symbol group with period M=5” is configured as shown in FIG. 23D, the “symbol group with period M=5” is defined as a symbol of (12,4)16APSK, a symbol of (8,8)16APSK, Symbols are arranged in the order of (8,8)16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK symbols, and (8,8)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group of period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the “symbol group with period M=5” is configured as shown in FIG. 23E, the “symbol group with period M=5” is defined as a symbol of (8,8)16APSK, a symbol of (8,8)16APSK, The symbols are arranged in the order of (12,4)16APSK symbols, (8,8)16APSK symbols, and (12,4)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group of period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

Although the method of forming the “symbol group of period M=5” has been described with reference to FIG. 23,
The period M is not limited to 5 and may be configured as follows.
In the “group of symbols of period M”, the number of symbols of (8,8)16APSK is one more than the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK is N, The number of symbols of (8,8)16APSK is N+1. Note that N is a natural number.
-In the "period M symbol group", there are no two consecutive (8,8)16APSK symbols, or there is one continuous (8,8)16APSK symbol.
(Therefore, there is no place where (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive for 3 symbols or more.)
Therefore, the period M of the “symbol group of period M” is an odd number of 3 or more, but the period M is an odd number of 5 or more in consideration of the increase from PAPR when the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK. This is preferable, but there is an advantage that even if the period M is set to 3, it can be made smaller than the PAPR of (8,8)16APSK.

In the above description, the configuration based on the “symbol group of period M” has been described, but if the periodic configuration is not adopted, it is preferable to have the following features.
-When the data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a (8,8)16APSK symbol, where three or more (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive in the consecutive data symbol group. Does not exist.

For (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK signal point arrangement, labeling, and ring ratio,
When the conditions described above are satisfied at the same time as described above, the same effect can be obtained.

In the case described above, there may be two consecutive (8,8)16APSK symbols, but it is possible to obtain the effect that the PAPR can be made smaller than the PAPR of (8,8)16APSK. , (12,4)16APSK, it is possible to obtain the effect of improving the data reception quality.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a supplementary explanation will be given on a method of constructing a symbol when another symbol is inserted into a continuous symbol composed of a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a (8,8)16APSK symbol. I do.

In FIG. 24A, 2400 and 2409 are other symbol groups (however, they may be consecutive symbols or the number of symbols may be 1). Note that the other symbol groups may be control symbols for transmitting a transmission method such as a modulation method and an error correction coding method, or a pilot for the receiving apparatus to perform channel estimation, frequency synchronization, and time synchronization. It may be a symbol or reference symbol, or (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK
It may be a data symbol modulated by a modulation method other than. That is, it is assumed that the other symbol groups are symbols of the modulation schemes other than (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK.

In FIG. 24A, reference numerals 2401, 2404, 2407, and 2410 are the first symbols of the “cycle M symbol group” (the “cycle M symbol group” is the beginning symbol of the cycle). 2403, 2406, and 2412 are the last symbols of the “symbol group of period M” (the last symbols of the period in the “symbol group of period M”).
2402, 2405, 2408, and 2411 are intermediate symbol groups of the “period M symbol group” (the symbol groups excluding the first symbol and the last symbol in the “period M symbol group”).

FIG. 24A shows an example of arrangement of symbols on the horizontal axis. In FIG. 24A, immediately after the "other symbol group" 2400, the first symbol 2401 of the "symbol group of period M" is arranged. After that, the intermediate symbol group 2402 of the “period M symbol group” and the last symbol 2403 of the “period M symbol group” are arranged. Therefore, immediately after the “other symbol group” 2400, the “first symbol group of period M” is arranged.

Immediately after the “first period M symbol group”, the first symbol 2404 of the “period M symbol group”, the intermediate symbol group 2405 of the “period M symbol group”, and the “period M symbol group” are displayed. A “second symbol group of period M” including the last symbol 2406 is arranged.
The first symbol 2407 of the “symbol group of the period M” is arranged after the “second symbol group of the period M”, and then a part 2408 of the intermediate symbol group of the “symbol group of the period M” 2408. Are placed.

An "other symbol group" 2409 is arranged after a part 2408 of the intermediate symbol group of the "period M symbol group".
The characteristic point of FIG. 24A is that after the “other symbol group” 2409, the first symbol 2410 of the “period M symbol group”, the intermediate symbol group 2411 of the “period M symbol group”, and the “period” This is the point at which the “symbol group of period M” including the last symbol 2412 of the “M symbol group” is arranged.

FIG. 24B shows an example of arrangement of symbols on the horizontal axis. In FIG. 24B, immediately after the “other symbol group” 2400, the first symbol 2401 of the “symbol group of period M” is arranged. After that, the intermediate symbol group 2402 of the “period M symbol group” and the last symbol 2403 of the “period M symbol group” are arranged. Therefore, immediately after the “other symbol group” 2400, the “first symbol group of period M” is arranged.

Immediately after the “first period M symbol group”, the first symbol 2404 of the “period M symbol group”, the intermediate symbol group 2405 of the “period M symbol group”, and the “period M symbol group” are displayed. A “second symbol group of period M” including the last symbol 2406 is arranged.
The first symbol 2407 of the “symbol group of the period M” is arranged after the “second symbol group of the period M”, and then a part 2408 of the intermediate symbol group of the “symbol group of the period M” 2408. Are placed.

An "other symbol group" 2409 is arranged after a part 2408 of the intermediate symbol group of the "period M symbol group".
The characteristic point of FIG. 24B is that after the “other symbol group” 2409, the remaining part 2408-2 of the intermediate symbol group of the “period M symbol group”, and then “the period M This is the point where the last symbol 2413 of the “symbol group” is arranged. The first symbol 2407 of the “cycle M symbol group”, a part 2408 of the intermediate symbol group of the “cycle M”, and the remaining part 2408-2 of the intermediate symbol group of the “cycle M symbol group” 2408-2 , The last symbol 2413 of the “cycle M symbol group” forms a “cycle M symbol group”.
After the last symbol 2413 of the "cycle M symbol group", the first symbol 2414 of the "cycle M symbol group", the intermediate symbol group 2415 of the "cycle M symbol group", and the last of the "cycle M symbol group" A “group of symbols of period M” composed of the symbols 2416 is arranged.

In FIG. 24, the configuration of the “cycle M symbol group” may be the configuration of the above-described “cycle M symbol group” described with reference to FIG. 23 as an example, or the “modulation method is (12,4)”. 16APSK or (8,8
) In a symbol group in which any of 16APSK symbols are consecutive 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more), there is no portion where (12,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive, and (8,8) 16APSK symbols do not have continuous parts. It may be configured.

For (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK signal point arrangement, labeling, and ring ratio,
When the conditions described above are satisfied at the same time as described above, the same effect can be obtained.

In the examples described so far, 16APSK is taken as an example of the modulation method used for switching, but the same can be applied to 32APSK and 64APSK.

The method of constructing consecutive symbols is as described above. The symbols of the first modulation scheme of the first signal point constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane and the second symbol of the second signal point constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. The symbols of the two modulation schemes are composed of "a symbol group of period M". (However, the number of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the first modulation scheme is equal to the number of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the second modulation scheme.)
Three symbols are symbols that are either the first modulation scheme with the first signal point arrangement on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane or the second modulation scheme with the second signal point arrangement on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane In the above (or 4 or more symbols) continuous symbol group, there is no portion where the symbols of the first modulation scheme are continuous, and there is no portion where the symbols of the second modulation scheme are continuous. (However, the number of signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the first modulation method is equal to the number of signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the second modulation method.)
And
FIG. 25 shows an arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane in the two 32 APSK schemes in which the number of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is 32 in the above-described two kinds of consecutive symbol construction methods.

FIG. 25A shows a signal point arrangement on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (4,12,16)32APSK.
There are a=4 signal points in a circle of radius R ₁ centered on the origin, b=12 signal points in a circle of radius R ₂ , and c=16 signal points in a circle of radius R ₃ . Therefore, since (a,b,c)=(4,12,16), it is described as (4,12,16)32APSK. (Note that R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
FIG. 25B is a signal point constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (8,8,16)32APSK. A = 8 signal points in a circle with radius R ₁ centered on the origin, b = 8 signal points in a circle with radius R ₂ , radius R ₃
There are c=16 signal points in the circle. Therefore, since (a,b,c)=(8,8,16), it is described as (8,8,16)32APSK. (Note that R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
25(a) and (8,8,16)32APSK in FIG. 25(b) may realize the above-described two types of continuous symbol structuring methods. (That is, in the above-described two types of continuous symbol configuration methods, the first modulation scheme and the second modulation scheme are (4,12,16)32APSK and (8,8,16)32APSK.)
Further, there are a=16 signal points in a circle with a radius R ₁ centered on the origin, and b=16 signal points in a circle with a radius R ₂ (a,b)=(16,16) Therefore, it is described as (16,16)32APSK. (Note that R ₁ <R ₂ )
Then, the (4, 12, 16) 32APSK and (16, 16) 32APSK of FIG. (That is, in the above-mentioned two types of continuous symbol configuration methods, the first modulation scheme and the second modulation scheme are (4,12,16)32APSK and (16,16)32APSK.)
In addition, a γ-system 32APSK having a different signal constellation from (4,12,16)32APSK, (8,8,16)32APSK, and (16,16)32APSK will be considered. Then, the (4,12,16)32APSK of FIG. 25A and the γ-method 32APSK may realize the above-described two types of continuous symbol configuration methods. (That is, in the above-mentioned two types of continuous symbol configuration methods, the first modulation scheme and the second modulation scheme are (4, 12, 16
) 32APSK and γ method 32APSK. )

The labeling method for the signal point constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (12,4)16APSK and the labeling method for the signal point constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (8,8)16APSK labeling However, a labeling method for signal point arrangement on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane different from the present embodiment may be applied. (There is a possibility that the same effect as this embodiment can be obtained.)

(Embodiment 2)
<Example of pilot symbol>
In this embodiment, a configuration example of pilot symbols in the transmission scheme described in above Embodiment 1 will be described.

The configuration of the transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

Due to the non-linearity of the power amplifier of the transmission device, intermodulation (intersymbol) interference occurs in the modulated signal. The receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing the intersymbol interference.

In the configuration example of this pilot symbol, in order to reduce inter-code (inter-symbol) interference at the receiving device, the transmitting device

“A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK in a symbol group that continues for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). There is no continuous part and there is no continuous (8,8)16APSK symbol."
Is satisfied, the baseband signals corresponding to all the signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that the (12,4)16APSK can take (that is, the transmitted 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] are [ 0000] to [1111] corresponding to 16 signal points) and (8,8)16APSK in-phase I-quadrature Q
Baseband signals corresponding to all signal points on the plane (that is, baseband signals corresponding to 16 signal points from [0000] to [1111] where the transmitted 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] are) We propose a method to generate and transmit as a pilot symbol. As a result, the receiving device can receive all the signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that the (12,4)16APSK can take and all the signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that the (8,8)16APSK can take. Since it is possible to estimate intersymbol interference in, it is highly possible to obtain high data reception quality.

In the example of FIG. 13,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b _{0 of} (8,8)16APSK ]=[0000] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b _{0 of} (8,8)16APSK ]=[0001] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b _{0 of} (8,8)16APSK ]=[0010] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b _{0 of} (8,8)16APSK ]=[0011] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b _{0 of} (8,8)16APSK ]=[0100] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b _{0 of} (8,8)16APSK ]=[1010] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(12,4)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] signal point (baseband signal) symbol, (8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b _{0 of} (8,8)16APSK ]=[1111] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

The above features are
<1>Symbols corresponding to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that (12,4)16APSK can take, that is,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (12,4)16APSK,
While sending
Symbols corresponding to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that (8,8)16APSK can take, that is,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (8,8)16APSK,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (8,8)16APSK,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (8,8)16APSK,
To send.

<2> In a symbol group composed of continuous pilot symbols, there is no continuous portion of (12,4)16APSK symbols, and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols. Become. By <1> described above, the receiving apparatus can estimate the intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high data reception quality. Then, due to the above <2>, it is possible to obtain the effect that the PAPR can be reduced.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

The operation of the receiving device will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 2, reference numeral 210 is the configuration of the receiving device. The demapping unit 214 of FIG. 2 performs demapping on the mapping of the modulation method used by the transmission device, for example, obtains and outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 2, in order to perform demapping with high accuracy, estimation of intersymbol interference, estimation of radio wave propagation environment between transmission device and reception device (channel estimation), It is recommended to estimate the time synchronization and frequency offset of.

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the receiving device includes an inter-symbol interference estimation unit, a channel estimation unit, a time synchronization unit, and a frequency offset estimation unit. These estimation units extract, for example, a pilot symbol portion from the received signal, estimate intersymbol interference, estimate radio wave propagation environment between the transmission device and the reception device (channel estimation), and transmit/receive between the transmitter and receiver, respectively. Time synchronization and frequency offset estimation are performed. Then, the demapping unit 214 in FIG. 2 receives these estimated signals and performs demapping based on these estimated signals, thereby calculating, for example, the log likelihood ratio.

Moreover, the transmission method of the pilot symbols is not limited to the example of FIG. 13, and may be any transmission method that satisfies both of <1><2> described above. For example, the modulation scheme of the first symbol in FIG. 13 may be (8,8)16APSK, and the transmission order of [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] may be any order. The pilot symbol is composed of 32 symbols, but is not limited to this, but it is preferable that <1><2> is satisfied. Therefore, 32 × N
(However, N is a natural number)
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (12,4)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (12,4)16APSK,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (8,8)16APSK,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (8,8)16APSK,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (8,8)16APSK,
There is an advantage that the number of appearances of each symbol can be made equal.

(Embodiment 3)
<Signaling>
In this embodiment, in order to allow the receiving apparatus to smoothly receive the transmission signal using the transmission method described in the above-mentioned first and second embodiments, various information signals that are signaled as TMCC information are transmitted. A configuration example will be described.

The configuration of the transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 18 shows an image diagram of a frame structure of a transmission signal in advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting. (However, it is not an accurate illustration of the frame structure of advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting.)
FIG. 18A shows a frame configuration in the horizontal axis time, and is arranged along with "#1 symbol group", "#2 symbol group", "#3 symbol group",.... I shall. At this time, each symbol group of “#1 symbol group”, “#2 symbol group”, “#3 symbol group”,... It is assumed to be composed of "pilot symbol group", "TMCC information symbol group", and "slot composed of data symbol group". The “synchronization symbol group” is, for example, a symbol for the receiving apparatus to perform time synchronization/frequency synchronization, and the “pilot symbol group” is the symbol for the processing as described above. The pilot symbol group” will be used.

A “slot composed of a data symbol group” is composed of data symbols. Then, it is assumed that the transmission method such as the error correction code, the coding rate, the code length, and the modulation method used for generating the data symbol can be switched. The information regarding the transmission method such as the error correction code, the coding rate, the code length, and the modulation method used for generating the data symbol is transmitted to the receiving apparatus by the “TMCC information symbol group”.

FIG. 18B shows an example of the structure of the “TMCC information symbol group”. In the following, the configuration of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group” which is particularly related to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 18C shows the structure of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group". In FIG. 18C, there are "transmission mode 1" to "transmission mode 8", but "slot composed of data symbol group of #1 symbol group", "data of symbol group of #2" A slot composed of a symbol group”, a “slot composed of a data symbol group of the symbol group #3”,... belongs to any one of “transmission mode 1” to “transmission mode 8”. Become.

Therefore, symbols for transmitting the modulation schemes of the respective transmission modes of FIG. 18C, (in FIG. 18C, “modulation scheme of transmission mode 1”,..., “Modulation scheme of transmission mode 8”) The information of the modulation method for generating the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" is transmitted.
Further, symbols for transmitting the coding rate of each transmission mode of FIG. 18C, (in FIG. 18C, “coding rate of transmission mode 1”,..., “Code of transmission mode 8”). The coding rate information of the error correction code for generating the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" is transmitted.

Table 1 shows the structure of the modulation method information. In Table 1, for example, when 4 bits transmitted by a symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode of "transmission mode/slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", it is composed of "data symbol group". The modulation method for generating the symbol of “slot” is π/2 shift BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method for generating is QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying).
When 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation mode of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0011", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method to generate is 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0100", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method for generating is (12,4)16APSK.
When the 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation mode of the transmission mode of "Transmission mode/Slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group" are "0101", the symbol of "Slot composed of data symbol group" The modulation scheme for generating is (8,8)16APSK.

When the 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation mode of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0110", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method for generating is 32APSK (32 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying).
When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the modulation mode of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0111", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method for generating is a “transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed” (for example, the transmission method described in the first embodiment. Then, other transmission methods (for example, Embodiment 4 and the like) are also described.
...

Table 2 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio when the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK. Incidentally, from the R ₁ and R ₂ which was used to represent the signal points in the above so the (12,4) 16APSK the I-Q plane, the (12,4) Ring ratio 16APSK R _(12,4) R _{( 12,4)} = shall be represented as R ₂ / R _1. In Table 2, for example, when 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group” are “0000”, The coding rate of the error-correction code for generating the symbol of "consisting slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK. , It means that the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ =3.09 of ₍ 12,4)16APSK.

When 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot formed of the data symbol group" It shows that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 49/120 (≈2/5) and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK. If so, it means that the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ =2.97 of ₍ 12,4)16APSK.
When 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group” are “0010”, the “slot formed of the data symbol group” It shows that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 61/120 (≈1/2) and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK. If so, it means that the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ =3.93 of ₍ 12,4)16APSK.
...

Table 3 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio when the modulation method is (8,8)16APSK. Incidentally, from the R ₁ and R ₂ which was used to represent the signal points in the above so the (8,8) 16APSK the I-Q plane, the (8,8) Ring ratio 16APSK R _(8,8) R _{( 8,8)} = shall be represented as R ₂ / R _1. In Table 3, for example, when 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", The coding rate of the error-correction code for generating the symbol of "consisting slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (8,8)16APSK. , It means that the ring ratio R _(8,8) =2.70 of (8,8)16APSK.

When 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot formed of the data symbol group" It shows that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 49/120 (≈2/5) and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (8,8)16APSK. If so, it means that the ring ratio R _(8,8) of the (8,8)16APSK is 2.60.
When 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group” are “0010”, the “slot formed of the data symbol group” It shows that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 61/120 (≈1/2) and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (8,8)16APSK. If so, it means that the ring ratio R _(8,8) =2.50 of (8,8)16APSK.
...

Table 4 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio in the transmission method in which the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol are mixed.
In Table 4, for example, when 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", The coding rate of the error-correction code for generating the symbol of "consisting slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK. When the transmission method shows that symbols of (8,8)16APSK and symbols of (8,8)16APSK are mixed, the ring ratio R of ₍ 12,4)16APSK R ₍ 12,4 ₎ = 4.20, (8,8)16APSK This means that the ring ratio R _(8,8) =2.70.
When 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot formed of the data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 49/120 (≈ 2/5), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8, 8) When it indicates that the transmission method is a mixture of 16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ = 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio R _{(8, 8)} = 2.60, which means that.
When 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group” are “0010”, the “slot formed of the data symbol group” The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 61/120 (≈1/2), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8, 8) If it indicates that the transmission method is a mixture of 16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ = 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio R _{(8, 8)} = 2.50, which means that.
...

Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the following transmission is performed by the “stream type/relative stream information” of the “TMCC information symbol group”. FIG. 22( a) shows the configuration of the “stream type/relative stream information”. Showing. In FIG. 22A, as an example, the stream type information of each of the streams 0 to 15 is transmitted. The “stream type of the relative stream 0” in FIG. 22A indicates that it is the stream type information of the stream 0.

Similarly, “stream type of relative stream 1” indicates that it is stream type information of stream 1.
The “stream type of the relative stream 2” indicates that it is the stream type information of the stream 2.
...
The “stream type of the relative stream 15” indicates that it is the stream type information of the stream 15.
It is assumed that the stream type information of each stream is composed of 8 bits. (However, this is just an example.)
FIG. 22B shows an example of 8-bit stream type information and its allocation.

The 8-bit stream type information “00000000” is undefined.
When the 8-bit stream type information is “00000001”, the stream is MPEG-2TS (Moving
Picture Experts Group-2 Transport Stream).
When the 8-bit stream type information is "00000010", the stream is TLV (Type Length).
Value)).
When the 8-bit stream type information is “00000011”, it means that the stream is a video (moving image) with a pixel number of about 4k (eg 3840) horizontal×about 2k (eg 2160) vertical. It should be noted that the video coding information may be included.
When the 8-bit stream type information is "00000100", it means that the stream is a video (moving image) having a pixel number of approximately 8k (eg, 7680) horizontal×4k (eg 4320) vertically. It should be noted that the video coding information may be included.
When the 8-bit stream type information is “00000101”, the stream is about 8k (eg, 7680) horizontal × about 8k (vertical) from a video (moving image) with a pixel number of about 4k (eg, 3840) horizontal × 2k (eg, 2160) vertical. This means that the difference information is for generating a video (moving image) having a pixel number of 4k (for example, 4320). It should be noted that the video coding information may be included. Further, this information will be described later.
...
If the 8-bit stream type information is “11111111”, there is no allocation type.
Next, a method of using the 8-bit stream type information “00000101” will be described.
It is assumed that the stream of the video image #A is a video image (moving image) having a pixel number of approximately 4k (for example, 3840) in the horizontal direction and approximately 2k (for example, 2160) in the vertical direction, and is transmitted by the transmission device. At this time, the transmitting device transmits the 8-bit stream type information “00000011”.
In addition to this, the transmission apparatus determines that the horizontal axis is about 8k (eg, 7680)×vertical about 4k (eg, 4320) from the image (moving image) of the image #A having a pixel number of about 4k (eg, 3840) horizontal×2k (eg, 2160) vertical. ), the difference information for generating a video (moving image) having the number of pixels is transmitted. At this time, the transmitting device transmits the 8-bit stream type information “00000101”.
The receiving device obtains the stream type information “00000011”, determines from this information that the stream is a video (moving image) with a pixel number of about 4k horizontal (eg 3840) × about 2k vertical (eg 2160), and determines the horizontal It is possible to obtain the image #A having the number of pixels of 4k (for example, 3840)×about 2k (for example, 2160) in the vertical direction.
In addition, the receiving device obtains the stream type information “00000011”, and from this information, determines that the stream is a video (moving image) with a pixel number of about horizontal 4k (eg 3840)×vertical about 2k (eg 2160), In addition, the stream type information “00000101” is obtained, and from this information, a stream is about 4k (eg 3840)×vertical about 2k (eg 2160) from a picture (moving image) of horizontal about 8k (eg 7680)× It is determined that the difference information is for generating a video (moving image) with a pixel number of approximately 4k (for example, 4320) in the vertical direction. Then, the receiving apparatus can obtain an image (moving image) of the image #A having a pixel number of approximately 8k (for example, 7680)×approximately 4k (for example, 4320) vertically from the both streams.

In addition, in order to transmit these streams, the transmission device uses, for example, the transmission method described in the first and second embodiments. Further, as described in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2, when the transmitting apparatus transmits these streams using both modulation schemes of (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK, The effects described in the first and second embodiments can be obtained.

<Receiver>
Next, the operation of the receiving device that receives the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting device 700 will be described using the block diagram of the receiving device in FIG.

The receiving apparatus 1900 of FIG. 19 receives the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting apparatus 700 with the antenna 1901. The reception RF 1902 subjects the received wireless signal to processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation, and outputs a baseband signal.
Demodulation section 1904 performs processing such as root roll-off filter processing and outputs the filtered baseband signal.
The synchronization/channel estimation unit 1914 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, the “synchronization symbol group” and the “pilot symbol group” transmitted by the transmission device. , Outputs the estimated signal.
Control information estimating section 1916 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as “TMCC information symbol group”, performs demodulation/decoding, and outputs a control signal. It should be noted that the important point in this embodiment is to transmit the symbol for transmitting the information of the “transmission mode modulation method” of the transmission mode/slot information of the “TMCC information symbol group”, the “coding rate of the transmission mode”. The receiving device demodulates/decodes the symbol to be used, and based on Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the “slot composed of the data symbol group”. Information, error correction code system (for example, coding rate of error correction code, etc.), and the modulation system (or transmission method) used by the "slot composed of data symbol group", (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK, 32APSK, (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed when the transmission method is one of the ring ratio information Is generated, and the control information estimation unit 1916 outputs it as a part of the control signal.

The demapping unit 1906 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as input, and based on the control signal, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the “slot composed of the data symbol group”. (In this case, if there is a ring ratio, the ring ratio is also judged.) Based on this judgment, the log-likelihood of each bit included in the data symbol is calculated from the filtered baseband signal and estimated signal. The degree ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) is calculated and output. (However, instead of the soft decision value such as LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of the LLR may be output.)
Deinterleaving section 1908 receives the log-likelihood ratio as input, accumulates it, performs deinterleaving (data rearrangement) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving.

The error correction decoding unit 1912 receives the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving and the control signal as input, determines the error correction method (code length, coding rate, etc.) used, and based on this determination, error correction decoding And obtain the estimated information bits. If the error correction code used is an LDPC code, the decoding method is reliability propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, Layered BP decoding. Will be used.
The above is the operation when the iterative detection is not performed. Below, the operation in the case of performing iterative detection will be supplementarily described. Note that the receiving device does not necessarily have to perform the iterative detection, and the receiving device does not include a portion related to the iterative detection described below, and performs initial detection and error correction decoding. It may be a receiving device.
When performing iterative detection, the error correction decoding unit 1912 outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding. (Note that if only the initial detection is performed, it is not necessary to output the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding.)
Interleaving section 1910 interleaves (performs rearrangement) the log likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding, and outputs the log likelihood ratio after interleaving.

The demapping unit 1906 performs iterative detection using the interleaved log-likelihood ratio, the filtered baseband signal, and the estimated signal, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after the iterative detection. ..
After that, the operations of interleaving and error correction decoding are performed. Then, these operations are repeated. This increases the possibility that a good decoding result can be finally obtained.
In the above description, a symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode of “transmission mode/slot information” of “TMCC information symbol group” and a transmission mode of “transmission mode/slot information” of “TMCC information symbol group” By obtaining the symbol for transmitting the coding rate, the receiving device obtains the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the modulation scheme of 16APSK, 32APSK, (12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8 In the case of a transmission method in which 16APSK symbols are mixed, the ring ratio is estimated, and the demodulation/decoding operation is possible.
In the above description, the frame configuration of FIG. 18 has been described, but the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of data symbols, and this data symbol is generated. Symbols for transmitting information about modulation schemes used in the above, error correction schemes (for example, error correction code used, code length of error correction code, coding rate of error correction code, etc.) When there is a symbol for transmitting the data, the data symbol, the symbol for transmitting the information about the modulation scheme, and the symbol for transmitting the information about the error correction scheme may be arranged in any frame. Further, symbols other than these symbols, for example, a preamble, a symbol for synchronization, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, etc. may be present in the frame.

In addition, as a method different from the above description, there is a symbol that transmits information about the ring ratio, and the transmission device may transmit this symbol. An example of symbols that carry information about the ring ratio is shown below.

In Table 5, when "00000" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00".
Moreover, it becomes as follows.
When "00001" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10".
When “00010” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20”.
When “00011” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30”.

When "00100" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50".
When "00101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60".
When "00110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70".
When “00111” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.

When "01000" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When "01001" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When "01010" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70".
When "01011" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.

When "01100" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When "01101" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When "01110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70”.
When "01111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.
...

Then, the receiving apparatus can estimate the ring ratio used in the data symbol by obtaining the symbol that transmits the information regarding the ring ratio, and thereby the demodulation/decoding of the data symbol becomes possible.

Further, the symbol for transmitting the modulation method may include information on the ring ratio. An example is shown below.

In Table 6, when “00000” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00”.
Moreover, it becomes as follows.
When “00001” is transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10”.
When “00010” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20”.
When “00011” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30”.

When "00100" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50".
When “00101” is transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When “00110” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70”.
When “00111” is transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.

When "01000" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When "01001" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is the transmission method in which the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol are mixed, (12,4) )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When "01010" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70".
When "01011" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is the transmission method in which the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol are mixed, (12,4) )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.

When "01100" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When "01101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When "01110" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is the transmission method in which the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol are mixed, (12,4) )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70”.
When "01111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol is "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol transmission method, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.
...

When “11101” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the “8PSK” symbol.
When “11110” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol becomes the “QPSK” symbol.
When “11111” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is the “π/2 shift BPSK” symbol.

Then, the receiving apparatus can estimate the modulation method used in the data symbol and the ring ratio by obtaining the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation method, and thus demodulation/decoding of the data symbol It will be possible.

In the above description, as a selectable modulation method (transmission method), "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”, “(12,4)16APSK” and “(8,8)16APSK” are included in the example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a selectable modulation method (transmission method), "(12,4)16APSK symbol and (8,8)16APSK symbol mixed transmission method, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8, 8) 16APSK ring ratio 2.80" is included, or as a selectable modulation method (transmission method), "(12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed transmission methods, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80", "(12,4)16APSK" are included, or as a selectable modulation method (transmission method), "( Transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80'', ``(8,8)16APSK May be included. At this time, if the selectable modulation scheme includes a modulation scheme in which the ring ratio can be set, the transmitting apparatus transmits information about the ring ratio of the modulation scheme or control symbols capable of estimating the ring ratio As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the modulation method and the ring ratio of the data symbol, and can demodulate and decode the data symbol.

(Embodiment 4)
In this embodiment, the order of generating data symbols will be described.

FIG. 18A shows an image diagram of the frame structure. In FIG. 18A, it is assumed that “#1 symbol group”, “#2 symbol group”, “#3 symbol group”,... Are arranged. At this time, each symbol group of “#1 symbol group”, “#2 symbol group”, “#3 symbol group”,... It is assumed that it is composed of "pilot symbol group", "TMCC information symbol group", and "slot composed of data symbol group".
Here, for example, N of “#1 symbol group”, “#2 symbol group”, “#3 symbol group”,... “#N−1 symbol group” “#N symbol group” A method of forming a data symbol group in which “slots formed of data symbol groups” in each symbol group are collected will be described.

For the generation of the data symbol groups collected in the “slots formed by the data symbol groups” in the N symbol groups from “# (β×N+1) symbol group” to “# (β×N+N) symbol group” , Establish rules. The rule will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 20, it is described that “(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed”, but “(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are described. “Mixed” is described in the first embodiment. The symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive for 3 symbols or more (or 4 symbols or more). In the symbol group, there is no part where (12,4)16APSK symbols are continuous, and there is no part where (8,8)16APSK symbols are continuous.
In the case where the data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a (8,8)16APSK symbol, as shown in FIG. 23, a (8,8)16APSK symbol in a continuous data symbol group. Does not exist where 3 or more symbols continue.
It means that it is a symbol group generated by any of the above transmission methods.

Then, “(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols coexist” in FIG. 20 satisfies the characteristics of FIGS. 20(a) to 20(f). Note that in FIG. 20, the horizontal axis is a symbol.

FIG. 20(a):
If 32APSK data symbols exist and (8,8)16APSK data symbols do not exist,
As shown in FIG. 20A, a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" exists after "32APSK data symbols".

FIG. 20(b):
When the (8,8)16APSK data symbol exists, as shown in FIG. 20(b), "(8,8)16APSK data symbol" is followed by "(8,8)16APSK symbol and (12 , 4) 16APSK symbols are mixed”.

FIG. 20(c):
When the data symbol of (12,4)16APSK exists, as shown in FIG. 20C, after the symbol of “(8,8)16APSK symbol and (12,4)16APSK symbol are mixed” ``(12,4)16APSK
There is a data symbol.

FIG. 20(d):
When 8PSK data symbols are present and (12,4)16APSK data symbols are not present, as shown in FIG. 20D, “(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are shown. Mixed"
There is a "8PSK data symbol" after the symbol.

FIG. 20(e):
When the data symbol of QPSK exists, the data symbol of 8PSK does not exist, and the data symbol of (12,4)16APSK does not exist, as shown in FIG. 20(e), "(8,8)16APSK There is a "QPSK data symbol" after the "A symbol and a (12,4)16APSK symbol are mixed" symbol.

FIG. 20(f):
When the π/2 shift BPSK data symbol exists, the QPSK data symbol does not exist, the 8PSK data symbol does not exist, and the (12,4)16APSK data symbol does not exist, FIG. As shown in (f), there is a "π/2 shift BPSK data symbol" after the symbol "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed".

When the symbols are arranged as described above, the symbols are arranged in the order of the signal of the modulation method (transmission method) with the highest peak power, so that there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can easily perform AGC (Automatic Gain Control) control.

FIG. 21 shows an example of a method of configuring the symbols of “(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed” described above.
The symbol "(8,8)16APSK symbol and (12,4)16APSK symbol are mixed" of the coding rate X of the error correction code and the symbol "(8,8)16APSK of the coding rate Y of the error correction code Y" Symbols and symbols of (12,4)16APSK are mixed” are present. Then, the relationship of X>Y is established.
At this time, after the symbol of “(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed” of the coding rate X of the error correction code, “(8 ,8) 16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed”.
As shown in FIG. 21, a symbol of “(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed” with an error correction code coding rate of 1/2, and an error correction code coding rate of 2/ 3 symbols of “(8,8)16APSK symbols mixed with (12,4)16APSK symbols”, and “(8,8)16APSK symbols of (12,4)16APSK symbols with an error correction code coding rate of 3/4” 4) 16APSK symbols are mixed”. Then, from the above description, as shown in FIG. 21, the symbol of “(8,8)16APSK symbol and (12,4)16APSK symbol are mixed” with the coding rate of the error correction code 3/4, the error correction Symbol of "(8,8)16APSK symbol and (12,4)16APSK symbol coexist" of code rate 2/3, code rate of error correction code 1/2 "(8,8) The 16APSK symbols and the (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed”, and the symbols are arranged in this order.

(Embodiment 5)
Embodiments 1 to 4 include a method of switching between (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols in a transmission frame, and a pilot symbol configuration method and TMCC associated with the method. The configuration method of control information and the like have been described.
The method of obtaining the same effect as in the first to fourth embodiments is not limited to the method of using the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol in the transmission frame, Even with the method using (12,4)16APSK symbols and NU (Non-Uniform)-16QAM symbols,
The same effects as those of the first to fourth embodiments can be obtained. That is, in Embodiments 1 to 4, it is sufficient to use symbols of NU-16QAM symbols instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols (the modulation schemes used in combination are (12,4) 16APSK). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the description will focus on the configuration of the NU-16QAM symbol used in place of the (8,8)16APSK symbol.

<Signal point arrangement>
The NU-16QAM signal point arrangement and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point performed by the mapping unit 708 in FIG. 7 will be described.

FIG. 26 shows an example of NU-16QAM signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. Although the first to fourth embodiments have been described using the ring ratio, the “amplitude ratio” is defined instead of the ring ratio. When R ₁ and R ₂ are defined as shown in FIG. 26 (note that R ₁
Is a real number and R ₁ >0, and R ₂ is a real number and R ₂ >0. Also, R ₁ <R ₂
Becomes ), and the amplitude ratio A _r =R ₂ /R ₁ . Then, the first to fourth embodiments
, The amplitude ratio of NU-16QAM will be applied instead of the ring ratio of (8,8)16APSK.

The coordinates on the IQ plane of each NU-16QAM signal point are as follows.
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₂ , R ₂ )
Signal point 1-2[0001]・・・(R ₂ , R ₁ )
Signal point 1-3 [0101]・・・(R ₂ , ,-R ₁ )
Signal point 1-4 [0100]・・・(R ₂ , ,-R ₂ )
Signal point 2-1 [0010]・・・(R ₁ , R ₂ )
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(R ₁ , R ₁ )
Signal point 2-3[0111]・・・(R ₁ , -R ₁ )
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(R ₁ , -R ₂ )
Signal point 3-1 [1010]・・・(-R ₁ , R ₂ )
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(-R ₁ , R ₁ )
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(-R ₁ ,-R ₁ )
Signal point 3-4[1110]・・・(-R ₁ ,-R ₂ )
Signal point 4-1[1000]・・・(-R ₂ ,R ₂ )
Signal point 4-2 [1001]・・・(-R ₂ , R ₁ )
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(-R ₂ ,-R ₁ )
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(-R ₂ ,-R ₂ )
Also, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₂ , R ₂ )
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. It means that Q is (I,Q)=(R ₂ , R ₂ ). In another example,
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(-R ₂ ,-R ₂ )
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] in the data input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. This means that Q is (I,Q) = (-R ₂ , -R ₂ ).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 Will be all the same.
<Sending output>
The following normalization coefficients may be used to make the transmission outputs of the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the NU-16QAM symbol the same. The normalization coefficient of the (12,4)16APSK symbol is as described in the first embodiment. The NU-16QAM symbol normalization coefficient is defined by the following equation.

The in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b . Then, the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal is I _n and the quadrature component is Q _n . Then, when the modulation method is NU-16QAM, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×I _b , a _NU-16QAM ×Q _b ) holds.
In the case of NU-16QAM, the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b is the in-phase component I of the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. , And the quadrature component Q. Therefore, in the case of NU-16QAM, the following relation holds.

Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Signal point 1-2[0001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 1-3 [0101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Signal point 2-1 [0010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 2-3[0111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Signal point 3-1[1010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 3-4[1110]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Signal point 4-1[1000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Signal point 4-2 [1001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₁ )
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
Also, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] in the data to be input to the mapping unit 708, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ , a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ). In another example,
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ )
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] in the data to be input to the mapping unit 708, (I _n , Q _n )=(- a _{NU- 16QAM} ×R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 Will be all the same.
Then, the mapping unit 708 outputs the I _n and Q _n described above as the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the baseband signal.

From R ₁ and R ₂ used to represent the signal points in the IQ plane of (12,4)16APSK, the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4) of (12,4)16APSK is R _(12,4) = It is represented as R ₂ /R ₁ .

When R ₁ and R ₂ are defined as shown in FIG. 26, the amplitude ratio A _r of NU-16QAM is defined as A _r =R ₂ /R ₁ .
At this time, it is possible to obtain the effect that “the possibility that PAPR can be further reduced becomes higher when A _r <R _(12,4) is satisfied”.
This is because the modulation method that is likely to dominate the peak power is NU-16QAM. At this time, the peak power generated in NU-16QAM is likely to increase as A _r increases. Therefore, in order not to increase the peak power, it is better to set A _r small, while R ₍ 12,4) of ₍ 12,4)16APSK can be set to a value that improves the BER characteristics. The degree is high. Therefore, if the relationship A _r <R _(12,4) is satisfied, it is more likely that PAPR can be further reduced.
However, even if A _r >R _(12,4) , the effect that it can be made smaller than the PAPR of NU-16QAM can be obtained. Therefore, when focusing on improving the BER characteristic, there are cases where A _r >R _(12,4) is good.

<About labeling and signal point arrangement of NU-16QAM>

[About labeling of NU-16QAM]

Here, the labeling of NU-16QAM is explained. Labeling is the relationship between the input 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] and the arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. Figure 26 shows an example of NU-16QAM labeling.
Labeling may be performed as long as it satisfies the following <Condition 5> and <Condition 6>.

For the sake of explanation, the following definitions are made.
When the transmitted 4 bits are [b _a3 b _a2 b _a1 b _a0 ], the signal point A is given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and when the transmitted 4 bits are [b _b3 b _b2 b _b1 b _b0 ]. , The signal point B is given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. At this time,
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 0.

Moreover, it defines as follows.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 4.
Then, the group is defined. In the above description of NU-16QAM, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3 , Signal point 2-4, signal point 3-1
, Signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4, “signal point 1-1 , Signal points 1-2, signal points 1-3, and signal points 1-4 are defined as group 1. Similarly, "Signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4 group 2", "signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3 , Signal point 3-4 to group 3”, “signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3,
Signal points 4-4 are defined as group 4.

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 5>:
X is 1,2,3,4, and the following holds for all X satisfying this.
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1
<Condition 6>:
u is 1,2,3, v is 1,2,3,4, and the following holds for all u and all v satisfying this.
The number of different bits of labeling of signal point uv and signal point (u+1)-v is 1

In view of the above, the number of bits that are different from each signal point in labeling in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane and that are close to each other is small, so that the receiving apparatus may obtain high data reception quality. Becomes higher. Then, this increases the possibility that high reception quality of data can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs the iterative detection.

When symbols are formed by NU-16QAM and (12,4)16APSK taking the above example as an example, one of the following transmission methods is conceivable when implemented in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
・A part where symbols of (12,4)16APSK or NU-16QAM are continuous in a symbol group of 3 or more (or 4 or more) consecutive symbols. Does not exist, and there is no continuous NU-16QAM symbol.
-In the "cycle M symbol group", the number of symbols of NU-16QAM is one more than the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK is N, and NU-16QAM The number of symbols is N+1. (In addition, N is a natural number.) In the "Symbol group of period M", there is no place where two NU-16QAM symbols are consecutive, or there is one place where two NU-16QAM symbols are consecutive. To do. (Therefore, there is no place where NU-16QAM symbols are consecutive for 3 symbols or more.)
-If the data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a NU-16QAM symbol, there is no consecutive NU-16QAM symbol in three or more consecutive data symbol groups.

Then, in the first to fourth embodiments, the part described with the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol (for example, the transmission method, the pilot symbol configuration method, and the configuration of the reception device). , The structure of control information including TMCC, etc.) With the transmission method described above, the first to fourth embodiments can be implemented in the same manner.

(Embodiment 6)
In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the transmission method/transmission apparatus and the reception method/reception apparatus described in Embodiments 1 to 5 are applied to wideband satellite digital broadcasting.

FIG. 27 shows an image diagram of broadband satellite digital broadcasting. The satellite 2702 in FIG. 27 transmits a transmission signal using the transmission method described in any of Embodiments 1 to 5. This transmission signal will be received by the receiving device on the ground.
On the other hand, the data to be transmitted by the modulated signal transmitted by the satellite 2702 will be transmitted by the ground station 2701 in FIG. Therefore, the ground station 2701 will transmit a modulated signal containing data for the satellite to transmit. Then, the satellite 2702 receives the modulated signal transmitted by the ground station 2701, and transmits the data included in this modulated signal using the transmission method described in the first to fifth embodiments.

(Embodiment 7)
In the present embodiment, signaling is performed as TMCC information for enabling the receiving side to smoothly receive the transmission device using the transmission method described in the first, second, fifth, etc. embodiments. An example of the configuration of various types of information will be described.

In order to reduce the distortion generated by the power amplifier included in the wireless unit 712 in the transmitter of FIG. There is a method of securing the difference value of point output).
In wideband satellite digital broadcasting, the transmitter transmits the "satellite output backoff" information in the TMCC information related to the distortion of the power amplifier.

The present embodiment further describes a method of transmitting advanced information related to distortion of a power amplifier, and a configuration of TMCC information associated with the method. By transmitting the information described below, the receiving apparatus can receive the modulated signal with less distortion, and therefore, the effect of improving the data reception quality can be obtained.
It is proposed to newly transmit the information of "whether distortion compensation of the power amplifier has been performed" and the "index indicating the degree of the effect of distortion compensation of the power amplifier" as the TMCC information.

Table 7 shows a specific example of the configuration of information regarding distortion compensation of the power amplifier. As shown in Table 7, when the transmitter turns off the distortion compensation of the power amplifier, it sets “0” when turning on the distortion compensation of the power amplifier, for example, a part of the TMCC information (control information Part) to send.

Table 8 shows a specific example of the configuration of information about the index indicating the degree of the effect of distortion compensation of the power amplifier. When the inter-code (inter-symbol) interference becomes large, the transmitting device transmits "00". If the inter-code (inter-symbol) interference is medium, the transmitting device transmits "01". When the intersymbol interference is small, the transmitting device transmits "10".
In Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4 of the third embodiment, the ring ratio is determined when the coding rate of the error correction code is determined.

In this embodiment, as a method different from this, information regarding distortion compensation of the power amplifier and/or information regarding an index indicating the degree of the effect of distortion compensation of the power amplifier, and/or "satellite output Even if the ring ratio is determined based on the information of "back-off" and the coding rate of the error correction code is set to A (even if it is set to a certain value), the transmitting device selects a plurality of ring ratios. Suggest a method to choose from. At this time, use “modulation method information” in Table 1 and/or “ring ratio information” in Table 5 and/or “modulation method information” in Table 6 as TMCC information. Then, the transmitting device can notify the receiving device of the information of the modulation scheme and the information of the ring ratio.

FIG. 28 shows a block diagram relating to the ring ratio determination related to the above. The ring ratio determination unit 2801 of FIG. 28 includes “modulation method information”, “error correction code coding rate information”, “satellite output backoff information”, “power amplifier distortion compensation information (ON/OFF information)”, and Modulation method (or transmission method) that requires the setting of the ring ratio using all of this information or part of this information as input, which is an index indicating the degree of the effect of power amplifier distortion compensation. If (for example, (8,8)16APSK or (12,4)APSK or (8,8)16APSK and (12,4)APSK transmission method), determine the ring ratio. , Outputs the decision ring ratio information. Then, the mapping unit of the transmission device performs mapping based on the information of the determined ring ratio, and the information of the ring ratio is transmitted to the reception device as control information as shown in Tables 5 and 6, for example. , The transmitter will transmit.

A characteristic point is that the ring ratio can be set from a plurality of candidates when the modulation method A and the coding rate B are selected.
For example, if the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK and the coding rate of the error correction code is 61/129 (approximate value 1/2), there are three types of ring ratio candidates, C, D, and E. To do. Then, which value of the ring ratio should be used may be determined based on the back-off situation and the information (ON/OFF information) about the distortion compensation of the power amplifier. For example, when distortion compensation of the power amplifier is ON, it is sufficient to select a ring ratio that improves the reception quality of the data of the receiving device, and when distortion compensation of the power amplifier is OFF and backoff is small, PAPR is It suffices to select a smaller ring ratio. (The ring ratio may be similarly determined for other coding rates.) Note that such a selection method is described in (8,8)16APSK in the modulation scheme and in the first embodiment. The same can be applied to the transmission method using both (8,8)16APSK and (12,4)APSK.

By operating as described above, it is possible to obtain the effect that the reception quality of data of the receiving device can be improved and the load of the transmission power amplifier can be reduced.

(Embodiment 8)
The seventh embodiment has described the case where the NU-16QAM symbol is used instead of the (8,8)16APSK symbol in the first to fourth embodiments. In this embodiment, (4,8,4)16APSK is proposed as an extension of NU-16QAM (NU-16QAM is an example of (4,8,4)16APSK), and the first embodiment is repeated. In the fourth embodiment, a case will be described where a (4,8,4)16APSK symbol is used instead of the (8,8)16APSK symbol.

Embodiments 1 to 4 include a method of switching between (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols in a transmission frame, and a pilot symbol configuration method and TMCC associated with the method. The configuration method of control information and the like have been described.
The method of obtaining the same effects as those of the first to fourth embodiments is not limited to the method of using the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16APSK symbol in the transmission frame. The same effect as in Embodiments 1 to 4 can be obtained by the method using the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (4,8,4)16APSK symbol. That is, in Embodiments 1 to 4, it is only necessary to use the (4,8,4)16APSK symbol instead of the (8,8)16APSK symbol. 12,4) 16APSK).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the description will focus on the configuration of the (4,8,4)16APSK symbol used in place of the (8,8)16APSK symbol.

<Signal point arrangement>
As shown in FIG. 30, signal points of (4,8,4)16APSK mapping are arranged in three concentric circles having different radii (amplitude components) on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. In this specification, among these concentric circles, the circle having the largest radius R ₃ is the “outer circle”, the circle having the middle size between the radiuses R ₂ is the “center circle”, and the circle having the smallest radius R ₁ is the circle. Is called the "inner circle." Note that when R ₁ , R ₂ , and R ₃ are defined as shown in FIG. 30 (note that R ₁ is a real number, R ₁ >0, R ₂ is a real number, and R ₂ >0, R ₃ are It is a real number, and R ₃ >0, and R ₁ <R ₂ <R _3. )
In addition, 4 signal points on the circumference of the outer circle, 8 signal points on the circumference of the middle circle, and 4 on the circumference of the inner circle.
Signal points are arranged. (4,8,4) of (4,8,4)16APSK means that there are 4, 12, and 4 signal points in the order of outer circle, middle circle, and inner circle, respectively.

Next, the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point performed by the mapping unit 708 of FIG. 7 will be described.
FIG. 30 shows an example of (4,8,4)16APSK signal point constellation and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. Although the first to fourth embodiments have been described using the ring ratio, in the case of (4,8,4)16APSK, two ring ratios are defined. The first ring ratio r ₁ =R ₂ /R ₁ and the other ring ratio r ₂ =R ₃ /R ₁ . Then, in Embodiments 1 to 4, instead of the ring ratio of (8,8)16APSK, two ring ratios of (4,8,4)16APSK r ₁ =R ₂ /R ₁ , r ₂ =R ₃ /R ₁ will be applied.

The coordinates of each signal point of (4,8,4)16APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.

Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₃ cos(π/4),R ₃ sin(π/4))
Signal point 1-2[0001]・・・(R ₂ cos λ, R ₂ sin λ)
Signal points 1-3[0101]・・・(R ₂ cos(−λ), R ₂ sin(−λ))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(R ₃ cos(-π/4),R ₃ sin(-π/4))

Signal point 2-1[0010]・・・(R ₂ cos(−λ+π/2), R ₂ sin(−λ+π/2))
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(R ₁ cos(π/4),R ₁ sin(π/4))
Signal point 2-3[0111]・・・(R ₁ cos(-π/4),R ₁ sin(-π/4))
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(R ₂ cos(λ−π/2), R ₂ sin(λ−π/2))

Signal point 3-1 [1010]・・・(R ₂ cos(λ+π/2), R ₂ sin(λ+π/2))
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(R ₁ cos(3π/4),R ₁ sin(3π/4))
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(R ₁ cos(-3π/4),R ₁ sin(-3π/4))
Signal point 3-4[1110]・・・(R ₂ cos(−λ−π/2), R ₂ sin(−λ−π/2))

Signal point 4-1[1000]・・・(R ₃ cos(3π/4),R ₃ sin(3π/4))
Signal point 4-2 [1001]・・・(R ₂ cos(π−λ), R ₂ sin(π−λ))
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(R ₂ cos(−π+λ), R ₂ sin(−π+λ))
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(R ₃ cos(-3π/4),R ₃ sin(-3π/4))
The unit of the phase is radian. So, for example, R ₃ cos(π/4
), the unit of π/4 is radian. Also in the subsequent steps, the unit of phase is radian. Further, λ is larger than 0 (zero) radian and smaller than π/4 (0 radian<λ<π/4 radian).

Also, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₃ cos(π/4),R ₃ sin(π/4))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. It means that Q is (I,Q) = (R ₃ cos(π/4),R ₃ sin(π/4)).

In another example,
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(R ₃ cos(-3π/4),R ₃ sin(-3π/4))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] in the data input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are described. It means that Q is (I,Q) = (R ₃ cos(-3π/4),R ₃ sin(-3π/4)).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 Will be all the same.

<Sending output>
In order to make the transmission output of the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (4,8,4)16APSK symbol the same, the following normalization coefficient may be used. The normalization coefficient of the (12,4)16APSK symbol is as described in the first embodiment. The normalization coefficient of a (4,8,4)16APSK symbol is defined by the following equation.

The in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b . Then, the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal is I _n and the quadrature component is Q _n . Then, when the modulation method is (4,8,4)16APSK, (I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×I _b ,a _(4,8,4) ×Q _b ) To establish.
Note that in the case of (4,8,4)16APSK, the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b and the quadrature component is Q _b is the baseband after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. It becomes the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q of the signal. Therefore, in the case of (4,8,4)16APSK, the following relation holds.

Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin (π/4))
Signal point 1-2[0001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R _{2 cosλ} , a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sinλ)
Signal point 1-3[0101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(−λ), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin( −λ)))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(-π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-π/4))

Signal point 2-1[0010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(−λ+π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin(-λ+π/2))
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin (π/4))
Signal point 2-3[0111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(-π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin(-π/4))
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(λ−π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin(λ−π/2))

Signal point 3-1 [1010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(λ+π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin (λ+π/2))
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin (3π/4))
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin(-3
π/4))
Signal point 3-4[1110]...(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) × R ₂ cos(−λ−π/2), a _(4,8,4) × R ₂ sin(−λ−π/2))

Signal point 4-1[1000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin (3π/4))
Signal point 4-2 [1001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(π−λ), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin (π
−λ)))
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(−π+λ), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin(
−π+λ))
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-3
π/4))

Also, for example, in the above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) × R ₃ cos(π/4), a _(4,8,4) × R ₃ sin (π/4))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] in the data input to the mapping unit 708, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{(4, 8,4)} ×R ₃ cos(π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(π/4)
) Is meant. In another example,
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-3
π/4))
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{(4, 8,4)} ×R ₃ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-3π/4)).

Regarding this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 Will be all the same.

Then, the mapping unit 708 outputs the I _n and Q _n described above as the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the baseband signal.

<(4,8,4)16APSK labeling and signal point arrangement>

[About labeling of (4,8,4)16APSK]
Here, labeling of (4,8,4)16APSK will be described. What is labeling?
It is the relation of the arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane with the input 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]. An example of labeling of (4,8,4)16APSK is shown in FIG.
Labeling is acceptable as long as it satisfies the following <Condition 7> and <Condition 8>.

For the sake of explanation, the following definitions are made.
When the transmitted 4 bits are [b _a3 b _a2 b _a1 b _a0 ], the signal point A is given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and when the transmitted 4 bits are [b _b3 b _b2 b _b1 b _b0 ]. , The signal point B is given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. At this time,
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 0.

Moreover, it defines as follows.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.
When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 2.

When “b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 3.

When “b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ”, the number of different labeling bits is defined as 4.

Then, the group is defined. In the above description of (4,8,4)16APSK, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, Signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point In 4-3 and signal point 4-4, "signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, and signal point 1-4 are defined as group 1." Similarly, "Signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4 group 2", "signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3 , Signal point 3-4 is defined as group 3, and signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, and signal point 4-4 are defined as group 4.

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 7>:
X is 1,2,3,4, and the following holds for all X satisfying this.
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling at signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1

<Condition 8>:
u is 1,2,3, v is 1,2,3,4, and the following holds for all u and all v satisfying this.
The number of different bits of labeling of signal point uv and signal point (u+1)-v is 1

In view of the above, the number of bits that are different from each signal point in labeling in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane and that are close to each other is small, so that the receiving apparatus may obtain high data reception quality. Becomes higher. Then, this increases the possibility that high reception quality of data can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs the iterative detection.

[Signal constellation of (4,8,4)16APSK]

Although the signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of FIG. 30 have been described above, the signal point arrangement and labeling method on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane are not limited to this. For example, consider the following as the coordinates and labeling on the IQ plane of each signal point of (4,8,4)16APSK.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1[0000] on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₃ × cos(π/4)-sin θ × R ₃ × sin(π/4),
sin θ × R ₃ × cos(π/4) + cos θ × R ₃ × sin(π/4))
Coordinates on the IQ plane of signal points 1-2 [0001]: (cosθ × R 2 × cosλ-sinθ × R 2 × sinλ, sinθ × R 2 × cosλ + cosθ × R 2 × sinλ)
Coordinates on the IQ plane of signal points 1-3[0101]: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(−λ)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(−λ),
sin θ × R ₂ × cos(−λ) + cos θ × R ₂ × sin(−λ))
Coordinates of signal point 1-4[0100] on IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₃ × cos(-π/4)-sin θ × R ₃ × sin(-π/4), sin θ × R ₃ × cos(- π/4) + cos θ × R ₃ × sin(-π/4))

Coordinates of the signal point 2-1[0010] on the IQ plane: (cos θ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ+π/2)-sin θ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ+π/2), sin θ×R ₂ ×cos(− λ+π/2) + cos θ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2[0011] on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(π/4),
sin θ × R ₁ × cos(π/4) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(π/4))
Coordinates on the IQ plane of signal point 2-3[0111]: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-π/4
), sin θ × R ₁ × cos(-π/4) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of the signal point 2-4[0110] on the IQ plane: (cos θ×R ₂ ×cos(λ−π/2)-sin θ×R ₂ ×sin(λ−π/2), sin θ×R ₂ ×cos (λ−π/2)+ cos θ×R ₂ ×sin(λ−π/2))

Coordinates of the signal point 3-1 [1010] on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(λ+π/2)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(λ + π/2), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(λ + π/2) )+ cos θ×R ₂ ×sin(λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 3-2[1011] on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(3π/4), sin θ × R ₁ × cos(3π/4) )+ cos θ × R ₁ × sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-3[1111] on IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/4)-sin θ × R ₁ × sin(-3π/4), sin θ × R ₁ × cos(- 3π/4) + cos θ × R ₁ × sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of the signal point 3-4[1110] on the IQ plane: (cos θ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ−π/2)-sin θ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ−π/2), sin θ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ−π/2) + cosθ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ−π/2))

Coordinates on the IQ plane of signal point 4-1[1000]: (cos θ × R ₃ × cos(3π/4)-sin θ × R ₃ × sin(3π/4), sin θ × R ₃ × cos(3π/4) )+ cos θ × R ₃ × sin(3π/4))
Coordinates on the IQ plane of signal point 4-2 [1001]: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(π−λ)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(π−λ), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(π−λ) )+ cos θ × R ₂ × sin(π−λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-3[1101] on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₂ × cos(−π+λ)-sin θ × R ₂ × sin(−π+λ), sin θ × R ₂ × cos(−π+λ) + cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−π+λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-4[1100] on the IQ plane: (cos θ × R ₃ × cos(-3π/4)-sin θ × R ₃ × sin(-3π/4), sin θ × R ₃ × cos(- 3π/4) + cos θ × R ₃ × sin(-3π/4))

The unit of the phase is radian. Therefore, the in-phase component of the baseband signal after normalization I _n, the quadrature component Q _n is expressed as follows.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1[0000] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₃ × cos(π/4)-
a _(4,8,4) × sin θ × R ₃ × sin(π/4), a _(4,8,4) × sin θ × R ₃ × cos(π/4) + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₃ ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 1-2[0001] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × _cosθ × R ₂ × cosλ- a _(4,8,4) × sinθ ×R ₂ ×sin λ, a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos λ + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin λ
)
Coordinates of the signal point 1-3 [0101] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cos θ × R ₂ × cos(−λ)-
a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ)+ a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ))
Coordinates of signal point 1-4[0100] on IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₃ × cos(-π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₃ ×sin(-π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₃ ×cos(-π/4) + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₃ ×sin(-π/4))

Coordinates of the signal point 2-1[0010] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) × cos θ × R ₂ × cos(−λ+π/2)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ+π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ+π/2)+ a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2[0011] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cos θ × R ₁ × cos(π/4)-
a _(4,8,4) × sin θ × R ₁ × sin(π/4), a _(4,8,4) × sin θ × R ₁ × cos(π/4) + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3[0111] on the IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(-π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/4) + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-4[0110] on the IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×cos(λ−π/2)- a _{(4 ,8,4)} ×sin θ×R ₂ ×sin(λ−π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ×R ₂ ×cos(λ−π/2)
)+ a _(4,8,4) × _cosθ × R ₂ × sin(λ−π/2))

Coordinates of the signal point 3-1 [1010] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(λ + π/2)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sin θ×R ₂ ×sin(λ+π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ×R ₂ ×cos(λ+π/2)+ a _(4,8,4) × cos θ×R ₂ ×sin(λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 3-2[1011] on the IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(3π/4)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/4) + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-3[1111] on the IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₁ × cos(-3π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/4) + a _(4,8,4)
×cos θ ×R ₁ ×sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of the signal point 3-4[1110] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ−π/2)- a _{( 4,8,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ−π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ−π/2)+ a _{(4, 8,4)} ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ−π/2))

Coordinates of signal point 4-1[1000] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₃ × cos(3π/4)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₃ ×sin(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₃ ×cos(3π/4) + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₃ ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 4-2 [1001] on the IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(π−λ)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(π−λ), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(π−λ) + a _(4,8,4)
×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin(π−λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-3[1101] on the IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₂ × cos(−π+λ)- a _{(4,8, 4)} ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×sin(−π+λ), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₂ ×cos(−π+λ) + a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×sin( −π+λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-4[1100] on the IQ plane: (I _n ,Q _n )= (a _(4,8,4) × cosθ × R ₃ × cos(-3π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sin θ ×R ₃ ×sin(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ ×R ₃ ×cos(-3π/4) + a _(4,8,4)
×cos θ ×R ₃ ×sin(-3π/4))

Note that θ is a phase given on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and a _(4,8,4) is as shown in Expression (26).

In the case of forming a symbol with (4,8,4)16APSK and (12,4)16APSK taking the above as an example,
When carried out in the same manner as in Embodiment 1, any of the following transmission methods can be considered.
・A symbol whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (4,8,4)16APSK is (12,4)16APSK There is no continuous symbol portion, and there is no continuous (4,8,4)16APSK symbol portion.
-In the "period M symbol group", the number of symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK is one more than the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK is N. Yes, the number of symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK is N+1. (Note that N is a natural number.) Then, in the “symbol group of period M”, there is no place where two (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive, or (4,8,4)16APSK There is one place where two symbols are consecutive. (Therefore, there is no place where (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive for 3 symbols or more.)
-If the data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a (4,8,4)16APSK symbol, the (4,8,4)16APSK symbol is 3 symbols in the continuous data symbol group. There is no continuous place.

Then, in the first to fourth embodiments, the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (8,8)16A symbol are used.
In the part described with the PSK symbol (for example, the transmission method, the pilot symbol configuration method (Embodiment 2), the reception device configuration, the control information configuration including the TMCC, etc.), the (8,8)16APSK symbol is used. By replacing the explanation with respect to (4,8,4)16APSK, the transmission method using the (12,4)16APSK symbol and the (4,8,4)16APSK symbol can be applied from the first embodiment. The fourth embodiment can be similarly implemented.

(Embodiment 9)
In the eighth embodiment, the case where the (4,8,4)16APSK symbol is used instead of the (8,8)16APSK symbol in the first to fourth embodiments has been described. In the present embodiment, conditions regarding signal point arrangement for improving the reception quality of data in (4,8,4)16APSK described in Embodiment 9 will be described.

As described in the eighth embodiment, FIG. 30 shows (4,8,4)16APSK in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane.
16 shows an example of arrangement of 16 signal points. At this time, the phase formed by the half line of Q=0 and I≧0 and the half line of Q=(tan λ)×I and Q≧0 is λ (radian) (where 0 radian<λ<π/4 Radians.)
In FIG. 30, 16 signal points of (4,8,4)16APSK are drawn with λ<π/8 radians.

In FIG. 31, 16 signal points of (4,8,4)16APSK are drawn with λ≧π/8 radians.
First, a circle having an intermediate size of radius R ₂ is defined as eight signal points existing in the “middle circle”, that is, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 2-1, and signal point. 2-4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-2, and signal point 4-3 exist. Focusing on these eight signal points, in order to obtain high reception quality, a method of setting λ to π/8 radians so as to have the same signal point arrangement as 8PSK can be considered.

However, four signal points, that is, the signal point 1-1, the signal point 1-4, the signal point 4-1, and the signal point 4-4 are present in the “outer circle” of the circle having the largest radius R _3. .. Further, four signal points, that is, the signal point 2-2, the signal point 2-3, the signal point 3-2, and the signal point 3-3 are present in the “inner circle” of the circle having the smallest radius R _1. .. Focusing on the relationship between these signal points and the eight signal points existing in the "middle circle",

<Condition 9>
λ<π/8 radians

(It is one condition for obtaining high data reception quality).

This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. 30 and 31, in the first quadrant, the signal point 1-2, the signal point 2-1, and the signal point 1-1 and the “inner circle” existing in the “outer circle” and existing in the “middle circle”, respectively. Attention is paid to the signal point 2-2, which exists in. Note that the signal points 1-2, the signal points 2-1, the signal points 1-1, and the signal points 2-2 in the first quadrant are focused on. The same discussion was made for the four signal points existing in the second quadrant, the four signal points existing in the third quadrant, and the four signal points existing in the fourth quadrant.

As can be seen from FIG. 31, when λ≧π/8 radians, the signal point 1-2 and the signal point 2-1 existing in the “middle circle” exist in the “outer circle”, and the signal point 1- The distance from 1 becomes shorter. As a result, the resistance to noise decreases, and the reception quality of data in the receiving device decreases.
Note that in the case of FIG. 31, the signal point 1-1 existing in the “outer circle” is focused on, but depending on the values of R ₁ , R ₂ , and R ₃ , the signal point 2-2 existing in the “inner circle” 2-2. Similarly, at this time, if λ≧π/8 radians, the signal points 1-2 and 2-1 existing in the “middle circle” exist in the “inner circle”. The distance from the signal point 2-2 to be used becomes short. As a result, the resistance to noise decreases, and the reception quality of data in the receiving device decreases.

On the other hand, when λ<π/8 radian is set as shown in FIG. 30, the distance between the signal points 1-1 and 1-2, the distance between the signal points 1-1 and 2-1 and the signal point 2-2 The distance between the signal point 1-2 and the signal point 1-2 and the distance between the signal point 2-2 and the signal point 2-1 can be set to be large, which is one condition for obtaining high data reception quality.
From the above points, <Condition 9> is one of the important conditions for the receiving apparatus to obtain high reception quality of data.

Next, further conditions for the receiving apparatus to obtain high data reception quality will be described.
In FIG. 32, attention is paid to the signal point 1-2 and the signal point 2-2 in the first quadrant. Although attention is paid to the signal point 1-2 and the signal point 2-2 in the first quadrant, the signal point 3-2, the signal point 4-2, and the signal point 3 in the third quadrant are thereby obtained. -3, signal point 4-3, signal point 1-3 and signal point 2-3 in the fourth quadrant.

The coordinates of the signal point 1-2 are (R ₂ cos λ, R ₂ sin λ), and the coordinates of the signal point 2-2 are (R ₁ cos(
π/4), R ₁ sin(π/4)). At this time, the following conditions are given in order to increase the possibility that the receiving device can obtain high data reception quality.

<Condition 10>
R ₁ sin(π/4)<R ₂ sin λ

The minimum Euclidean distance among the four signal points existing in the “inner circle” is α. (Euclidean distance between signal point 2-2 and signal point 2-3, Euclidean distance between signal point 2-3 and signal point 3-3, Euclidean distance between signal point 3-3 and signal point 3-2, signal point 3- The distance between 2 and the signal point 2-2 is α.)
Of the eight "medium circle" signal points, the Euclidean distance between the signal points 1-2 and 1-3 is β. The Euclidean distance between the signal point 2-1 and the signal point 3-1, the Euclidean distance between the signal point 4-2 and the signal point 4-3, and the Euclidean distance between the signal point 3-4 and the signal point 2-4 are also β. ..

When <Condition 10> is satisfied, α<β is satisfied.

Considering the above points, when both <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied, when considering the Euclidean distance that can be obtained by extracting two different signal points from the 16 signal points, Even if two different signal points are extracted, the Euclidean distance becomes large, which increases the possibility that the receiving device can obtain high data reception quality.

However, even if both of <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are not satisfied, there is a possibility that the reception device can obtain high reception quality of data. This is because the preferable condition may differ depending on the distortion characteristic (see, for example, FIG. 1) of the power amplifier of the transmission system included in the radio unit 712 in the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 7.

In this case, considering the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, in addition to <condition 10>, the following condition give.

The coordinates of the signal point 1-2 are (R ₂ cos λ, R ₂ sin λ), and the coordinates of the signal point 2-2 are (R ₁ cos(
π/4), R ₁ sin(π/4)). Then, the following conditions are given.
<Condition 11>
R ₁ sin (π/4) ≠ R ₂ sin λ

The coordinates of the signal point 1-1 is _{(R 3 cos (π / 4} ), R 3 sin (π / 4)), the coordinates of the signal point 1-2 is a _{(R 2 cosλ, R 2 sinλ} ) .. Then, the following conditions are given.
<Condition 12>
R ₂ cos λ ≠ R ₃ cos (π/4)

Then, consider the following nine (4,8,4)16APSK.
[1] <Condition 10> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[2] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of the (4,8,4)16APSK signal points of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[3] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[4] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal points described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [5] With respect to the arrangement of the signal points (coordinates of the signal points) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [6] With respect to the arrangement of the signal points (coordinates of the signal points) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[7] <Condition 10> is satisfied for the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 Radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[8] <Condition 11> is satisfied for the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 Radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[9] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 Radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

These nine (4,8,4)16APSK in-phase I-quadrature Q signal point arrangements (signal point coordinates) are the in-phase I-quadrature Q signal point arrangements of the NU-16QAM described in the seventh embodiment. The signal point arrangement is different from (coordinates of signal points), and the signal point arrangement is peculiar to this embodiment.

Furthermore, consider the following nine (4,8,4)16APSK.

[10] <Condition 10> is satisfied and <Condition 7 is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. > And <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[11] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK signal points of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and <Condition 7 is satisfied. > And <Condition 8> are satisfied.
(However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[12] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, and <Condition 7 is satisfied. > And <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[13] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, In addition, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[14] <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, In addition, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[15] <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, In addition, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[16] <Condition 10> is satisfied for the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, and λ=π/12 It is set to radian and <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[17] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 It is set to radian and <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[18] With respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, <condition 12> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 It is set to radian and <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

As described above, in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, since the number of bits of which labeling is different from that of a signal point close to each signal point is small, the receiving apparatus is more likely to obtain high data reception quality. .. Then, this increases the possibility that high reception quality of data can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs the iterative detection.

(Embodiment 10)
Embodiments 1 to 4 include a method of switching between (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols in a transmission frame, and a pilot symbol configuration method and TMCC associated with the method. The configuration method of control information and the like have been described. Then, in the seventh embodiment, a method of using NU-16QAM instead of (8,8)16APSK as compared with the first to fourth embodiments, and in the eighth embodiment, the first to first embodiments are performed. Form 8 of (8,8)16APSK
The method of using (4,8,4)16APSK instead of is explained.
In the ninth embodiment, compared to the first to fourth embodiments, in the method of using (4,8,4)16APSK instead of (8,8)16APSK, the receiving apparatus can obtain good reception quality of data. The constellation of (4,8,4)16APSK signal points to obtain is explained.

For example, in a situation where the distortion characteristic of the power amplifier of the transmission system included in the radio unit 712 in the transmission device shown in FIG. 7 is severe, such as satellite broadcasting, (4,8,4)16APSK (single Even if used, because the PAPR is small, intersymbol interference is less likely to occur, and (4,8,4)16APSK has a better signal point constellation and labeling than (12,4)16APSK. Therefore, it is highly possible that the receiving device can obtain high data reception quality.
This embodiment will explain this point, that is, a transmission method capable of designating (4,8,4)16APSK as a data symbol modulation method.

For example, in the case of the frame structure of the modulated signal as shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that (4,8,4)16APSK can be designated as the modulation method of Data #1 to Data #7920.
Therefore, in FIG. 11, the horizontal axis represents “first symbol, second symbol, third symbol,..., 135th symbol, 136th symbol” on the horizontal axis. At this time, as a modulation scheme of “first symbol, second symbol, third symbol,..., 135th symbol, 136th symbol”, (4,8,4)16APSK Can be specified.

One of the features at this time is that "(4,8,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive two or more symbols". In addition, the symbol of (4,8,4)16APSK that is continuous for 2 symbols or more is
For example, when the single carrier transmission method is used, it is continuous in the time axis direction. (Refer to FIG. 33.) When a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) method is used, two or more consecutive (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are in the time axis direction. May be continuous (see FIG. 33) or may be continuous in the frequency axis direction (see FIG. 34).

FIG. 33 shows an example of the arrangement of symbols when the horizontal axis is time, where (4,8,4)16APSK symbols at time #1 and (4,8,4)16APSK symbols at time #2, At time #3, symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK,... Are arranged.
FIG. 34 shows an example of symbol arrangement when the horizontal axis frequency is used, where (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are used for carrier #1 and (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are used for carrier #2. Symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK,... Are arranged in carrier #3.

Further, FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 show an example in which “(4,8,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive two or more symbols”.
FIG. 35 shows an example of symbol arrangement when the horizontal axis represents time. Time #1 is another symbol, time #2 is a (4,8,4)16APSK symbol, and time #3 is (4,8,4)16APSK. Symbols of (8,4)16APSK, symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK at time #4, other symbols at time #5,... Are arranged. The other symbols may be any symbols such as pilot symbols, symbols for transmitting control information, reference symbols, symbols for frequency or time synchronization.

FIG. 36 shows an example of symbol arrangement when the horizontal axis frequency is used. Carrier #1 is another symbol, carrier #2 is a (4,8,4)16APSK symbol, and carrier #3 is (4,8,4). The symbols of (8,4)16APSK, the symbol of (4,8,4)16APSK, the other symbols of carrier #5 are arranged in carrier #4. The other symbols may be any symbols such as pilot symbols, symbols for transmitting control information, reference symbols, symbols for frequency or time synchronization.

The (4,8,4)16APSK symbol may be a symbol for transmitting data or the pilot symbol described in the second embodiment.
At the time of a symbol for transmitting data, mapping of (4,8,4)16APSK described in the eighth embodiment is performed from 4-bit data b3, b2, b1, b0 to obtain the in-phase component of the baseband signal. You will get the quadrature component.

As described above, even if the data symbol modulation scheme is (4,8,4)16APSK, PAPR is small, so intersymbol interference is less likely to occur, and compared to (12,4)16APSK, (4, In 8,4)16APSK, the signal point arrangement and the labeling are optimized, so that it is highly possible that the receiving device can obtain high data reception quality.

At this time, by using the signal point constellation described in Embodiment 9 for (4,8,4)16APSK, there is a high possibility that higher data reception quality can be obtained. A specific example is as follows.
[1] <Condition 10> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[2] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of the (4,8,4)16APSK signal points of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[3] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[4] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal points described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [5] With respect to the arrangement of the signal points (coordinates of the signal points) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [6] With respect to the arrangement of the signal points (coordinates of the signal points) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[7] <Condition 10> is satisfied for the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 Radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[8] <Condition 11> is satisfied for the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 Radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[9] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 Radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[10] <Condition 10> is satisfied and <Condition 7 is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. > And <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[11] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK signal points of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and <Condition 7 is satisfied. > And <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[12] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, and <Condition 7 is satisfied. > And <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[13] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, In addition, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[14] <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, In addition, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[15] <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, In addition, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[16] <Condition 10> is satisfied for the arrangement (signal point coordinates) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, and λ=π/12 Radian, and <Condition 7>
And <Condition 8> is satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[17] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, and λ=π/12 It is set to radian and <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[18] With respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, <condition 12> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 It is set to radian and <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[19] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[20] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the arrangement of signal points (coordinates of signal points) of (4,8,4)16APSK of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment, In addition, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )


(Embodiment 11)
<Example of pilot symbol>
In this embodiment, a configuration example of pilot symbols in the transmission scheme (data symbol modulation scheme is (4,8,4)16APSK) described in Embodiment 10 above will be described.

The configuration of the transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, and the description thereof is omitted. (However, (4,8,4)16APSK will be used instead of (8,8)16APSK.)

Due to the non-linearity of the power amplifier of the transmitter, intermodulation interference occurs in the modulated signal. The receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing the intersymbol interference.

In the configuration example of this pilot symbol, in the receiving device, in order to reduce intersymbol interference, the transmitting device

"(4,8,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive two or more symbols"

Is satisfied, the baseband signals corresponding to all the signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that the (4,8,4)16APSK can take (that is, 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] to be transmitted). , A baseband signal corresponding to 16 signal points from [0000] to [1111], is generated and transmitted as a pilot symbol. As a result, the receiving apparatus can receive in-phase I-quadrature Q that (4,8,4)16APSK can take.
Since it is possible to estimate intersymbol interference at all signal points on the plane, there is a high possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Specifically, in order:
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011],
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100],
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101],
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110],
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
Is transmitted as a pilot symbol (reference symbol).

The above features are
<1> ((4,8,4)16APSK symbols that can correspond to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, that is,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011],
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100],
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101],
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110],
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
Is transmitted, and the transmission order may be any order.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, the frequency offset may be estimated.

The method of transmitting pilot symbols is not limited to the above example. In the above description, the pilot symbol is composed of 16 symbols.
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011],
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100],
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101],
(4,8,4)16APSK 16APSK signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110],
(4,8,4)16APSK The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
There is an advantage that the number of appearances of each symbol can be made equal.

(Embodiment 12)
<Signaling>
In the present embodiment, a configuration example of various information signaled as TMCC information in order to allow the receiving device to smoothly receive the transmission signal using the transmission method described in the above-described tenth embodiment. Will be described.

The configuration of the transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, and the description thereof is omitted. (However, (4,8,4)16APSK will be used instead of (8,8)16APSK.)

FIG. 18 shows an image diagram of a frame structure of a transmission signal in advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting. (However, the frame structure of the advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting is not shown accurately.) Since the details have been described in the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Table 9 shows the structure of information on the modulation method. In Table 9, for example, when 4 bits transmitted by a symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode of "transmission mode/slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", "composed of data symbol group" The modulation method for generating the symbol of “slot” is π/2 shift BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method for generating is QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying).
When 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation mode of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0011", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method to generate is 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0100", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The modulation method for generating is (12,4)16APSK.
When the 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation mode of the transmission mode of "Transmission mode/Slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group" are "0101", the symbol of "Slot composed of data symbol group" The modulation scheme for generating is (4,8,4)16APSK.

When the 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the modulation mode of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0110", the symbol of the "slot composed of the data symbol group" 32APSK (32 Amplitude Pha
se Shift Keying).
...

Table 10 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio when the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK. Incidentally, from the R ₁ and R ₂ which was used to represent the signal points in the above so the (12,4) 16APSK the I-Q plane, the (12,4) Ring ratio 16APSK R _(12,4) R _{( 12,4) =} shall be represented as _R 2 / R _1. In Table 10, for example, when 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", The coding rate of the error-correcting code for generating the symbol of "consisting slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK. , It means that the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ =3.09 of ₍ 12,4)16APSK.

When 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot formed of the data symbol group" It shows that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 49/120 (≈2/5) and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK. If so, it means that the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ =2.97 of ₍ 12,4)16APSK.

When 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group” are “0010”, the “slot formed of the data symbol group” It shows that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 61/120 (≈1/2) and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK. If so, it means that the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4 ₎ =3.93 of ₍ 12,4)16APSK.
...

Table 11 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the radius/phase when the modulation method is (4,8,4)16APSK.
In Table 11, for example, when 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", The coding rate of the error-correcting code for generating the symbol of the "constituting slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the symbol for transmitting the transmission mode modulation method is (4,8,4 )16APSK indicates that (4,8,4)16APSK has a radius R ₁ =1.00, a radius R ₂ =2.00, a radius R ₃ =2.20, and a phase λ=π/12 radian. Will mean.

When 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group” are “0001”, the “slot formed of the data symbol group” The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 49/120 (≈2/5), and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (4,8,4)16APSK. In the case shown, it means that the radius R ₁ =1.00, the radius R ₂ =2.10, the radius R ₃ =2.20, and the phase λ=π/12 radian of (4,8,4)16APSK.

When the 4 bits transmitted in the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the "slot formed of the data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol is 61/120 (≈1/2), and the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode is (4,8,4)16APSK. In the case shown, it means that the radius R ₁ =1.00, the radius R ₂ =2.20, the radius R ₃ =2.30, and the phase λ=π/10 radian of 4,8,4)16APSK.
...

<Receiver>
Next, the operation of the receiving device that receives the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting device 700 will be described using the block diagram of the receiving device in FIG.
The receiving apparatus 1900 of FIG. 19 receives the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting apparatus 700 with the antenna 1901. The reception RF 1902 subjects the received wireless signal to processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation, and outputs a baseband signal.
Demodulation section 1904 performs processing such as root roll-off filter processing and outputs the filtered baseband signal.
The synchronization/channel estimation unit 1914 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, the “synchronization symbol group” and the “pilot symbol group” transmitted by the transmission device. , Outputs the estimated signal.
Control information estimating section 1916 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as “TMCC information symbol group”, performs demodulation/decoding, and outputs a control signal.

It should be noted that the important point in this embodiment is to transmit the symbol for transmitting the information of the “transmission mode modulation method” of the transmission mode/slot information of the “TMCC information symbol group”, the “coding rate of the transmission mode”. The receiving apparatus demodulates/decodes the symbol to be used, and based on Tables 9, 10, and 11, information on the modulation method used by the “slot formed by the data symbol group” and the error correction code method ( For example, the information such as the coding rate of the error correction code) and the modulation method used by the "slot composed of data symbol groups" are (12,4)16APSK and (4,8,4)16APSK. , 32APSK, the ring ratio, radius/phase information is generated, and the control information estimation unit 1916 outputs it as a part of the control signal.

The demapping unit 1906 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as input, and based on the control signal, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the “slot composed of the data symbol group”. (In this case, if there is a ring ratio, radius, and phase, the ring ratio, radius, and phase are also determined.) Based on this determination, the data symbol is extracted from the filtered baseband signal and estimated signal. The log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in is calculated and output. (However, instead of the soft decision value such as LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of the LLR may be output.)
Deinterleaving section 1908 receives the log-likelihood ratio as input, accumulates it, performs deinterleaving (data rearrangement) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving.

The error correction decoding unit 1912 receives the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving and the control signal as input, determines the error correction method (code length, coding rate, etc.) used, and based on this determination, error correction decoding To obtain estimated information bits. When the error correction code used is an LDPC code, the decoding method is reliability propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, Layered BP decoding. Will be used.

The above is the operation when the iterative detection is not performed. Hereinafter, the operation in the case of performing the iterative detection will be supplementarily described. Note that the receiving device does not necessarily have to perform the iterative detection, and the receiving device does not include a portion related to the iterative detection described below, and performs initial detection and error correction decoding. It may be a receiving device.

When performing iterative detection, the error correction decoding unit 1912 outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding. (Note that if only the initial detection is performed, it is not necessary to output the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding.)

Interleaving section 1910 interleaves (performs rearrangement) the log likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding, and outputs the log likelihood ratio after interleaving.

The demapping unit 1906 performs iterative detection using the interleaved log-likelihood ratio, the filtered baseband signal, and the estimated signal, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after the iterative detection. ..
After that, the operations of interleaving and error correction decoding are performed. Then, these operations are repeated. This increases the possibility that a good decoding result can be finally obtained.

In the above description, a symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode of “transmission mode/slot information” of “TMCC information symbol group” and a transmission mode of “transmission mode/slot information” of “TMCC information symbol group” By receiving the symbol for transmitting the coding rate, the receiving apparatus, the modulation method, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the modulation method is 16APSK, 32APSK,
If, then the ring ratio, radius and phase are estimated, and demodulation/decoding operations are possible.

In the above description, the frame configuration of FIG. 18 has been described, but the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of data symbols, and this data symbol is generated. Symbols for transmitting information about modulation schemes used in the above, error correction schemes (for example, error correction code used, code length of error correction code, coding rate of error correction code, etc.) When there is a symbol for transmitting the data, the data symbol, the symbol for transmitting the information about the modulation scheme, and the symbol for transmitting the information about the error correction scheme may be arranged in any frame. Further, symbols other than these symbols, for example, a preamble, a symbol for synchronization, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, etc. may be present in the frame.

In addition, as a method different from the above description, there is a symbol that transmits information about the ring ratio, radius/phase, and the transmitter may transmit this symbol. Examples of symbols that transmit information about the ring ratio, radius and phase are shown below.

In Table 12, when "00000" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio and the radius/phase, the data symbol is the symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00".
Moreover, it becomes as follows.
When “00001” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the radius and the phase, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10”.
When “00010” is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio and the radius/phase, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20”.
When "00011" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits information about the ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol becomes the symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30".

When "00100" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.00, radius R _3". =2.20, phase λ=π/12 radian”.
When "00101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information about the ring ratio, the radius and the phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.10, radius R _3". =2.20, phase λ=π/12 radian”.
When "00110" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio and the radius/phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.20, radius R _3". =2.30, phase λ=π/10 radian”.
When "00111" is transmitted by the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio and the radius/phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.20, radius R _3". = 2
.30, phase λ=π/12 radian”.

Then, the receiving device can estimate the ring ratio, the radius, and the phase used in the data symbol by obtaining the symbol that transmits the information about the ring ratio, the radius, and the phase. -Decryption becomes possible.

In addition, the symbol for transmitting the modulation method may include information on the ring ratio and the radius/phase. An example is shown below.

In Table 13, when "00000" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is the symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00".
Moreover, it becomes as follows.
When “00001” is transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10”.
When “00010” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20”.
When “00011” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the symbol of “(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30”.

When “00100” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is “(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.00, radius R ₃ =2.20, phase λ=π/12 radians”.
When “00101” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol is “4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.10, radius R ₃ =2.20, phase λ. = Π/12 radians”.
When "00110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.20, radius R ₃ =2.30, phase. λ=π/10 radians”.
When “00111” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol is “(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.20, radius R ₃ =2.30, phase λ=π/12 radians”.
When “11101” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol becomes the “8PSK” symbol.
When “11110” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the modulation method information, the data symbol becomes the “QPSK” symbol.
When “11111” is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation method, the data symbol is the “π/2 shift BPSK” symbol.

Then, the receiving device can estimate the modulation method used in the data symbol, the ring ratio, and the radius/phase by obtaining the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation method. Demodulation/decoding is possible.

In the above description, as the selectable modulation method (transmission method), an example including "(12,4)16APSK" and "(4,8,4)16APSK" has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, other modulation schemes may be selectable.

(Embodiment 13)
In this embodiment, the order of generating data symbols will be described.
FIG. 18A shows an image diagram of the frame structure. In FIG. 18A, it is assumed that “#1 symbol group”, “#2 symbol group”, “#3 symbol group”,... Are arranged. At this time, each symbol group of “#1 symbol group”, “#2 symbol group”, “#3 symbol group”,... It is assumed that it is composed of "pilot symbol group", "TMCC information symbol group", and "slot composed of data symbol group".
Here, for example, N of “#1 symbol group”, “#2 symbol group”, “#3 symbol group”,... “#N−1 symbol group” “#N symbol group” A method of forming a data symbol group in which “slots formed of data symbol groups” in each symbol group are collected will be described.

For the generation of the data symbol groups collected in the “slots formed by the data symbol groups” in the N symbol groups from “# (β×N+1) symbol group” to “# (β×N+N) symbol group” , Establish rules. The rule will be described with reference to FIG.

Then, the data symbol group of (4,8,4)16APSK in FIG. 37 includes the data symbol groups of FIG.
) Will be satisfied. Note that in FIG. 37, the horizontal axis is a symbol.

FIG. 37(a):
When the data symbol of 32APSK exists and the data symbol of (12,4)16APSK does not exist, as shown in FIG. 37(a), "(4,8,4)16APSK" is added after "data symbol of 32APSK". There is a data symbol.
FIG. 37(b):
When a (12,4)16APSK data symbol exists, as shown in FIG. 37(b), "(4,8,4)16APSK data is added after "(12,4)16APSK data symbol symbol". Symbol” exists.

FIG. 37(c):
When a (12,4)16APSK data symbol exists, as shown in FIG. 37(c), "(12,4)16APSK data symbol" is added after "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol". Is present.

Either of FIG. 37(b) and FIG. 37(c) may be used.

FIG. 37(d):
When the data symbol of 8PSK exists and the data symbol of (12,4)16APSK does not exist, as shown in FIG. 37(d), "8PSK data symbol" is added after "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol". There is a data symbol of.

FIG. 37(e):
When the QPSK data symbol exists, the 8PSK data symbol does not exist, and the (12,4)16APSK data symbol does not exist, as shown in FIG. 37(e), "(4,8,4 )"QPSK data symbol" exists after "16APSK data symbol".

FIG. 37(f):
If the π/2 shift BPSK data symbol exists, the QPSK data symbol does not exist, the 8PSK data symbol does not exist, and the (12,4)16APSK data symbol does not exist, FIG. As shown in (f), there is a “π/2 shift BPSK data symbol” after the “(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol”.

When the symbols are arranged as described above, the symbols are arranged in the order of the signal of the modulation method (transmission method) with the highest peak power, so that there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can easily perform AGC (Automatic Gain Control) control.

FIG. 38 shows an example of a method of forming the “(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol” described above.
There are "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols" of the coding rate X of the error correction code and "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols" of the coding rate Y of the error correction code. And And X>
It is assumed that the relationship of Y is established.
At this time, after the "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" of the coding rate X of the error correction code, the "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" of the coding rate Y of the error correction code is added. To place.

As shown in FIG. 38, "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols" having an error correction code coding rate of 1/2 and "(4,8,4)" having an error correction code coding rate of 2/3. 16APSK data symbols” and “(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols” with an error correction code coding rate of 3/4 are present. Then, from the above description, as shown in FIG. 38, "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" of the coding rate of the error correction code is "3/4" and "2/3 of the coding rate of the error correction code is " The symbols are arranged in the order of (4,8,4)16APSK data symbols” and “(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols” having an error correction code coding rate of 1/2.

(Embodiment A)
In this embodiment, even if the coding rate of the error correction code is a certain value (for example, the coding rate is set to K), the ring ratio (for example, the ring of (12,4)16APSK is set). A method by which the ratio can be selected will be described. This system can contribute to enrichment of variations of patterns for switching, for example, the modulation system, and thereby enables the receiving device to obtain high data reception quality by setting a suitable ring ratio. ..

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK) is defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio may be referred to as “radius ratio” as another name. ..

<Transmission station>
FIG. 39 is an example of a transmitting station.

The transmission system A101 of FIG. 39 receives video data and audio data as input, and generates a modulation signal according to the control signal A100.
The control signal A100 specifies the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate, the modulation method, and the ring ratio.
The amplifier A102 receives the modulation signal as an input, amplifies the input modulation signal, and outputs the amplified transmission signal A103. The transmission signal A103 is transmitted via the antenna A104.
<Selection of ring ratio>
Table 14 shows an example of the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio when the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK.

A control signal generation unit (not shown) generates a control signal A100 for indicating the values in Table 14 according to the designation of a predetermined coding rate or ring ratio in the transmission device. The transmission system A101 will generate a modulation signal according to the coding rate and ring ratio designated by the control signal A100.
For example, in the transmitting apparatus, when (12,4)16APSK is specified as the modulation method, the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the ring ratio is 2.99, the ring ratio The 4-bit control information is set to “0000”. If (12,4)16APSK is specified as the modulation method, the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the ring ratio is 3.09, 4-bit control related to the ring ratio is performed. The information is “0001”.

At this time, the transmission device transmits “4-bit control information regarding the ring ratio” as a part of the control information.
In addition, on the terminal side that receives the data (control information) including the 4-bit value (4-bit control information regarding the ring ratio) in Table 14, demapping (for example, demapping according to the coding rate/ring ratio indicated by this value) is performed. , The log-likelihood ratio of each bit is obtained), and the data is demodulated.

Note that this 4-bit value (4-bit control information related to the ring ratio) can be transmitted by using 4 bits in the "transmission mode/slot information" in the "TMCC information symbol group".
This Table 14 shows that "when the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK, the 4-bit value is "0000", the "data symbol group The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol of the "constituting slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the ring ratio of ₍ 12,4)16APSK is R _(12,4) =2.99. It means that.

In addition, “in the case where the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK, when the 4-bit value is “0001”, “composed of data symbol group The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol of "slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the ring ratio of ₍ 12,4)16APSK is R _(12,4) = 3.09." , Indicates that.
Furthermore, “when the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK, and when the 4-bit value is “0010”, “composed of data symbol group The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbol of "slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the ring ratio of ₍ 12,4)16APSK is R _(12,4) = 3.19". , Indicates that.

In this table 14, three types of ring ratios are associated with each coding rate of a certain value, but this is merely an example. That is, a mode in which a plurality of types of ring ratios are associated with each other for a certain coding rate is conceivable. Further, a mode in which one type of ring ratio is associated with the coding rates of some values and a plurality of types of ring ratios are associated with the coding rates of the remaining values can be considered.

<Receiver>
A receiving device corresponding to the transmitting method of the present embodiment will be described.

The receiving device A200 (of the terminal) of FIG. 40 receives at the antenna A201 a radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station of FIG. 39 and relayed by the satellite (relay station) to the signal transmitted by the transmitting station. (Note that the relationship between the transmitting station, the relay station, and the receiving device (terminal) will be described in detail in the next embodiment.)
The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received wireless signal and outputs a baseband signal.

The demodulation unit A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filter processing and outputs the filtered baseband signal.
The synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as an input and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, the “synchronization symbol group” and the “pilot symbol group” transmitted by the transmission device. , Outputs the estimated signal.

The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", performs demodulation/decoding, and outputs a control signal. It is to be noted that what is important in the present embodiment is that the receiving apparatus A200 demodulates/decodes the symbols for transmitting the information of the “transmission mode/slot information” of the “TMCC information symbol group”. Then, the receiving device A10 generates information specifying the coding rate and the ring ratio from the decoded 4-bit value (4-bit control information regarding the ring ratio) based on the table similar to the held table 14. Then, as a part of the control signal, the control information estimation unit A216 outputs it.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as input, and based on the control signal, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the "slot composed of the data symbol group". And a ring ratio, and based on this judgment, a log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol is calculated from the filtered baseband signal and the estimated signal and output. (However, instead of the soft decision value such as LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of the LLR may be output.)
The deinterleave unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal as input, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (data rearrangement) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. To do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving and the control signal as input, determines the error correction method (code length, coding rate, etc.) used, and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. To obtain estimated information bits. If the error correction code used is an LDPC code, the decoding method is sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, reliability propagation decoding such as Layered BP decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding). Will be used. The above is the operation when the iterative detection is not performed, but the receiver that performs the iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may be used.

(Embodiment B)
In this embodiment, even if the coding rate of the error correction code is set to a certain value (for example, the coding rate is set to K), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK can be selected for each channel. The possible methods will be described. In the following, (12,4)16APSK is taken as an example of a modulation method for selecting the ring ratio, but the modulation method is not limited to this.
(This enables the receiving device to obtain high data reception quality by setting a suitable ring ratio for each channel.)
41 to 43 show a terrestrial transmitter station that transmits a transmission signal to a satellite. FIG. 44 shows the frequency arrangement of each modulated signal. 45 to 46 show an example of the configuration of a satellite (repeater) that receives a signal transmitted by a terrestrial transmitting station and transmits the received signal to a terrestrial receiving terminal as a modulated signal.

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK) is defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio may be referred to as “radius ratio” as another name. ..

<Transmission station>
The transmitting station in FIG. 41 is an example of a transmitting station that performs common amplification.

The N transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N shown in FIG. 41 receive video data, audio data, and a control signal A100, respectively.
The control signal A100 specifies the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate, the modulation method, and the ring ratio for each channel. For this modulation method, for example, (12,4)16APSK is specified.
The transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N generate modulation signals according to the control signal A100.

The common amplifier B102 receives the modulation signals #1 to #N as input, amplifies the input modulation signal, and outputs an amplified transmission signal B103 including the modulation signals #1 to #N.
This transmission signal B103 is composed of N channel signals of modulated signals #1 to #N, and includes a "TMCC information symbol group" for each channel (each modulated signal), and this "TMCC information symbol group" is error-corrected. In addition to the code length of the code, the coding rate, and the modulation method, the information on the ring ratio is included.

Specifically, modulated signal #1 includes a "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #1 (channel #1), and modulated signal #2 is a "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #2 (channel #2). , And the modulated signal #N includes the “TMCC information symbol group” in the modulated signal #N (channel #N).
Then, the transmission signal B103 is transmitted via the antenna B104.

The transmitting station in FIG. 42 is an example of a transmitting station that amplifies individually for each channel transmission system.
The N amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N amplify the input modulated signals and output transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N. The transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N are transmitted via the antennas B203_1 to B203_N.

The transmitting station of FIG. 43 is an example of a transmitting station that amplifies each channel transmission system individually, but transmits after mixing with a mixer.
The mixer B301 mixes the amplified modulated signals output from the amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N, and transmits the mixed transmission signal B302 via the antenna B303.

<Frequency allocation of each modulation signal>
FIG. 44 shows an example of frequency arrangement of signals (transmission signal or modulation signal) B401_1 to B401_N. In FIG. 44, the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents power. As shown in FIG. 44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43, and B401_2 indicates transmission in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. The position on the frequency axis of the signal #2 (modulation signal #2) is shown,..., B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of the transmission signal #N (modulation signal #N) in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. Showing.

<Satellite>
In the satellite of FIG. 45, the reception antenna B501 receives the signal transmitted by the transmission station and outputs the reception signal B502. The received signal B502 includes the components of modulated signal #1 to modulated signal #N in FIGS. 41, 42, 43, and 44.
B503 in FIG. 45 is a wireless processing unit. The wireless processing unit B503 includes wireless processing B503_1 to B503_N.
Radio processing B503_1 receives received signal B502 as input, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of modulated signal #1 in FIGS. 41, 42, 43, and 44, and performs modulation after signal processing. Output signal #1.
Similarly, the wireless processing B503_2 receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of the modulated signal #2 in FIGS. 41, 42, 43, and 44, and performs signal processing. The subsequent modulated signal #2 is output.
...
The wireless processing B503_N receives the received signal B502 as input, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of the modulated signal #N in FIGS. 41, 42, 43 and 44, and performs modulation after the signal processing. Output signal #N.
The amplifier B504_1 receives the modulated signal #1 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the modulated signal #1 after amplification.
The amplifier B504_2 receives the modulated signal #2 after the signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the modulated signal #2 after the amplification.
...
The amplifier B504_N inputs the modulated signal #2 after the signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the amplified modulated signal #N.

Then, the amplified modulated signals are transmitted via the antennas B505_1 to B505_N. (The transmitted modulated signal will be received by the terminal on the ground.)
At this time, the frequency arrangement of the signals transmitted by the satellite (repeater) will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, in FIG. 44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of the transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43, and B401_2 is in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. , B401_N on the frequency axis of the transmission signal #N (modulation signal #N) of FIG. 41, FIG. 42, and FIG. 43. The position is shown. At this time, the frequency band used is the α GHz band.

44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulation signal #1 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45, and B401_2 indicates the modulation signal #2 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45. , B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulated signal #N transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45. At this time, the frequency band used is the β GHz band.

The satellite shown in FIG. 46 differs from that shown in FIG. 45 in that the satellite is transmitted after being mixed by the mixer B601. That is, the mixer B601 receives the modulated signal #1 after amplification, the modulated signal #2 after amplified,..., And the modulated signal #N after amplified, and generates a modulated signal after mixing. The mixed modulation signal includes the components of the modulation signal #1, the components of the modulation signal #2,..., And the components of the modulation signal #N, and the frequency arrangement is as shown in FIG. Signal.

<Selection of ring ratio>
In the satellite system described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46, a mode in which the ring ratio (radius ratio) of (12,4)16APSK is selected for each channel from channel #1 to channel #N will be described.

For example, it is assumed that the code length (block length) of the error correction code is X bits, and the coding rate A (for example, 3/4) is selected from a plurality of selectable coding rates.
In the satellite system of FIGS. 45 and 46, amplifiers B504_1, B504_2,. ． ． , B504_N has small distortion (high linearity of input/output), even if the ring ratio (radius ratio) of (12,4)16APSK is uniquely set, if it is set to a suitable value, (terrestrial) terminal The (reception device) can obtain high data reception quality.

Since the satellite system transmits a modulated signal to a terminal on the earth, it uses an amplifier capable of obtaining a high output. Therefore, an amplifier with large distortion (low input/output linearity) is used, and there is a high possibility that the distortion has individual differences among the amplifiers (amplifiers B504_1, B504_2,. B504_N has different distortion characteristics (input/output characteristics).

In this case, if a suitable (12,4)16APSK ring ratio (radius ratio) is used for each amplifier, that is, if a suitable (12,4)16APSK ring ratio (radius ratio) is set for each channel, Then, high data reception quality can be obtained in each channel. Then, the transmitting station of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 performs such a setting by the control signal A100.
Therefore, control information such as TMCC included in each modulated signal (each channel) includes information on the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK. (This point is as described in the previous embodiment.)
Therefore, when the (terrestrial) transmitting station of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 uses (12,4)16APSK as the modulation scheme of the data symbol of modulated signal #1, it uses (12,4) at that time. The 16APSK ring ratio information is transmitted as part of the control information.
Similarly, when the (terrestrial) transmitting station of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 uses (12,4)16APSK as the modulation method of the data symbol of modulated signal #2, it uses (12,4) ) 16APSK ring ratio information is transmitted as part of the control information.
...
Similarly, the (terrestrial) transmitting stations of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use (12,4)16APSK when the modulation method of the data symbol of the modulated signal #N is (12,4)16APSK. ) 16APSK ring ratio information is transmitted as part of the control information.

Note that the coding rate of the error correction code used in the modulated signal #1, the coding rate of the error correction code used in the modulated signal #2,..., The coding rate of the error correction code used in the modulated signal #N. May be the same.

<Receiver>
A receiving device corresponding to the transmitting method of the present embodiment will be described.

The receiving device A200 (of the terminal) of FIG. 40 receives at the antenna A201 a radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station of FIGS. 41 and 42 and relayed by the satellite (relay station) of the signal transmitted by the transmitting station. The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received wireless signal and outputs a baseband signal.
The demodulation unit A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filter processing and outputs the filtered baseband signal.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as an input and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, the “synchronization symbol group” and the “pilot symbol group” transmitted by the transmission device. , Outputs the estimated signal.
The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", performs demodulation/decoding, and outputs a control signal. It is to be noted that what is important in the present embodiment is that receiving apparatus A200 demodulates/decodes the symbols that transmit the information of the “TMCC information symbol group”. Then, the receiving device A10 generates information that specifies the information of the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate, the modulation scheme, and the ring ratio for each channel from the decoded value, and the control information is generated as a part of the control signal. The estimation unit A216 outputs.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as input, and based on the control signal, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the "slot composed of the data symbol group". And a ring ratio, and based on this judgment, a log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol is calculated from the filtered baseband signal and the estimated signal and output. (However, instead of the soft decision value such as LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of the LLR may be output.)
The deinterleave unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal as input, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (data rearrangement) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. To do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method (code length, coding rate, etc.) used, and based on this judgment, performs error correction decoding. To obtain estimated information bits. When the error correction code used is an LDPC code, the decoding method is reliability propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, Layered BP decoding. Will be used. The above is the operation when the iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs the iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may be used.

It should be noted that the method of generating the information on the ring ratio included in the control information is not limited to the embodiment described before the present embodiment, and any information related to the ring ratio may be transmitted. ..

(Embodiment C)
In this embodiment, signaling (control information transmission method) for notifying a terminal of a ring ratio (for example, a (12,4)16APSK ring ratio) will be described.

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK) is defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio may be referred to as “radius ratio” as another name. ..
Such signaling can be performed using the bits included in the “TMCC information symbol group” described in this specification.

In the present embodiment, an example of a method of configuring the "TMCC information symbol group" will be described based on "the transmission method standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version" of the advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting.
In order for the transmitting station to notify the terminal of the information about the ring ratio via the satellite (repeater), the use of 3614 bits of "extended information" in the "TMCC information symbol group" described in FIG. 18 is involved. Can also be considered. (This point is also described in "ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version of advanced transmission standard for advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting".) This is shown in FIG.

The extension information of FIG. 47 is a field used for future TMCC information extension, and is composed of a 16-bit extension identification and a 3598-bit extension area. When “method A” is adopted in the “extension information” of the TMCC of FIG. 47, all extension identifications are “0” (all 16 bits are zero) and all 3598 bits of the extension area are “1”. ..
Further, when the “method B” is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and the extension identifications are all values other than “0”, that is, values other than “0000000000000000”. It should be noted that which of the methods A and B is to be adopted is determined by, for example, user setting.

“Method A” is a transmission method (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) in which the ring ratio is determined when the coding rate of the error correction code is set to a certain value. (When the coding rate of the error correction code to be used is determined, the ring ratio is uniquely determined.)
The “method B” is a transmission method (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) in which the ring ratio to be used can be selected from a plurality of ring ratios when the coding rate of the error correction code is set to a certain value.

Hereinafter, an example of signaling performed by the transmitting station will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52, but the following bits are used for signaling in common with all the examples.
d ₀ : Indicates a satellite broadcasting system.
_{c 0 c 1 c 2 c 3} : shows a table.
b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ : Indicates the coding rate (the ring ratio may also be indicated).
_{x 0 x 1 x 2 x 3} x 4 x 5: shows a ring ratio.
y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ : difference in ring ratio is shown.
Details of the above bits will be described later.

The “coding rate” described in FIGS. 48, 49, 50, 51, and 52 is the coding rate of the error correction code, and specifically 41/120, 49/ Numerical values of 120, 61/120, 109/120 are described, but by approximating these numerical values, 41/120≈1/3, 49/120≈2/5, 61/120≈1/ 2, 109/120≈9/10.

Hereinafter, <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described.

In the extension information of FIG. 47, when all the extension identifications are "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all 3598 bits in the extension area are "1", the above-mentioned "method A" is selected.

First, a case where the transmission device (transmission station) transmits a modulated signal using the “scheme A” will be described.
When the transmission device (transmission station) selects (12,4)16APSK as the modulation scheme, the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is as follows.

Therefore, by setting all the extension identifications of the TMCC to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all the 3598 bits of the extension area of the TMCC to "1" (the transmitting device transmits these values), It is possible for the receiving device to determine that the “method A” is selected, and the information on the coding rate of the error correction code being used is transmitted as part of the TMCC. From this information, the receiving device can determine the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when (12,4)16APSK is used as the modulation scheme.
Specifically, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b ₃ described above are used. The relationship between b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the coding rate of the error correction code is as follows.

As shown in Table 16, when the transmission device (transmission station) uses 41/120 as the coding rate of the error correction code, it sets to (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000). Further, when 49/120 is used as the coding rate of the error correction code, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set, and the coding rate of the error correction code is 109/ When 120 is used, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) will be set. Then, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , and b ₃ are transmitted as a part of TMCC.

Therefore, the following table can be created.

As you can see from Table 17,
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 3.09.
When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 49/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.97.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0010), the coding rate of the error correction code is 61/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 3.93.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0011), the coding rate of the error correction code is 73/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.87.
When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0100), the coding rate of the error correction code is 81/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.92.
When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0101), the coding rate of the error correction code is 89/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.97.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0110), the coding rate of the error correction code is 97/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.73.
When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0111), the coding rate of the error correction code is 101/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.67.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 105/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.76.
When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 109/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.69.

Therefore, the transmission device (transmission station)
Set all TMCC extension identifications to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and set all 3598 bits in the TMCC extension area to "1" to notify that "method A" is used. ..
-In order to make it possible to estimate the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ is transmitted.
Will be carried out.

Next, a case where the transmission device (of the transmission station) transmits data using the “scheme B” will be described.
As described above, when the “method B” is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and the extension identifications are all values other than “0”, that is, values other than “0000000000000000”. .. Here, as an example, when "0000000000000001" is transmitted as the extended identification, it is assumed that the transmission device (of the transmission station) transmits the data using "method B".

Note that the 16-bit extension identifier _{d 15, d 14, d 13} , d 12, d 11, d 10, d 9, d 8, d 7, d 6, d 5, d 4, d 3, d 2, When represented by d ₁ and d ₀ , when “method B” is adopted, (d ₁₅ , d ₁₄ , d ₁₃ , d ₁₂ , d ₁₁ , d ₁₀ , d ₉ ,d ₈ , d ₇ , d ₆ ,d ₆ , d ₅ , d ₄ , d ₃ , d ₂ , d ₁ , d ₀ )=(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, It will be set as 1). (Note, as described above, when employing the "mode _{B", (d 15, d 14,} d 13, d 12, d 11, d 10, d 9, d 8, d 7, d 6, d 5, _{d 4, d 3, d 2} , d 1, d 0) and (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) except it is sufficient to set the _{value, (d 15, d 14,} d 13, d 12, d 11, d 10, d 9, d 8, d 7, d 6, d 5, d 4, d 3, d It is not limited to the example of ₂ ,d ₁ ,d ₀ )=(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1) .)

Then, as specific examples, <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described below.

<Example 1>
In Example 1, in “method B”, a plurality of types of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio tables are prepared, so that different ring ratios can be set for one coding rate.
As an example, a case will be described in which the “satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the coding rate is 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio is 4.00”. (However, it is assumed that (12,4)16APSK is selected as the modulation method.)
As shown in FIG. 48, a table 1, a table 2,..., A table 16 are prepared, that is, 16 types of tables 1 to 16 are prepared.

Then, in each table, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) described above, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are associated.
For example, in Table 1, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) will be set. Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.97, (b ₀
b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) will be set. ...When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) will be set.
In Table 2, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) =(0000) will be set. Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.91, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) will be set. ...When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.60, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) will be set.
...
In Table 16, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.59, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) =(0000) will be set. Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.50, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) will be set. ... the coding rate of error correction code to generate data symbols 109/120, if a 2.23 a ring ratio _{(12,4) 16APSK, (b 0} b 1 b 2 b 3) = (1001) will be set.

Although not described above in Tables 1 to 16, the coding rates of the error correction codes are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/. The values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are associated with 120, 101/120, 105/120, and 109/120, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When table 1 is selected (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, ₀ , ₀ , 0), and when table 2 is selected (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c) ₃ )=(0,0,0,1),..., When selecting the table 16 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=( ₁ , ₁ , ₁ , ₁ ) Set.

Next, as an example, a method of setting “satellite broadcasting system “system B”, coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00” will be described.
First, as described above, since “method B” is selected, d ₀ =“1” is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the first row of Table 2 has a coding ratio of 41/120 and a ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK of 4.00, so that b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”. To do.
Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” is set to indicate the table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1 to 16.
Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station), when transmitting the data symbols in "satellite broadcasting system "system B", coding rate 41/120, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d Control information (part of TMCC information) with ₀ = "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ = "0001" is transmitted together with the data symbol. To do. However, it is necessary to transmit, as the control information, control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK.

That is, in <Example 1>,
-For error-correcting code coding rates 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/120, 101/120, 105/120, 109/120, respectively , B ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are associated with each other.
The transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ indicating the information of the used table.
Then, the transmitting device transmits the information of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio used for generating the data symbol.

The method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “scheme A” is as described before the description of <Example 1>.

<Example 2>
Example 2 is a modification of <Example 1>.

Here, a case where the transmission device (transmission station) selects the “method B” will be described. At this time, the transmission device (transmission station) will select “method B”, and therefore d ₀ =“1” is set as shown in FIG. 49.
Then, the transmission device (transmission station) newly sets z ₀ . When the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is determined by the same method as in “method A”, z ₀ =0 is set. When z ₀ =0 is set, the coding rate of the error correction code is specified based on Table 16 by b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b ₃ , and from Table 15, the ring of (12,4)16APSK is specified. The ratio will be determined. (See Table 17)
When determining the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK in the same manner as in Example 1, set z ₀ =1. At this time, based on Table 15, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is not determined, but the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is determined by the same procedure as in Example 1.

As an example, a case will be described in which the “satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the coding rate is 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio is 4.00”. (However, it is assumed that (12,4)16APSK is selected as the modulation method. Further, z ₀ =1 is set.)
As shown in FIG. 49, a table 1, a table 2,..., A table 16 are prepared, that is, 16 types of tables 1 to 16 are prepared.

Then, in each table, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) described above, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are associated.
For example, in Table 1, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) will be set. Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.97, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) will be set. ...When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) will be set.
In Table 2, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) =(0000) will be set. Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.91, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) will be set. ...When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.60, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) will be set.
...
In Table 16, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.59, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) =(0000) will be set. Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.50, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) will be set. ... the coding rate of error correction code to generate data symbols 109/120, if a 2.23 a ring ratio _{(12,4) 16APSK, (b 0} b 1 b 2 b 3) = (1001) will be set.

Although not described above in Tables 1 to 16, the coding rates of the error correction codes are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/. The values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are associated with 120, 101/120, 105/120, and 109/120, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When table 1 is selected (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, ₀ , ₀ , 0), and when table 2 is selected (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c) ₃ )=(0,0,0,1),..., When selecting the table 16 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=( ₁ , ₁ , ₁ , ₁ ) Set.

Next, as an example, a method of setting “satellite broadcasting system “system B”, coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00” will be described.

First, as described above, since “method B” is selected, d ₀ =“1” is set. Further, z ₀ =1 is set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the first row of table 2 has a coding rate of 41/120 and a ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK of 4.00, so that b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”. To do.
Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” is set to indicate the table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1 to 16.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station), when transmitting the data symbols in "satellite broadcasting system "system B", coding rate 41/120, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d Control information (a part of TMCC information) in which ₀ = "1", z ₀ = 1, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ = "0001" is data Send together with the symbol. However, it is necessary to transmit, as the control information, control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK.

The method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “scheme A” is as described before the description of <Example 1>.

<Example 3>
Example 3 is characterized in that signaling is performed by a value indicating the ring ratio.

First, as in <Example 1> and <Example 2>, since the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by the “scheme B”, d ₀ =“1” is set.
Then, as shown in FIG. 50, the value of x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ is associated with the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK. For example, as shown in FIG. 50, the transmission apparatus (transmission _{station), (x 0, x 1,} x 2, x 3, x 4, x 5) = (0,0,0,0,0,0) Then, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to 2.00, and (x ₀ , x ₁ , x ₂ , x ₃ , x ₄ , x ₅ )=(1, 1, 1 , 1, 1, 1), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to 4.00.

As an example, a method of setting "satellite broadcasting system "system B" and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00" will be described.
At this time, the "relationship between _{x 0 x 1 x 2 x 3} x 4 x values of ₅ and (12,4) 16APSK Ring ratio" in FIG. 50, the transmission apparatus (transmission _{station), x 0} x 1 x ₂ Set x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000”.

Therefore, the transmitter (transmitting station) d ₀ =“1”, x ₀ when transmitting the data symbol with “the satellite broadcast system is “system B” and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio is 2.00”. x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄
The control information (a part of the information of TMCC) with x ₅ =“000000” is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, it is necessary to transmit, as the control information, control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK.

The method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “scheme A” is as described before the description of <Example 1>.

<Example 4>
In Example 4, the coding rate of the error correction code in the main table and b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ showing the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK and y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ showing the difference between the ring ratios. y ₄ y ₅ realizes a desired ring ratio signaling of (12,4)16APSK.

One of the important points in Example 4 is that the main table shown in FIG. 51 is the table of Table 17, that is, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the error correction code in the case of “method A”. The coding rate and the ring ratio are related to each other.
In the following, further characteristic points of Example 4 will be described.
FIG. 51 shows the difference table. The difference table is a table for difference information from the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK set using the main table. It is assumed that the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to h based on the main table.
Then, it becomes as follows.
...
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011110) is set by the transmission device (transmission station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to h+0.4.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to be h+0.2.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100000) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to be h+0.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set as h-0.2. To do.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set as h-0.4. To do.
...
Therefore, the transmitter determines (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ) to determine the correction value f for the ring ratio h of (12,4)16APSK determined by the main table, and 12,4) Set 16APSK ring ratio to h+f.

As an example, a method of setting “satellite broadcasting system “system B”, coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49” will be described.
First, the transmission apparatus selects “method B”, and therefore sets d ₀ =“1”.
Then, in order to select the coding rate 41/120 from the main table of FIG. 51, the transmitting apparatus sets b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”.

In the main table, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK corresponding to the value b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000" is 3.09, so the difference from the ring ratio 3.49 you want to set is 3.49-3.09=+0.4. Become.
Therefore, the transmission device sets y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“011110” indicating “+0.4” in the difference table.
Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station), when transmitting the data symbol in the "satellite broadcasting system "system B", the coding rate 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49", Control information (a part of TMCC information) having ₀ = "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ = "011110" is a data symbol. And send it together. However, it is necessary to transmit, as the control information, control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK.

This example 4 is suitable when a part of the specifications of the “method A” is also used in the “method B” because a part of the main table of the “method A” is used even in the case of the “method B”. ing.
The method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “scheme A” is as described before the description of <Example 1>.

Although one difference table is prepared in FIG. 51, a plurality of difference tables may be prepared. For example, it is assumed that the difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared. Then, similarly to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting apparatus sets c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , and sets d ₀ , b _0. In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ is transmitted as part of control information together with data symbols.

Also, from the value of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y _{5 in} the difference table to be used, the correction value f from the ring ratio h of (12,4)16APSK determined using the main table will be obtained. ..

<Example 5>
In example 5, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ showing the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK in the main table and y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ showing the difference between the ring ratios. y ₄ y ₅ realizes signaling with a desired ring ratio.

One of the important points in Example 5 is that the main table shown in FIG. 52 is the table of Table 17, that is, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the error correction code in the case of “method A”. The coding rate and the ring ratio are related to each other.
In the following, further characteristic points of Example 5 will be described.
FIG. 52 shows the difference table. The difference table is a table for difference information from the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK set using the main table. It is assumed that the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to h based on the main table.
Then, it becomes as follows.
...
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011110) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set as h×1.2. To do.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set as h×1.1. To do.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100000) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set as h×1.0. To do.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001) is set by the transmission device (transmission station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set as h×0.9. To do.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set as h×0.8. To do.
...
Therefore, the transmission device determines (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ) to determine the correction coefficient g for the ring ratio h of (12,4)16APSK determined by the main table. 12,4) Set the ring ratio of 16APSK to h×g.

As an example, a method of setting "satellite broadcasting system "system B", coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78" will be described.
First, the transmission apparatus selects “method B”, and therefore sets d ₀ =“1”.
Then, in order to select the coding rate 41/120 from the main table in FIG. 52, the transmitting apparatus sets b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”.

In the main table, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK corresponding to the value b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000" is 3.09, so the difference shown in the form of multiplication with the ring ratio 2.78 you want to set is 2.78/ 3.09=0.9.
Therefore, the transmission device has y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y indicating “×0.9” in the difference table.
₅ Set as "100001".

Therefore, when the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the data symbol by "the method of satellite broadcasting is "method B", the coding rate is 41/120, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.78", d Control information (part of TMCC information) in which ₀ = "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ = "100001" is a data symbol And send it together. However, it is necessary to transmit, as the control information, control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK.

This example 5 is suitable when a part of the specifications of the “method A” is also used in the “method B” because a part of the main table of the “method A” is used even in the case of the “method B”. ing.
The method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “scheme A” is as described before the description of <Example 1>.

Although one difference table is prepared in FIG. 52, a plurality of difference tables may be prepared. For example, it is assumed that the difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared. Then, similarly to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting apparatus sets c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , and sets d ₀ , b _0. In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ is transmitted as part of control information together with data symbols.

Further, the correction coefficient g from the ring ratio h of (12,4)16APSK determined using the main table is obtained from the values of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y _{5 in} the difference table used. ..

<Receiver>
Regarding the receiving apparatus corresponding to the transmission method of the present embodiment, the configuration common to <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described, and then specific processing of each example will be described.

The terrestrial receiving device (terminal) A200 in FIG. 40 receives at the antenna A201 the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station in FIG. 39 and relayed by the satellite (relay station). The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received wireless signal and outputs a baseband signal.
The demodulation unit A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filter processing and outputs the filtered baseband signal.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as an input and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, the “synchronization symbol group” and the “pilot symbol group” transmitted by the transmission device. , Outputs the estimated signal.
The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", performs demodulation/decoding, and outputs a control signal.
Note that what is important in the present embodiment is that the control information estimation unit A216 estimates the control information included in the “TMCC information symbol group” and outputs it as a control signal. , D ₀ , z ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y _{4 described above.} That is, the information of y ₅ is included.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as input, and based on the control signal, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the "slot composed of the data symbol group". And a ring ratio, and based on this judgment, a log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol is calculated from the filtered baseband signal and the estimated signal and output. (However, instead of the soft decision value such as LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of the LLR may be output.)
The deinterleave unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal as input, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (data rearrangement) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. To do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method (code length, coding rate, etc.) used, and based on this judgment, performs error correction decoding. To obtain estimated information bits. When the error correction code used is an LDPC code, the decoding method is reliability propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, Layered BP decoding. Will be used. The above is the operation when the iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs the iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may be used.

Such a receiving device holds a table similar to the tables shown in <Example 1> to <Example 5> described above, and the procedure reverse to <Example 1> to <Example 5> is performed. By doing so, the satellite broadcasting system, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are estimated, and the demodulation/decoding operation is performed. Hereinafter, each example will be described separately.
Note that the following description will be given on the assumption that the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device has determined from the TMCC information that the data symbol modulation scheme is the (12,4)16APSK symbol.

<<Receiving Device Corresponding to Example 1>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, control information estimation section A 216 of the reception apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbol is the symbol of (12,4)16APSK. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 53, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device, from d ₀ =“1” to “method B”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” and b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ It is estimated from "0000" that the coding rate of the error correction code in the first row of Table 2 is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 2>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, control information estimation section A 216 of the reception apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbol is the symbol of (12,4)16APSK. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 54, when the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device obtains d ₀ ″1″ and z ₀ =0, “the ring ratio is set as in the case of scheme A”. It is determined that b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ are obtained, and the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are estimated from Table 17. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving device uses d ₀ =“1”, z ₀ =1 to “scheme B”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” and b. _{From 0} b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", the coding rate of the error correction code in the first row of Table 2 is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00.
It is estimated that Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 3>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, control information estimation section A 216 of the reception apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbol is the symbol of (12,4)16APSK. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 55, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device determines from d ₀ =“1” to “scheme B”, x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000” to (12,4 ) Estimate the ring ratio of 16APSK to be 2.00. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 4>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, control information estimation section A 216 of the reception apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbol is the symbol of (12,4)16APSK. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 56, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a “scheme B” symbol from d ₀ =“1”. Further, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus _estimates a _{y 0 y 1 y 2 y 3} y 4 y 5 = +0.4 difference from "011110". Also, b ₀ b ₁
Based on b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK before considering the difference is estimated to be 3.09 and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120. Then, by adding both, it is estimated that the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.49 from 3.09+0.4=3.49. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 5>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, control information estimation section A 216 of the reception apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbol is the symbol of (12,4)16APSK. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 57, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a “scheme B” symbol from d ₀ =“1”. Further, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus _estimates a × 0.9 the difference based on _{y 0 y 1 y 2 y 3} y 4 y 5 = "100001". Also, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK before considering the difference is estimated to be 3.09 and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120. .. Then, by multiplying both by 3.09×0.9=2.78, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated to be 2.78. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

(Embodiment D)
In this embodiment, a method of transmitting pilot symbols based on Embodiment C will be described.

Note that the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK) is defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio may be referred to as “radius ratio” as another name. ..

<Example of pilot symbol>
In this embodiment, a configuration example of pilot symbols in the transmission method (data symbol modulation method is (12,4)16APSK) described in the above-mentioned Embodiment C will be described.

The configuration of the transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

Due to the non-linearity of the power amplifier of the transmitter, intermodulation (intersymbol) interference occurs in the modulated signal. The receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing the intersymbol interference.

In this pilot symbol configuration example, in order to reduce inter-symbol (inter-symbol) interference in the receiving device, the transmitting device transmits the pilot symbol using the modulation method and ring ratio used in the data symbols. ..

Therefore, when the transmission apparatus (transmission station) determines the data symbol modulation method and the ring ratio by any of the methods of <Example 1> to <Example 5> of the embodiment C, the pilot symbol also has the data symbol. The same modulation method and ring ratio will be used to generate and transmit pilot symbols.

Below, a concrete example is shown. However, the description will be continued on the assumption that (12,4)16APSK is selected as the modulation method.

In the case of <Example 1> of Embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a data symbol with "satellite broadcasting system "system B", coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d ₀ = _{"1", b 0 b 1} b 2 b 3 = "0000", and _{c 0 c 1 c 2 c 3} = "0001". Then, based on "d ₀ ="1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001"", the transmission device (transmission station) determines that the pilot symbol Set the modulation method and ring ratio to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio to 4.00 (however, (12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
Signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00
Symbol of
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] corresponding to the signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] corresponding to the signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbol is used by the receiving apparatus to estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatus (
Channel estimation), frequency offset estimation, and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station). ), in order,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 2> of Embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a data symbol with "satellite broadcasting system "system B", coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d ₀ = _{"1", z 0 = 1} , b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 = "0000", c 0 c 1 c 2 c 3 = "0001" and control information (part of the TMCC information) and the data symbols Send together. Then, based on "d ₀ ="1", z ₀ =1, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001"", the transmission device (transmission station) Sets the pilot symbol modulation method and ring ratio to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio to 4.00 (however, (12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
Signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00
Symbol of
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] corresponding to the signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] corresponding to the signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station). ), in order,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 3> of Embodiment C:
When transmitting a data symbol with "satellite broadcasting system "system B" and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00", the transmission device (transmission station) d ₀ ="1", x ₀ x ₁ The control information (a part of the TMCC information) in which x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000” is transmitted together with the data symbol. Then, based on “d ₀ =“1”, x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000””, the transmission device (transmission station) sets the modulation method/ring ratio of the pilot symbol to ( Set the ring ratio of 12,4)16APSK to 2.00 (however, (12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
Signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00
Symbol of
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00 [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] corresponding to the signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station). ), in order,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 4> of the embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the data symbol by "the method of satellite broadcasting is "method B", the coding rate is 41/120, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.49", d ₀ = Control information (part of TMCC information) that is "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ = "011110" is combined with a data symbol. To send. Then, based on "d ₀ =“1”, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“011110””, the transmission device (transmission station) is , The pilot symbol modulation method and ring ratio are set to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio are set to 3.49 (however, (12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
Signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49
Symbol of
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
Signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49
Symbol of
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station). ), in order,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 5> of the embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the data symbol with “the satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the coding rate is 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio is 2.78”, d ₀ = _{"1", b 0 b 1} b 2 b 3 = "0000", together with _{y 0 y 1 y 2 y 3} y 4 y 5 = "100001" ( a part of the TMCC information) control information to the data symbols To send. Then, based on "d ₀ ="1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="100001"", the transmission device (transmission station) The pilot symbol modulation method and ring ratio are set to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio is 2.78 (however, (12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
Signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78
Symbol of
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
Symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station). ), in order,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

The operation of the receiving device will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 2, reference numeral 210 is the configuration of the receiving device. The demapping unit 214 of FIG. 2 performs demapping on the mapping of the modulation method used by the transmission device, for example, obtains and outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 2, in order to perform demapping with high accuracy, estimation of intersymbol interference, estimation of radio wave propagation environment between transmission device and reception device (channel estimation), It is recommended to estimate the time synchronization and frequency offset of.

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the receiving apparatus includes an inter-symbol interference estimating section, a channel estimating section, a time synchronizing section, and a frequency offset estimating section. These estimation units extract, for example, a pilot symbol portion from the received signal, estimate intersymbol interference, estimate radio wave propagation environment between the transmission device and the reception device (channel estimation), and transmit/receive between the transmitter and the receiver, respectively. Time synchronization and frequency offset estimation are performed. Then, the demapping unit 214 in FIG. 2 receives these estimated signals and performs demapping based on these estimated signals, thereby calculating, for example, the log likelihood ratio.

The information about the modulation scheme and the ring ratio used to generate the data symbol is transmitted using the control information such as TMCC, as described in Embodiment C. Since the modulation scheme/ring ratio used to generate the pilot symbols is the same as the modulation scheme/ring ratio used to generate the data symbols, therefore, the receiving device is controlled by the control information estimating unit. Thus, the modulation scheme/ring ratio is estimated from the control information, and the demapping unit 214 obtains this information, thereby estimating the channel distortion due to the pilot symbols and demapping the information symbols. It will be.

The method of transmitting pilot symbols is not limited to the above. For example,
The transmitting device (transmitting station), as a pilot symbol,
(12,4) 16APSK ring ratio of _{L [b 3 b 2 b 1} b 0] = [0000] multiple symbols of the signal point corresponding (baseband signal) to,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is repeated a plurality of times.
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times.
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is
(12,4) 16APSK ring ratio of _{L [b 3 b 2 b 1} b 0] = [0111] multiple symbols of the signal point corresponding (baseband signal) to,
(12,4) 16APSK ring ratio of _{L [b 3 b 2 b 1} b 0] = [1000] corresponding signal points (baseband signal) multiple symbols,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times.
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times.
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L is
(12,4) 16APSK ring ratio of _{L [b 3 b 2 b 1} b 0] = signal point corresponding to the 1111] symbols (baseband signal) may be transmitted multiple times.

At this time,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio L,
If the number of times each symbol is transmitted is equal, there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can perform highly accurate channel distortion estimation.

It should be noted that the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to the above description, and there are a plurality of data symbols, and for transmitting information regarding the modulation scheme used to generate the data symbols. Symbol, an error correction method (for example, the error correction code used, the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate of the error correction code, etc.), if there is a symbol for transmitting information, a data symbol, a modulation The symbols for transmitting the information about the scheme and the symbols for transmitting the information about the error correction scheme may be arranged in any frame. Further, symbols other than these symbols, for example, symbols such as a preamble, a symbol for synchronization, a pilot symbol and a reference symbol may be present in the frame.

(Embodiment E)
In Embodiment B, Embodiment C, and Embodiment D, the method of changing the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK, the control information transmission method, the pilot symbol transmission method, and the like have been described. As a matter of course, the contents described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, and Embodiment D can be applied to other modulation schemes.

In the present embodiment, a method will be described in which the ring ratio of 32APSK can be selected for each channel even if the coding rate of the error correction code is set to a certain value (for example, the coding rate is set to K). ..
(This enables the receiving device to obtain high data reception quality by setting a suitable ring ratio for each channel.)

41 to 43 show a terrestrial transmitter station that transmits a transmission signal to a satellite. FIG. 44 shows the frequency arrangement of each modulated signal. 45 to 46 show an example of the configuration of a satellite (repeater) that receives a signal transmitted by a terrestrial transmitting station and transmits the received signal to a terrestrial receiving terminal as a modulated signal.

First, the ring ratio (radius ratio) of 32APSK is defined.
FIG. 58 shows an arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane in the 32APSK system in which the number of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is 32.

FIG. 58 shows a signal point constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (4,12,16)32APSK. There are a=4 signal points in a circle of radius R ₁ centered on the origin, b=12 signal points in a circle of radius R ₂ , and c=16 signal points in a circle of radius R ₃ . Therefore, since (a,b,c)=(4,12,16), it is described as (4,12,16)32APSK. (Note that 0<R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
At this time, the first radius ratio (ring ratio) r ₁ =R ₂ /R ₁ and the second radius ratio (ring ratio) r ₂ =R ₃ /R ₁ are defined.

<Signal point arrangement>
Next, the signal point arrangement of (4,12,16)32APSK mapping and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point will be described.

FIG. 58 shows an example of labeling. (However, FIG. 58 is an example, and labeling different from FIG. 58 may be performed.)
The coordinates of each signal point of (4,12,16)32APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.

Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000]・・・(R ₂ cos(π/4), R ₂ sin(π/4))
Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001]...(R ₂ cos(π/4+π/6), R ₂ sin(π/4+π/6)
)
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010]...(R ₂ cos((7×π)/4), R ₂ sin((7×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011]...(R ₂ cos((7×π)/4-π/6), R ₂ sin((7×π)/4 ―Π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100]...(R ₂ cos((3×π)/4), R ₂ sin((3×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101]...(R ₂ cos((3×π)/4-π/6), R ₂ sin((3×π)/4 ―Π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110]...(R ₂ cos((5×π)/4), R ₂ sin((5×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111]...(R ₂ cos((5×π)/4+π/6), R ₂ sin((5×π)/4+π/6) ))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]＝[01000]・・・(R ₃ cos(π/8),R ₃ sin(π/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001]...(R ₃ cos((3×π)/8), R ₃ sin((3×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010]...(R ₃ cos((14×π)/8), R ₃ sin((14×π)/
8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011]...(R ₃ cos((12×π)/8), R ₃ sin((12×π)/
8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100]...(R ₃ cos((6×π)/8), R ₃ sin((6×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101]...(R ₃ cos((4×π)/8), R ₃ sin((4×π)/8))
Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110]...(R ₃ cos((9×π)/8), R ₃ sin((9×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111]...(R ₃ cos((11×π)/8), R ₃ sin((11×π)/
8))

Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000]...(R ₂ cos(π/4-π/6), R ₂ sin(π/4-π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001]...(R ₁ cos(π/4),R ₁ sin(π/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010]...(R ₂ cos((7×π)/4+π/6), R ₂ sin((7×π)/4+π/6) ))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011]...(R ₁ cos((7×π)/4), R ₁ sin((7×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100]...(R ₂ cos((3×π)/4+π/6), R ₂ sin((3×π)/4+π/6) ))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101]...(R ₁ cos((3×π)/4), R ₁ sin((3×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110]...(R ₂ cos((5×π)/4-π/6), R ₂ sin((5×π)/4 ―Π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111]...(R ₁ cos((5×π)/4), R ₁ sin((5×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000]...(R ₃ cos((0×π)/8), R ₃ sin((0×π)/8))
Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11001]...(R ₃ cos((2×π)/8), R ₃ sin((2×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010]...(R ₃ cos((15×π)/8), R ₃ sin((15×π)/
8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011]...(R ₃ cos((13×π)/8), R ₃ sin((13×π)/
8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100]...(R ₃ cos((7×π)/8), R ₃ sin((7×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101]...(R ₃ cos((5×π)/8), R ₃ sin((5×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110]...(R ₃ cos((8×π)/8), R ₃ sin((8×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111]...(R ₃ cos((10×π)/8), R ₃ sin((10×π)/
8))

The unit of the phase is radian. Therefore, for example, in R ₂ cos (π/4), the unit of π/4 is radian. Also in the subsequent steps, the unit of phase is radian.

Also, for example, in the above,
Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000]・・・(R ₂ cos(π/4), R ₂ sin(π/4))
However, for example, when five bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] in the data input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component of the baseband signal after mapping is described. This means that I and the quadrature component Q are (I,Q)=(R ₂ cos(π/4),R ₂ sin(π/4)).

In another example,
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]＝[01000]・・・(R ₃ cos(π/8),R ₃ sin(π/8))
However, for example, when 5 bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, the in-phase component of the baseband signal after mapping is described. It means that the I and the quadrature component Q are (I,Q)=(R ₃ cos(π/8),R ₃ sin(π/8)).

In this regard, the input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] are all the same for [00000] to [11111].

<Sending output>
In (4,12,16)32APSK, the following normalization coefficient may be used to make the transmission output the same as other modulation schemes.

The in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b . Then, the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal is I _n and the quadrature component is Q _n . Then, when the modulation method is (4,12,16)32APSK, (I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×I _b ,a _(4,12,16) ×Q _b ) To establish.

Therefore, in the case of (4,12,16)32APSK, the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component is Q _b is the baseband after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. It becomes the in-phase component I and quadrature component Q of the signal. Therefore, in the case of (4,12,16)32APSK, the following relation holds.

Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4))
Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4+
π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4+π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((7×π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((7×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((7×π)/ 4−π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((7×π)/4−π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((3×π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((3×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((3×π)/ 4−π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((3×π)/4−π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((5×π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((5×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((5×π)/ 4+π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((5×π)/4+π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]＝[01000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos(π/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin(π/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((3×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((3×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((14 ×
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((14×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((12 ×
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((12×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((6×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((6×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((4×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((4×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((9×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((9×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((11 ×
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((11 ×π)/8))

Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4-
π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4-π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×cos(π/4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×sin(π/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((7×π)/ 4+π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((7×π)/4+π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×cos((7×π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×sin((7×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((3×π)/ 4+π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((3×π)/4+π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×cos((3×π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×sin((3×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos((5×π)/ 4−π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((5×π)/4−π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×cos((5×π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₁ ×sin((5×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000]...(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((0×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((0×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11001]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((2×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((2×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((15 ×
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((15×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((13 ×
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((13×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((7×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((7×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((5×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((5×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110]...(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((8×π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((8×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111]...(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos((10 ×
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((10×π)/8))

Also, for example, in the above,
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4))
However, in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, when five bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000], (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{( 4,12,16)} ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂
Xsin(π/4)).

In another example,
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]＝[01000]・・・(I _n ,Q _n )=(a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×cos(π/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin(π/8))
However, in the data that is input to the mapping unit 708, when five bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000], (I _n , Q _n )=(a _{( 4,12,16)} ×R ₃ ×cos(π/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin(π/8)).

In this regard, the input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] are all the same for [00000] to [11111].

<Transmission station>
The transmitting station in FIG. 41 is an example of a transmitting station that performs common amplification.

The N transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N in FIG. 41 receive video data, audio data, and a control signal A100, respectively.

The control signal A100 specifies the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate, the modulation method, and the ring ratio for each channel. For this modulation method, for example, (4,12,16)32APSK is specified.

The transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N generate modulation signals according to the control signal A100.

The common amplifier B102 receives the modulation signals #1 to #N as input, amplifies the input modulation signal, and outputs the amplified transmission signal B103 including the modulation signals #1 to #N.

This transmission signal B103 is composed of N-channel signals of modulated signals #1 to #N, and includes a "TMCC information symbol group" for each channel (each modulated signal), and this "TMCC information symbol group" is error-corrected. In addition to the code length of the code, the coding rate, and the modulation method, the information on the ring ratio is included.

Specifically, modulated signal #1 includes "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #1 (channel #1), and modulated signal #2 is "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #2 (channel #2). , And the modulated signal #N includes the “TMCC information symbol group” in the modulated signal #N (channel #N).

Then, the transmission signal B103 is transmitted via the antenna B104.

The transmitting station in FIG. 42 is an example of a transmitting station that amplifies individually for each channel transmission system.

The N amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N amplify the input modulated signals and output transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N. The transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N are transmitted via the antennas B203_1 to B203_N.

The transmitting station in FIG. 43 is an example of a transmitting station that individually amplifies for each channel transmission system, but transmits after mixing with a mixer.

The mixer B301 mixes the amplified modulated signals output from the amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N, and transmits the mixed transmission signal B302 via the antenna B303.

<Frequency allocation of each modulation signal>
FIG. 44 shows an example of frequency arrangement of signals (transmission signal or modulation signal) B401_1 to B401_N. In FIG. 44, the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents power. As shown in FIG. 44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43, and B401_2 indicates transmission in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. The position on the frequency axis of the signal #2 (modulation signal #2) is shown,..., B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of the transmission signal #N (modulation signal #N) in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. Showing.

<Satellite>
In the satellite of FIG. 45, the reception antenna B501 receives the signal transmitted by the transmission station and outputs the reception signal B502. The received signal B502 includes the components of modulated signal #1 to modulated signal #N in FIGS. 41, 42, 43, and 44.
B503 in FIG. 45 is a wireless processing unit. The wireless processing unit B503 includes wireless processing B503_1 to B503_N.

Radio processing B503_1 receives received signal B502 as input, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of modulated signal #1 in FIGS. 41, 42, 43, and 44, and performs modulation after signal processing. Output signal #1.

Similarly, the wireless processing B503_2 receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of the modulated signal #2 in FIGS. 41, 42, 43, and 44, and performs signal processing. The subsequent modulated signal #2 is output.
...

Radio processing B503_N receives received signal B502 as input, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of modulated signal #N in FIGS. 41, 42, 43, and 44, and performs modulation after signal processing. Output signal #N.

The amplifier B504_1 receives the modulated signal #1 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the modulated signal #1 after amplification.

The amplifier B504_2 receives the modulated signal #2 after the signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the modulated signal #2 after the amplification.
...

The amplifier B504_N receives the modulated signal #2 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the amplified modulated signal #N.

Then, each amplified modulated signal is transmitted via the antennas B505_1 to B505_N. (The transmitted modulated signal will be received by the terminal on the ground.)

At this time, the frequency arrangement of the signals transmitted by the satellite (repeater) will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, in FIG. 44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of the transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43, and B401_2 is in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. , B401_N on the frequency axis of the transmission signal #N (modulation signal #N) in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. The position is shown. At this time, the frequency band used is the α GHz band.

44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulation signal #1 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45, and B401_2 indicates the modulation signal #2 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45. , B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulated signal #N transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45. At this time, the frequency band used is the β GHz band.

The satellite shown in FIG. 46 differs from that shown in FIG. 45 in that the satellite is transmitted after being mixed by the mixer B601. That is, the mixer B601 receives the modulated signal #1 after amplification, the modulated signal #2 after amplified,..., And the modulated signal #N after amplified, and generates a modulated signal after mixing. The modulated signal after mixing includes a component of the modulated signal #1, a component of the modulated signal #2,..., A component of the modulated signal #N, and the frequency arrangement is as shown in FIG. It is assumed to be a band signal.

<Selection of ring ratio>
In the satellite system described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46, the two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4, 12, 16) 32 APSK in channels # 1 to # N are set for each channel. The mode of selection will be described.

For example, it is assumed that the code length (block length) of the error correction code is X bits, and the coding rate A (for example, 3/4) is selected from a plurality of selectable coding rates.

In the satellite system of FIGS. 45 and 46, amplifiers B504_1, B504_2,. ． ． , B504_N has small distortion (high linearity of input and output), it is preferable that the two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4,12,16)32APSK are uniquely determined. If the value is set, the (terrestrial) terminal (reception device) can obtain high data reception quality.

Since the satellite system transmits the modulated signal to the terminal on the earth, it uses an amplifier capable of obtaining a high output. For this reason, an amplifier with large distortion (low input/output linearity) is used, and there is a high possibility that the distortion has individual differences among the amplifiers (amplifiers B504_1, B504_2,. B504_N has different distortion characteristics (input/output characteristics).

In this case, two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4,12,16)32APSK suitable for each amplifier are used, that is, (4,12,16) suitable for each channel. If two ring ratios (radius ratios) of 32APSK (r ₁ , r ₂ ) are set, the terminal can obtain high data reception quality in each channel. Then, the transmitting station of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 performs such a setting by the control signal A100.

Therefore, the control information such as TMCC included in each modulated signal (each channel) includes information about two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4,12,16)32APSK. Will be included. (This point is as described in the other embodiments.)

Therefore, when the (terrestrial) transmitting station of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 uses (4,12,16)32APSK as the modulation method of the data symbol of modulated signal #1, it uses (4,12,16)32APSK at that time. Information of two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of 12,16)32APSK is transmitted as a part of the control information.

Similarly, the (terrestrial) transmitting station of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 uses (4,12,16)32APSK when the modulation method of the data symbol of modulated signal #2 is (4,12,16)32APSK. , 12, 16) 32APSK two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) are transmitted as part of the control information.
...

Similarly, when the (terrestrial) transmitting station of FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 uses (4,12,16)32APSK as the modulation method of the data symbol of modulated signal #N, it uses (4 , 12, 16) 32APSK two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) are transmitted as part of the control information.

In addition, the coding rate of the error correction code used in the modulated signal #1, the coding rate of the error correction code used in the modulated signal #2,..., The coding rate of the error correction code used in the modulated signal #N. May be the same.

<Receiver>
A receiving device corresponding to the transmitting method of the present embodiment will be described.

The receiving device A200 (of the terminal) of FIG. 40 receives at the antenna A201 a radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station of FIGS. 41 and 42 and relayed by the satellite (relay station) of the signal transmitted by the transmitting station. The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received wireless signal and outputs a baseband signal.

The demodulation unit A204 performs processing such as processing of a root roll-off filter and outputs the filtered baseband signal.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, a “synchronization symbol group” and a “pilot symbol group” transmitted by the transmission device. , Outputs the estimated signal.

The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", performs demodulation/decoding, and outputs a control signal. It is to be noted that what is important in the present embodiment is that the receiving apparatus A200 demodulates/decodes the symbols transmitting the information of the “TMCC information symbol group”. Then, the receiving device A10 generates information that specifies the information of the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate, the modulation scheme, and the ring ratio for each channel from the decoded value, and the control information is generated as a part of the control signal. The estimation unit A216 outputs.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as input, and based on the control signal, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the “slot composed of the data symbol group”. And a ring ratio, and based on this judgment, a log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of each bit included in the data symbol is calculated from the filtered baseband signal and the estimated signal and output. (However, instead of the soft decision value such as LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of the LLR may be output.)

The deinterleaving unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal as input, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (data rearrangement) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. To do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method (code length, coding rate, etc.) used, and based on this judgment, performs error correction decoding. To obtain estimated information bits. When the error correction code used is an LDPC code, the decoding method is reliability propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, Layered BP decoding. Will be used. The above is the operation when the iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs the iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may be used.

It should be noted that the method of generating the information on the ring ratio included in the control information is not limited to the embodiment described before the present embodiment, and any information related to the ring ratio may be transmitted. ..

(Embodiment F)
In this embodiment, a ring ratio (for example, two ring ratios (radius ratio) of (4,12,16)32APSK)
) Is signaled to the terminal (control information transmission method).

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, two ring ratios (radius ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK) has been defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio is another name. You may call it a "radius ratio."

Such signaling can be performed using the bits included in the “TMCC information symbol group” described in this specification.

In the present embodiment, an example of a method of configuring the "TMCC information symbol group" will be described based on "the transmission system standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version for advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting".

In order for the transmitting station to notify the terminal of the information about the ring ratio via the satellite (repeater), the use of 3614 bits of "extended information" in the "TMCC information symbol group" described in FIG. 18 is involved. Can also be considered. (This point is also described in “Advanced Broadband Satellite Digital Broadcasting Transmission System Standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 Edition”.) This is shown in FIG. 47.

The extension information of FIG. 47 is a field used for future TMCC information extension, and is composed of a 16-bit extension identification and a 3598-bit extension area. When “method A” is adopted in the “extension information” of TMCC in FIG. 47, all extension identifications are “0” (all 16 bits are zero), and all 3598 bits in the extension area are “1”. ..

Further, when the "method B" is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and the extension identifications are all values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000". Note that which of the methods A and B is to be adopted is determined by, for example, user setting.

“Method A” is a transmission method (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) in which the ring ratio is determined when the coding rate of the error correction code is set to a certain value. (When the coding rate of the error correction code to be used is determined, the ring ratio is uniquely determined.)

The “method B” is a transmission method (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) in which the ring ratio to be used can be selected from a plurality of ring ratios when the coding rate of the error correction code is set to a certain value.

An example of signaling performed by the transmitting station will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63, but the following bits are used for signaling in common with all the examples.
d ₀ : Indicates a satellite broadcasting system.
c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ (c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ ): Shows a table.
b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ : Indicates the coding rate (the ring ratio may also be indicated).
x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ (x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ ): ring ratio.
y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ): shows the difference in ring ratio.
Details of the above bits will be described later.

The “coding rate” described in FIGS. 59 to 63 is the coding rate of the error correction code, and specifically, 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 109/120. However, when these values are approximately expressed, 41/120≈1/3, 49/120≈2/5, 61/120≈1/2, 109/120≈9/10. Becomes

Hereinafter, <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described.

In the extension information of FIG. 47, when all the extension identifications are "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all 3598 bits in the extension area are "1", the above-mentioned "method A" is selected.

First, a case where the transmission device (transmission station) transmits a modulated signal using the “scheme A” will be described.

When the transmitter (transmitting station) selects (4,12,16)32APSK as the modulation method, the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK is as follows. Become.

Therefore, by setting all extension identifications of TMCC to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all 3598 bits of extension area of TMCC to "1" (the transmitting device transmits these values), It is possible for the receiving device to determine that the “method A” is selected, and the information on the coding rate of the error correction code being used is transmitted as part of the TMCC. From this information, the receiving device can determine the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when using (4,12,16)32APSK as the modulation method.

Specifically, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b ₃ described above are used. The relationship between b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the coding rate of the error correction code is as follows.

As shown in Table 19, when the transmission device (transmission station) uses 41/120 as the coding rate of the error correction code, it sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000). Further, when 49/120 is used as the coding rate of the error correction code, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set, and the coding rate of the error correction code is 109/120. When 120 is used, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) will be set. Then, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , and b ₃ are transmitted as a part of TMCC.

Therefore, the following table can be created.

As you can see from Table 20,
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 3.09 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 6.53.

When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 49/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.97 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 7.17.

When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0010), the coding rate of the error correction code is 61/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 3.93 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 8.03.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0011), the coding rate of the error correction code is 73/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.87 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.61.

When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0100), the coding rate of the error correction code is 81/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.92 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.68.

When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0101), the coding rate of the error correction code is 89/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.97 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.57.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0110), the coding rate of the error correction code is 97/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In that case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.73, and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.05.

When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0111), the coding rate of the error correction code is 101/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.67 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 4.80.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 105/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.76 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 4.82.

When the transmission device (transmission station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 109/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. In this case, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.69 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 4.66.

Therefore, the transmission device (transmission station)
Set all TMCC extension identifications to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and set all 3598 bits in the TMCC extension area to "1" to notify that "method A" is used. ..
-In order to make it possible to estimate the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ is transmitted.
Will be carried out.

Next, a case where the transmission device (of the transmission station) transmits data using the “scheme B” will be described.

As described above, when the “method B” is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and the extension identifications are all values other than “0”, that is, values other than “0000000000000000”. .. Here, as an example, when "0000000000000001" is transmitted as the extended identification, it is assumed that the transmission device (of the transmission station) transmits the data using the "scheme B".

In addition, 16 bits of the extended identification are set to d ₁₅ , d ₁₄ , d ₁₃ , d ₁₂ , d ₁₁ , d ₁₀ , d ₉ , d ₈ , d ₇ , d ₆ , d ₅ , d ₄ , d ₃ , d ₂ , When represented by d ₁ and d ₀ , when the “method B” is adopted, (d ₁₅ , d ₁₄ , d ₁₃ , d ₁₂ , d ₁₁ , d ₁₀ , d ₉ , d ₈ , d ₇ , d _{6 d 5, d 4, d 3} , d 2, d 1, d 0) = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, It will be set as 1). (Note that, as described above, in the case of adopting “method B”, (d ₁₅ , d ₁₄ , d ₁₃ , d ₁₂ , d ₁₁ , d ₁₀ , d ₉ , d ₈ , d ₇ , d ₆ , d ₅ , _{d 4, d 3, d 2} , d 1, d 0) and (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) except Since the value of (d ₁₅ , d ₁₄ , d ₁₃ ,d ₁₂ , d ₁₁ ,d ₁₀ ,d ₉ ,d ₈ ,d ₇ ,d ₆ ,d ₅ ,d ₄ ,d ₃ ,d ₂ ,d ₁ ,d ₀ )=(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1) .)

Then, as specific examples, <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described below.

<Example 1>
In the example 1, in “method B”, a plurality of types of tables of two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK are prepared, so that different ring ratios are obtained for one coding rate. It can be set.

As an example, "satellite broadcasting system is "system B", coding rate is 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21" The case of setting will be described. (However, it is assumed that (4,12,16)32APSK is selected as the modulation method.)

As shown in FIG. 59, a table 1, a table 2,..., A table 16, that is, 16 types of tables, that is, a table 1 to a table 16 are prepared.

In each table, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) described above, the coding rate of the error correction code, the ring ratio r ₁ and the ring ratio r _{2 of} (4,12,16)32APSK are related. Has been.

For example, in Table 1, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.09, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6. When it is set to 58, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 2.97, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.17. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. ... The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 109/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 2.69, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 4.66.
In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

In Table 2, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.50, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.20, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.15. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. ... The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 109/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.22. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.
...

In Table 16, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.80, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.33. In that case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.50, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.28. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. ... The coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.20, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.33. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

Although not described above in Tables 1 to 16, the coding rates of the error correction code are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/. For each of 120, 101/120, 105/120, and 109/120, the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b _{3 and} the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK are associated. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When selecting table 1 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, ₀ , ₀ , 0), when selecting table 2 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c) ₃ )=(0,0,0,1),..., When selecting the table 16 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=( ₁ , ₁ , ₁ , ₁ ) Set.

Next, as an example, “satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, coding rate is 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50, and ring ratio r ₂ is 7. 21” will be described.

First, as described above, since “method B” is selected, d ₀ =“1” is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the first row of Table 2, the coding rate 41/120 and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK are 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. Therefore, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”.

Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” is used to indicate the table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1 to 16.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol to “the satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the coding rate is 41/120, and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.50, When transmitting the ring ratio r ₂ at 7.21, the control information is d ₀ =“1”, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001”. (A part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (4, 12, 16) 32 APSK.

That is, in <Example 1>,
-For error correction code coding rates 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/120, 101/120, 105/120, 109/120 respectively , B ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ values, and a plurality of tables in which the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is associated.
-The transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ indicating the information of the used table.
By doing so, the transmitting device transmits information of two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK used to generate the data symbols.

The method of setting the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “scheme A” is as described before the description of <Example 1>.

<Example 2>
Example 2 is a modification of <Example 1>.

Here, a case where the transmission device (transmission station) selects the “method B” will be described. At this time, the transmission device (transmission station) will select the “method B”, so that d ₀ =“1” is set as shown in FIG.

Then, the transmitting device (transmitting station) newly sets z ₀ . When the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is determined by the same method as in “method A”, z ₀ =0 is set. When z ₀ =0 is set, the coding rate of the error correction code is specified based on Table 19 by b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b ₃ , and from Table 18, (4,12,16)32APSK The two ring ratios (radius ratios) are determined. (See Table 20)
When determining the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK in the same manner as in Example 1, set z ₀ =1. At this time, based on Table 18, the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK are not determined, but the (4,12,16)32APSK 2 Determine the two ring ratios (radius ratios).

As an example, "satellite broadcasting system is "system B", coding rate is 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21" The case of setting will be described. (However, it is assumed that (4,12,16)32APSK is selected as the modulation method. Further, z ₀ =1.)

As shown in FIG. 60, a table 1, a table 2,..., A table 16 are prepared, that is, 16 types of tables 1 to 16 are prepared.

In each table, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) described above, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK are related. ing.

For example, in Table 1, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.09, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6. When it is set to 58, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 2.97, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.17. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. ... the coding rate of error correction code to generate data symbols 109/120, and (4,12,16) Ring ratio r ₁ to 2.69 32APSK, a ring ratio r ₂ 4.66 In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

In Table 2, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.50, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. In that case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 49/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.20, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.15. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. ... The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbols is 109/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.22. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.
...

In Table 16, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating the data symbol is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.80, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.33. In that case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.50, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.28. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. ... The coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.20, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.33. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

Although not described above in Tables 1 to 16, the coding rates of the error correction code are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/. For each of 120, 101/120, 105/120, and 109/120, the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b _{3 and} the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK are associated. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When selecting table 1 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, ₀ , ₀ , 0), when selecting table 2 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c) ₃ )=(0,0,0,1),..., When selecting the table 16 (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=( ₁ , ₁ , ₁ , ₁ ) Set.

Next, as an example, “satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, coding rate is 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50, and ring ratio r ₂ is 7. 21” will be described.

First, as described above, since “method B” is selected, d ₀ =“1” is set. Further, z ₀ =1 is set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60, the first row of table 2 has coding rates 41/120 and (4,12,1).
6) Since the ring ratio r _{1 of} 32APSK is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”.

Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” is used to indicate the table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1 to 16.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol to “the satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the coding rate is 41/120, and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.50, When transmitting the ring ratio r ₂ at 7.21”, d ₀ =“1”, z ₀ =1, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001”. Control information (a part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (4, 12, 16) 32 APSK.

The method for setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “method A” will be described before the description of <Example 1>. As I did.

<Example 3>
Example 3 is characterized in that signaling is performed by a value indicating the ring ratio.

First, as in <Example 1> and <Example 2>, since the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by the “method B”, d ₀ =“1” is set.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61, the value of x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ is associated with the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK to obtain x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ The value of x ₁₀ x ₁₁ is associated with the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, the transmitting device (transmitting station) is (x ₀ , x ₁ , x ₂ , x ₃ , x ₄ , x ₅ )=(0,0,0,0,0,0) Then, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to 2.00, and (x ₀ , x ₁ , x ₂ , x ₃ , x ₄ , x ₅ )=(1, 1,1,1,1,1,1), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to 4.00.

Further, the transmission device (transmission station) is (4, 12, 0, 0, 0, 0) when (x ₆ , x ₇ , x ₈ , x ₉ , x ₁₀ , x ₁₁ ) = (4, 12, 16) The ring ratio r _{2 of} 32APSK is set to 3.00,..., (x ₆ , x ₇ , x ₈ , x ₉ , x ₁₀ , x ₁₁ )=(1,1,1,1,1 , 1), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to 7.00.

As an example, about the method of setting "satellite broadcasting system "system B", (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ to 2.00 and 4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₂ to 7.00" explain.

In this case, the _{"x 0 x 1 x 2 x 3} x 4 values and (4,12,16) of the x ₅ 32APSK relationship ring ratio r _1" in FIG. 61, the transmission apparatus (transmission station), x ₀ Set x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ = "000000".

In addition, from the “relationship between the value of x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK”, the transmission device (transmission station) is x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ Set as x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ = "111111".

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses the data symbols as “the satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 2.00, and the ring of (4,12,16)32APSK is When transmitting the ratio r ₂ at 7.00”, d ₀ =“1”, x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000”, x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ =“111111 Control information (a part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (4, 12, 16) 32 APSK.

The method for setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “method A” will be described before the description of <Example 1>. As I did.

<Example 4>
Example 4 is a difference between the ring ratio r ₁ and b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ indicating the coding rate of the error correction code in the main table and the ring ratio (radius ratio) of 2 of (4,12,16)32APSK. The ring ratio r of the desired (4,12,16)32APSK is given by y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ and the ring ratio r ₂ of y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y _{11. It} realizes signaling of ₁ and r ₂ .

One of the important points in Example 4 is that the main table shown in FIG. 62 is the table in Table 20, that is, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the error correction code in the case of “method A”. The coding rate, the ring ratio r ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ are included.

In the following, further characteristic points of Example 4 will be described.

FIG. 62 shows a difference table for the ring ratio r ₁ and a difference table for the ring ratio r ₂ . The difference table is a table for difference information from the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio set using the main table.

It is assumed that the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₁ based on the main table.
Then, it becomes as follows.

...
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011110) is set by the transmission device (transmission station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ +0.4. Shall be set.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ +0.2. Shall be set.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100000) is set by the transmission device (transmission station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₁ +1. I shall.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ −0.2. Shall be set.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ −0.4. Shall be set.
...

Further, it is assumed that the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₂ based on the main table.
Then, it becomes as follows.

...
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011110) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ +0.4. Shall be set.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011111) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ +0.2. Shall be set.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100000) is set by the transmission device (transmission station), (4
The ring ratio r _{2 of (} 12,16,32)32APSK is set to h ₂ +0.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100001) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ −0.2. Shall be set.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100010) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ −0.4. Shall be set.
...

Therefore, the transmitter corrects the value h ₁ of the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined by the main table by determining (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ). The value f ₁ is determined and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₁ +f ₁ .

Then, the transmitter corrects the value (h ₂ ) of the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined by the main table by determining (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ). The value f ₂ is determined and the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₂ +f ₂ .

As an example, regarding the method of setting "satellite broadcasting system "system B", coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ 3.49, ring ratio r ₂ 6.73" explain.

First, the transmitting apparatus selects “method B”, and therefore sets d ₀ =“1”.

Then, in order to select the coding rate 41/120 from the main table of FIG. 62, the transmitting device sets b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”.

The ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK corresponding to the value b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000” in the main table is 3.09, so the difference from the ring ratio 3.49 you want to set is 3.49-3.09. =+0.40.

Therefore, the transmission device sets y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“011110” indicating “+0.40” in the difference table.

The ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK corresponding to the value b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000” in the main table is 6.53, so the difference from the desired ring ratio 6.73 is 6.73. It becomes -6.53=+0.20.

Therefore, the transmission device sets y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ =“011111” indicating “+0.20” in the difference table.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses the data symbol “satellite broadcasting system “system B”, coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49, and ring ratio. When r ₂ is transmitted at 6.73”, d ₀ =“1”, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“011110”, y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ control information (a part of TMCC information) that is “011111” is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (4, 12, 16) 32 APSK.

This example 4 is suitable when part of the specifications of the “method A” is also used in the “method B” because the part of the main table of the “method A” is used even in the case of the “method B”. ing.

The method for setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “method A” will be described before the description of <Example 1>. As I did.

Although one difference table is prepared for the ring ratio r ₁ in FIG. 62, a plurality of difference tables may be prepared for the ring ratio r ₁ . For example, the difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared for the ring ratio r ₁ . Then, similarly to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting apparatus sets c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , and sets d ₀ , b _0. In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ and y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ is transmitted as part of control information together with data symbols.

Also, from the value of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y _{5 in} the difference table to be used, correction was made from the value h ₁ of the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined using the main table. The value f ₁ will be obtained.

Similarly, in FIG. 62, although prepared one difference table for the ring ratio r _2, may prepare a plurality of difference table for the ring ratio r _2. For example, the difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared for the ring ratio r ₂ . Then, similarly to FIGS. 59 and 60, the difference table to be used can be selected from c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ corresponding to c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting apparatus sets c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ , and sets d ₀ , b ₀ the _{b 1 b 2 b 3, y} 6 y 7 y 8 y 9 y 10 y c 4 c 5 c 6 c 7 in addition to ₁₁ as part of the control information transmitted together with the data symbols.

Also, from the value of y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y _{11 in} the difference table to be used, correction was made from the value h ₂ of the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined using the main table. The value f ₂ will be obtained.

In addition, when a plurality of difference tables for the ring ratio r ₁ and a plurality of difference tables for the ring ratio r ₂ are prepared, the transmitting device uses d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀
In addition to y ₁₁ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ and c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ will be transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

<Example 5>
Example 5 is the difference between the ring rate r ₁ and b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ showing the coding rate of the error correction code and the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK in the main table. Indicates y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃
y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ showing the difference between y ₄ y ₅ and ring ratio r ₂ realizes desired signaling of ring ratios r ₁ and r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK Is.

One of the important points in Example 5 is that the main table shown in FIG. 63 is the table of Table 20, that is, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the error correction code in the case of “method A”. The coding rate and the ring ratio are related to each other.

In the following, further characteristic points of Example 5 will be described.

FIG. 63 shows a difference table (multiplication coefficient table). The difference table is a table for difference information from the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio set using the main table. It is assumed that the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₁ based on the main table.

Then, it becomes as follows.
...
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011110) is set by the transmission device (transmission station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×1.2. Shall be set.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×1.1. Shall be set.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100000) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×1.0. Shall be set.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×0.9. Shall be set.
When (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×0.8. Shall be set.
...

Then, based on the main table, for example, the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₂ .
Then, it becomes as follows.
...
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011110) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×1.2. Shall be set.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011111) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×1.1. Shall be set.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100000) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×1.0. Shall be set.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100001) is set by the transmission device (transmission station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×0.9. Shall be set.
When (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100010) is set by the transmitting device (transmitting station), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×0.8. Shall be set.
...

Therefore, the transmitter corrects the value h ₁ of the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined by the main table by determining (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ). The coefficient g ₁ is determined, and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₁ ×g ₁ .

Then, the transmitter corrects the value (h ₂ ) of the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined by the main table by determining (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ). The coefficient g ₂ is determined, and the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₂ ×g ₂ .

As an example, the method of setting "satellite broadcasting system "system B", coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ to 2.78 and ring ratio r ₂ to 7.183" explain.

First, the transmitting apparatus selects “method B”, and therefore sets d ₀ =“1”.

Then, in order to select the coding rate 41/120 from the main table of FIG. 63, the transmitting device sets b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”.

The ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK corresponding to the value b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000” in the main table is 3.09, so the difference shown in the form of multiplication with the ring ratio 2.78 you want to set. Is 2.78/3.09=0.9.

Therefore, the transmission device sets y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“100001” indicating “×0.9” in the difference table.

Also, in the main table, the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK corresponding to the value b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000” is 6.53, so in the form of multiplication with the desired ring ratio 7.183. The difference shown is 7.183/6.53=1.1.

Therefore, the transmission device sets y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ =“011111” indicating “×1.1” in the difference table.

Therefore, the transmission device (transmission station) uses data symbols as “satellite broadcasting system “system B”, coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78, and ring ratio When transmitting r ₂ at 7.183”, d ₀ =“1”, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“100001”, y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ control information (a part of the TMCC information) that is “011111” is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the data symbol modulation scheme is (4, 12, 16) 32 APSK.

This example 5 is suitable when a part of the specifications of the “method A” is also used in the “method B” because a part of the main table of the “method A” is used even in the case of the “method B”. ing.

The method for setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmission device (transmission station) uses the “method A” will be described before the description of <Example 1>. As I did.

Although one difference table is prepared for the ring ratio r ₁ in FIG. 63, a plurality of difference tables may be prepared for the ring ratio r ₁ . For example, the difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared for the ring ratio r ₁ . Then, similarly to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting apparatus sets c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , and sets d ₀ , b _0. In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ and y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ is transmitted as part of control information together with data symbols.

Also, from the value of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y _{5 in} the difference table to be used, correction was made from the value h ₁ of the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined using the main table. The value g ₁ will be obtained.

Similarly, in FIG. 63, although prepared one difference table for the ring ratio r _2, may prepare a plurality of difference table for the ring ratio r _2. For example, the difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared for the ring ratio r ₂ . Then, similarly to FIGS. 59 and 60, the difference table to be used can be selected from c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ corresponding to c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting apparatus sets c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ , and sets d ₀ , b ₀ the _{b 1 b 2 b 3, y} 6 y 7 y 8 y 9 y 10 y c 4 c 5 c 6 c 7 in addition to ₁₁ as part of the control information transmitted together with the data symbols.

Also, from the value of y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y _{11 in} the difference table to be used, the correction was made from the value h ₂ of the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined using the main table. The value g ₂ will be obtained.

In addition, when a plurality of difference tables for the ring ratio r ₁ and a plurality of difference tables for the ring ratio r ₂ are prepared, the transmitting device uses d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀
In addition to y ₁₁ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ and c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ will be transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

<Receiver>
Regarding the receiving apparatus corresponding to the transmission method of the present embodiment, the configuration common to <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described, and then specific processing of each example will be described.

The terrestrial receiving device (terminal) A200 in FIG. 40 receives at the antenna A201 the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station in FIG. 39 and relayed by the satellite (relay station). The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received wireless signal and outputs a baseband signal.

The demodulation unit A204 performs processing such as processing of a root roll-off filter and outputs the filtered baseband signal.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, the “synchronization symbol group” and the “pilot symbol group” transmitted by the transmission device. , Outputs the estimated signal.

The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", performs demodulation/decoding, and outputs a control signal.

Note that what is important in the present embodiment is that the control information estimation unit A216 estimates the control information included in the “TMCC information symbol group” and outputs it as a control signal. , D ₀ , z ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y _{4 described above.} y _5, c is that ₄ contains information _{c 5 c 6 c 7, x} 6 x 7 x 8 x 9 x 10 x 11, y 6 y 7 y 8 y 9 y 10 y 11.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as input, and based on the control signal, the modulation method (or transmission method) used by the "slot composed of the data symbol group". And a ring ratio, and based on this judgment, a log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of each bit included in the data symbol is calculated from the filtered baseband signal and the estimated signal and output. (However, instead of the soft decision value such as LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of the LLR may be output.)

The deinterleave unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal as input, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (data rearrangement) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting device, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. To do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method (code length, coding rate, etc.) used, and based on this judgment, performs error correction decoding. To obtain estimated information bits. When the error correction code used is an LDPC code, the decoding method is reliability propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, Layered BP decoding. Will be used. The above is the operation when the iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs the iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may be used.

Such a receiving device holds a table similar to the tables shown in <Example 1> to <Example 5> described above, and the procedure reverse to <Example 1> to <Example 5> is performed. By doing so, the satellite broadcasting system, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are estimated, and the demodulation/decoding operation is performed. Hereinafter, each example will be described separately.

Note that the following description will be given on the assumption that the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device has determined from the TMCC information that the data symbol modulation scheme is the (12,4)16APSK symbol.

<<Receiving Device Corresponding to Example 1>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, the control information estimation unit A 216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by the “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbol is a symbol of (4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio )(R ₁ , r ₂ ) will be estimated. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 64, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device, from d ₀ =“1” to “method B”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” and b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ From "0000", the coding rate 41/120 of the first row of Table 2 and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK are 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. presume. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 2>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, the control information estimation unit A 216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by the “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbol is a symbol of (4,12,16)32APSK, the two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio ) (R ₁ , r ₂ ) will be estimated. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 65, when the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device obtains d ₀ =“1” and z ₀ =0, “the ring ratio is set in the same manner as in method A”. Judgment is made to obtain b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b _3, and the coding rate of the error correction code and two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK (r ₁ , r ₂ ) Estimate. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving device uses d ₀ =“1”, z ₀ =1 to “method B”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001” and b. _{From 0} b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = “0000”, the coding rate 41/120 of the first row of the table 2 and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK are 3.5.
It is estimated that 0 and the ring ratio r ₂ are 7.21. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 3>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, the control information estimation unit A 216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by the “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbol is a symbol of (4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio )(R ₁ , r ₂ ) will be estimated. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 66, the control information estimation unit A 216 of the reception apparatus determines from d ₀ =“1” to “scheme B”, x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000” to (4,12). ,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is estimated to be 2.00, and x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ =“111111” is used to estimate (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₂ to be 7.00. .. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 4>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, the control information estimation unit A 216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by the “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbol is a symbol of (4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio )(R ₁ , r ₂ ) will be estimated. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 67, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a “scheme B” symbol from d ₀ =“1”. Further, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device estimates the difference as +0.4 from y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“011110”. Further, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK before considering the difference is 3.09 and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/ It is estimated to be 120. Then, by adding both, it is estimated that the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.49 from 3.09+0.4=3.49. Then, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus estimates a _{y 6 y 7 y 8 y 9} y 10 y 11 = +0.2 difference from "011111". Also, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK before considering the difference is 6.53 and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/ It is estimated to be 120. Then, by adding both, 6.53+0.2=6.73, and the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is estimated to be 6.73. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

<<Reception Device Corresponding to Example 5>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method A":
When d ₀ =“0” is obtained, the control information estimation unit A 216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by the “scheme A”. Then, by obtaining the value of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbol is a symbol of ((4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius The ratio) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) is estimated, and the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on the estimated information.

-When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the modulated signal by "method B":
As shown in FIG. 68, the control information estimation unit A216 of the reception device determines that the data symbol is a “scheme B” symbol from d ₀ =“1”. Further, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus estimates a × 0.9 the difference based on _{y 0 y 1 y 2 y 3} y 4 y 5 = "100001". Further, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK before considering the difference is 3.09 and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/ It is estimated to be 120. Then, by multiplying both from 3.09 × 0.9 = 2.78 (the ring ratio r ₁ of the (4,12,16) 32APSK estimated as 2.78. Then, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiver, y ₆ y ₇ y _{Based on 8} y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ =“011111”, the difference is estimated to be ×1.1, and based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, the difference (4,12) ,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₂ is estimated to be 6.53 and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120. Then, both are multiplied and 6.53×1.1=7.183 is obtained (((4,12,16)32APSK The ring ratio r ₂ is estimated to be 7.183. Then, the demapping unit A206 demodulates the data symbol based on these estimated information.

(Embodiment G)
In this embodiment, a method of transmitting pilot symbols based on Embodiment F will be described.

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK) was defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio is referred to as “radius ratio” as another name. But it's okay.

<Example of pilot symbol>
In this embodiment, a configuration example of pilot symbols in the transmission scheme (data symbol modulation scheme is (4,12,16)32APSK) described in Embodiment F will be described.

The configuration of the transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

Due to the non-linearity of the power amplifier of the transmitter, intermodulation (intersymbol) interference occurs in the modulated signal. The receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing the intersymbol interference.

In this pilot symbol configuration example, in order to reduce inter-symbol (inter-symbol) interference in the receiving device, the transmitting device transmits the pilot symbol using the modulation method and ring ratio used in the data symbols. ..

Therefore, when the transmission apparatus (transmission station) determines the data symbol modulation scheme and the ring ratio by any of the methods of <Example 1> to <Example 5> of the embodiment F, the pilot symbol also has the data symbol. The same modulation method and ring ratio will be used to generate and transmit pilot symbols.

Below, a concrete example is shown. However, the description will be continued on the assumption that (4,12,16)32APSK is selected as the modulation method.

In the case of <Example 1> of Embodiment F:
The transmission device (transmission station) uses data symbols as “satellite broadcasting system “system B”, coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio. When transmitting r ₂ at 7.21”, d ₀ =“1”, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001”. Then, based on “d ₀ =“1”, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001””, the transmission device (transmission station)
Sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to (4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ to 3.50, and the ring ratio r ₂ to 7.21, respectively.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [00000] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [00001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [00111],
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [01000] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10000] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10011] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10100] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10111] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmission device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r is ₁₎ . ₂ as L ₂ ) and the transmitting device (transmitting station)


(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] Band signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [10110] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] of the ring ratio r ₁ of L ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] Band signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 2> of Embodiment F:
The transmission device (transmission station) uses data symbols as “satellite broadcasting system “system B”, coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio. When transmitting r ₂ at 7.21”, d ₀ =“1”, z ₀ =1, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =“0001”. The control information (a part of the TMCC information) to be transmitted is transmitted together with the data symbol. Then, based on "d ₀ ="1", z ₀ =1, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001"", the transmission device (transmission station) Sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to (4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ to 3.50, and the ring ratio r ₂ to 7.21, respectively.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [00000] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [00001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [00111] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [01000] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10000] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10011] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10100] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [10111] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, signal points corresponding to the value of the ring ratio r ₁ 3.50, of the ring ratio _{r 2 7.21 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=
Signal point (baseband signal) symbol corresponding to [11100],
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21. (Baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may perform estimation of the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmission device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r is ₁₎ . ₂ as L ₂ ) and the transmitting device (transmitting station)

(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] Band signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [10110] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] of the ring ratio r ₁ of L ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] Band signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 3> of Embodiment F:
The transmission device (transmission station) uses the data symbols as “method B for satellite broadcasting,” ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK to 2.00, and ring ratio r _{2 of} 4,12,16)32APSK. When sending at 7.00", d ₀ = "1", x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ = "000000", x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ = "111111" Control information (a part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. Then, based on “d ₀ =“1”, x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000”, x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ =“111111””, the transmitter ( The transmitter station sets the modulation method and ring ratio of the pilot symbol to (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] where the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] where the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00. (Baseband signal) symbol,
Signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] where the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] where the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
[4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [11001],
Signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] where the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
Signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of (4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00, ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] where the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] where the value of ring ratio r ₁ is 2.00 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.00 (Baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high data reception quality.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmission device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r is ₁₎ . ₂ as L ₂ ) and the transmitting device (transmitting station)

(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] Band signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [10110] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] of the ring ratio r ₁ of L ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] Band signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 4> of Embodiment F:
The transmission device (transmission station) uses the data symbols as “the satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the coding rate is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 3.49, and the ring ratio r _{2 is} Is transmitted at 6.73", d ₀ =“1”, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =“0000”, y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ =“011110”, y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ Control information (a part of TMCC information) that is “011111” is transmitted together with the data symbol. Then, "d ₀ ="1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="011110", y ₆
y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ =“011111””, the transmitter (transmitting station) sets the pilot symbol modulation method and ring ratio to (4,12,16)32APSK and ring ratio r _{1 respectively.} Is set to 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is set to 6.73.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of the ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of the ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of the ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,

A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] where the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11001] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 3.49, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 6.73. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, the value 3.49 of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio _{r 2 6.73 [b 4 b 3} b 2 b 1 b 0] = [11111] corresponding signal points (Baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may perform estimation of the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmission device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r is ₁₎ . ₂ as L ₂ ) and the transmitting device (transmitting station)

(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] Band signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [10110] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] of the ring ratio r ₁ of L ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] Band signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In the case of <Example 5> of the embodiment C:
The transmission device (transmission station) uses the data symbols as “the satellite broadcasting system is “system B”, the coding rate is 41/120, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is 2.78, and the ring ratio r _{2 is} Is sent at 7.183", d ₀ = "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ = "100001", y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ Control information (a part of TMCC information) that is “011111” is transmitted together with the data symbol. Then, "d ₀ = "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ = "0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ = "100001", y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ Based on y ₁₁ =“011111””, the transmitter (transmitting station) sets the pilot symbol modulation method/ring ratio to (4,12,16)32APSK/ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and ring ratio r, respectively. Set ₂ to 7.183.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station)
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of 2.78 for the ring ratio r _{1 and} 7.183 for the ring ratio r _2. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183 [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀
]=[10010] signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11001] where the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
A signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
The signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] of (4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is 2.78, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.183. (Baseband signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

By this means, the receiving apparatus can estimate intersymbol interference with high accuracy, and thus can obtain high reception quality of data.

Note that the pilot symbol is not only a symbol for estimating intersymbol interference, but the receiving device may estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitting device and the receiving device (channel estimation) using the pilot symbol. Alternatively, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmission device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to another value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r is ₁₎ . ₂ as L ₂ ) and the transmitting device (transmitting station)

(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] Band signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [10110] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] of the ring ratio r ₁ of L ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] Band signal) symbol,
Are transmitted as pilot symbols.

The operation of the receiving device will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 2, reference numeral 210 is the configuration of the receiving device. The demapping unit 214 of FIG. 2 performs demapping on the mapping of the modulation method used by the transmission device, for example, obtains and outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 2, in order to perform demapping with high accuracy, estimation of intersymbol interference, estimation of radio wave propagation environment between transmission device and reception device (channel estimation), It is recommended to estimate the time synchronization and frequency offset of.

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the receiving apparatus includes an inter-symbol interference estimating section, a channel estimating section, a time synchronizing section, and a frequency offset estimating section. These estimation units extract, for example, a pilot symbol portion from the received signal, estimate intersymbol interference, estimate radio wave propagation environment between the transmission device and the reception device (channel estimation), and transmit/receive between the transmitter and the receiver, respectively. Time synchronization and frequency offset estimation are performed. Then, the demapping unit 214 in FIG. 2 receives these estimated signals and performs demapping based on these estimated signals, thereby calculating, for example, the log likelihood ratio.

The information about the modulation scheme and the ring ratio used to generate the data symbol is transmitted using the control information such as TMCC, as described in Embodiment F. Since the modulation scheme/ring ratio used to generate the pilot symbols is the same as the modulation scheme/ring ratio used to generate the data symbols, therefore, the receiving apparatus uses the control information estimation unit. Thus, the modulation scheme/ring ratio is estimated from the control information, and the demapping unit 214 obtains this information, thereby estimating the channel distortion due to the pilot symbols and demapping the information symbols. It will be.

The method of transmitting pilot symbols is not limited to the above. For example,
The transmitting device (transmitting station), as a pilot symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] Band signal) symbol multiple times,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [10110] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] of the ring ratio r ₁ of L ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of L _2. Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] Band signal) symbol multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ value is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] Band signal) symbol multiple times,

You may send it.

At this time,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] Band signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [10110] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] of the ring ratio r ₁ of L ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) 32APSK, value L ₁ of the ring ratio r _1, the ring ratio r ₂ of the _{L 2 [b 4 b 3 b} 2 b 1 b 0] = [11001] corresponding signal points (base Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, ring ratio r ₁ value L ₁ , ring ratio r ₂ L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is the signal point (base) corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] of L _2. Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] Band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, the value of ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , and the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] Band signal) symbol,
If the number of times each symbol is transmitted is equal, there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can perform highly accurate channel distortion estimation.

In the above description, the frame configuration of FIG. 18 has been described, but the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of data symbols, and this data symbol is generated. Symbols for transmitting information about modulation schemes used in the above, error correction schemes (for example, error correction code used, code length of error correction code, coding rate of error correction code, etc.) When there is a symbol for transmitting the data, the data symbol, the symbol for transmitting the information about the modulation scheme, and the symbol for transmitting the information about the error correction scheme may be arranged in any frame. Further, symbols other than these symbols, for example, a preamble, a symbol for synchronization, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, etc. may be present in the frame.

(Embodiment AA)
In the present embodiment, a method of changing the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter described later will be described. In the present embodiment, a method of changing the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter will be described with respect to the transmission method based on the “advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting transmission method standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version”.

First, in describing the present embodiment, a frame configuration and a TMCC configuration will be described.

FIG. 11 shows the structure of one frame in the “advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting transmission method standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version”. In FIG. 11, “FSync” and “!FSync” indicate frame synchronization signals. “PSync” indicates a slot synchronization signal. “P” indicates a pilot symbol group, and “T” indicates a TMCC symbol group.

“Data” indicates a data symbol group (a symbol group for transmitting data), and the modulation method of the data symbol group is π/2 shift BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, (12,4)16APSK, (4, 12,16)32APSK.

As shown in FIG. 11, one frame is composed of 120 slots (modulation slot #1 to modulation slot #120). Each slot is composed of a (slot or frame) synchronization signal, a pilot signal, a TMCC symbol group, and a data symbol group. When the TMCC symbol group included in one frame is collected, it becomes 31680 bits. Next, the TMCC signal composed of 31680 bits will be described.

FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a TMCC signal composed of 31680 bits. The TMCC signal is composed of 9422-bit TMCC information, 192-bit BCH (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem) parity, and 22066-bit LDPC code parity. The parity is a parity generated by encoding the BCH and LDPC codes.

FIG. 70 shows the structure of 9422-bit TMCC information. As shown in FIG. 70, TMCC information includes “change instruction”, “transmission mode/slot information”, “stream identification/relative stream”, “packet format/relative stream”, “pointer/slot information”, “relative stream/slot information”, and It is composed of "relative stream/transmission stream ID correspondence table information", "transmission/reception control information", and "extended information". Each element will be briefly described below.

"Change instructions":
The change instruction shall be incremented by 1 each time the content of TMCC information is changed, and shall return to "00000000" if the pair becomes "11111111". However, only pointer/slot information is changed. In this case, the change instruction is not added.

"Transmission mode/slot information":
The transmission mode/slot information indicates the modulation method of the transmission main signal, the coding rate of error correction inner coding, the satellite output backoff, and the number of allocated slots.

"Stream identification/relative stream":
The stream type/relative stream information is an area indicating the correspondence between the relative stream number and the stream type, and indicates the packet stream type for each relative stream number assigned to each slot indicated in the item of the relative stream/slot information.

"Packet format/relative stream":
The packet format/relative stream information indicates the correspondence between the relative stream number and the packet format, and indicates the packet format for each relative stream number assigned to each slot in the relative stream/slot information.

"Pointer/slot information":
The pointer/slot information indicates the start position of the first packet and the end position of the last packet included in each slot.

"Relative stream/slot information":
The relative stream/slot information indicates the correspondence between the slot and the relative stream number, and indicates the relative stream number transmitted in each slot in order from slot 1.

"Relative stream/Transmission stream ID correspondence table information":
The relative stream/transmission stream ID correspondence table shows the correspondence relationship between the relative stream number used in the relative stream/slot information and the transmission stream ID.

"Transmission/reception control information":
The transmission/reception control information transmits a signal for receiver activation control in emergency alert broadcasting and uplink control information.

"Extended information":
The extension information is a field used for future TMCC information extension. At the time of TMCC information extension, the extension identification is set to a value other than “0000000000000000” which is defined in advance, and the field following the extension identification is valid. When the extension identification is “0000000000000000”, the extension field is stuffed with “1”.

Next, a method of changing the roll-off rate will be described.

First, the configuration of the system will be described.
As described in Embodiments B and E, consider a system including a transmitting station (ground station), a satellite (repeater), and a terminal.

The configuration of the terrestrial transmitter station that transmits the transmission signal to the satellite is as shown in FIGS. The configuration of a satellite (repeater) that receives a signal transmitted by a terrestrial transmitting station and transmits a received signal to a terrestrial receiving terminal is as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46. Note that the detailed description of these configurations has been given in Embodiment B and Embodiment E, so description thereof will be omitted here.

The feature of this embodiment is that "the roll-off rate is changed". Therefore, the characteristic part will be described below.

FIG. 71 shows a detailed configuration of a channel #X (X is an integer of 1 or more and N or less) portion in a terrestrial transmission station (ground station) that transmits a transmission signal to the satellites of FIGS. 41 to 43.

In FIG. 71, a transmission data generation unit AA000 receives video data, audio data, and a control signal AA004 as input, performs BCH encoding and LDPC encoding block processing based on the control signal AA004, and outputs transmission data AA001. To do.

Data symbol generation section AA002 receives transmission data AA001 and control signal AA004, performs modulation scheme mapping based on control signal AA004, and outputs data symbol signal AA003.

Pilot symbol generator AA005 receives control signal AA004 as input, generates a pilot symbol of a modulation scheme based on control signal AA004, and outputs pilot symbol signal AA006.

The TMCC signal generator AA007 receives the control signal AA004, generates the TMCC symbol based on the control signal AA004 as described above, and outputs the TMCC symbol signal AA008.

The switching unit AA009 receives the data symbol signal AA003, the pilot symbol signal AA006, the TMCC symbol signal AA008, and the control signal AA004 as input, and based on the information about the frame configuration included in the control signal AA004, the data symbol signal AA003 and the pilot. The symbol signal AA006 and the TMCC symbol signal AA008 are selected and a modulated signal AA010 is output.

The band limiting filter AA0011 receives the modulated signal AA0010 and the control signal AA0004, sets a roll-off rate based on the control signal AA0004, performs band limiting of the set roll-off rate, and outputs the band-limited modulated signal AA012. Output. Note that the modulated signal AA012 after band limitation corresponds to the modulated signal #X (X is an integer of 1 or more and N or less) in FIGS. 41 to 43.

At this time, the frequency characteristic of the band limiting filter that performs band limiting is represented by the following equation.

In the above equation, F is the center frequency of the carrier wave, F _n is the Nyquist frequency, and α is the roll-off rate (or may be called roll-off coefficient, root roll-off rate, or root roll-off coefficient).

FIG. 72 shows an example of frame changes in this embodiment, and the horizontal axis represents time. In FIG. 72, AA 101 is frame #MZ, which is the MZth frame. The AA 102 is the frame #M-3, which is the M-3rd frame.
The AA 103 is the frame #M-2, which is the (M-2)th frame. The AA 104 is the frame #M-1, which is the (M-1)th frame. AA 105 is frame #M, which is the Mth frame. The AA 106 is the frame #M+1, which is the (M+1)th frame. It should be noted that each frame is composed of the frames shown in FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72, the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α of the band limiting filter of the frame before time U is 0.10, and the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter of the frame after time V is The (roll-off coefficient) α is assumed to be 0.05, and in the present embodiment, the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) is assumed to be a switchable system.

The baud rate (symbol rate (symbol transmission rate)) when the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.10 is p, and the baud rate when the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.05 ( When the symbol rate (symbol transmission rate) is q, p<q may be established from the viewpoint of effective utilization of the frequency band (p=q may be used, but the effective utilization of the frequency band is is not.).

Here, as an example, the case where the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.10 and the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.05 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. When the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is A ₁ , the baud rate (symbol rate (symbol transmission rate)) is p ₁ , and when the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is A ₂ , the baud rate (symbol is rate when the) (transmission speed symbols) was p _2, a ₁ <A ₂ Gaseiritsushitatoki,shuhasutaiikinoyukonakatsuyonotenkara,p _1> may p ₂ is established (p ₁ = p ₂ However, it is not an effective use of the frequency band).

FIG. 72 shows an example in which the roll-off rate is switched from 0.10 to 0.05, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the roll-off rate may be switched from 0.05 to 0.10. The roll-off rate may be switched from A ₁ to A ₂ , or the roll-off rate may be switched from A ₂ to A ₁ . Further, the roll-off rate is not limited to switching between two types of values, but may be switched among three or more types of values. However, the baud rate (symbol when baud (symbol rate (transmission rate of symbols)) of p _x, roll-off rate (rolloff factor) alpha is A _y when the roll-off rate (rolloff factor) alpha is A _x rate when the) (transmission speed symbols) was p _y, a _x <A _y Gaseiritsushitatoki,shuhasutaiikinoyukonakatsuyonotenkara,p _x> p _y may is established (p _x = p _y However, it is not an effective use of the frequency band).

FIG. 73 shows how the roll-off rate α changes from 0.10 to 0.05 in FIG. 72 on the time axis. Frame #M-1 (AA104) is composed of symbols with a roll-off rate of 0.10, frame #M (AA105) is composed of symbols with a roll-off rate of 0.05, and time U is frame #M. -1 is the time when the transmission is completed, and time V is the time when the transmission of the frame #M is started.

Then, FIG. 73 shows an example of a specific state at time U and time V. The ramp down AA 201 is a section for gradually reducing the signal level. The guard section AA202 is a section in which the signal level is zero, and the in-phase component I=0 (zero) of the baseband signal and the quadrature component Q=0 (zero) of the baseband signal. The ramp-up AA 203 is a section for gradually increasing the signal level. By doing this, it is possible to reduce spurious out of the band.

FIG. 74 shows a state of change on the time axis when the roll-off rate α is switched from 0.10 to 0.05, which is different from FIG. 73.

In FIG. 74, a ramp down AA 201 is a section for gradually reducing the signal level. The guard section AA202 is a section in which the signal level is zero, and the in-phase component I=0 (zero) of the baseband signal and the quadrature component Q=0 (zero) of the baseband signal. By doing this, it is possible to reduce spurious out of the band.

As described above, the baud rate (symbol rate (symbol transmission rate)) may differ for each roll-off rate. (Alternatively, the symbol rate may change as the roll-off rate changes.)

Therefore, when the transmitting station (ground station) switches the roll-off rate, the baud rate and the filter coefficient of the band limiting filter (for example, when a digital filter is used) are switched. If the transmitting station does not notify the switching timing to the (terrestrial) terminal, the terminal needs to estimate the baud rate/bandwidth limiting filter being used, which may take some time. Is high. (It is very difficult to continue receiving without switching the filter coefficient of the baud rate and the band limiting filter (for example, when a digital filter is used).)

As a result, when the transmitting station (ground station) switches the roll-off rate, the (ground) terminal takes a long time to make the above estimation, and therefore, there is a high possibility that disorder will occur in video, moving images, audio, and the like. Therefore, it is desired to accurately switch the roll-off rate.

The information transmitted in the TMCC described above for solving this problem will be described below.

Table 21 shows the relationship between K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ and the number of switching frames. Note that, as an example, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ is transmitted as part of the TMCC extension information. (Note that, as described in Embodiment F and the like, it is assumed that the TMCC information is extended, and the extension identifications are all values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000".)

A case will be described as an example where the roll-off rate α is changed from 0.10 to 0.05 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 72, the roll-off rate α is switched from frame #M (AA105) to 0.05. Therefore, the frame #M-Z (AA101) is the frame before the Z frame at which the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (before the switching Z frame).

Similarly, frame #M-3 (AA102) is a frame three frames before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (three frames before switching).

The frame #M-2 (AA103) is a frame two frames before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (two frames before switching).

The frame #M-1 (AA104) is a frame one frame before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (one frame before switching).

Therefore, in frame #M-Z, the Z=15 frame is the frame Z=15 frames before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (the switching Z=15 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=14, the roll-off rate α is Z=14 frames before switching to 0.05 (switching Z=14 frames before). Therefore, in this frame, The transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'.
...

In frame #M-3 (AA102), the roll-off rate α is the frame three frames before switching to 0.05 (three frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In frame #M-2 (AA103), the roll-off rate α is the frame two frames before switching to 0.05 (two frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the roll-off rate α is one frame before switching to 0.05 (one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll-off rate has been switched to 0.05, the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. To do. If the roll-off rate is not changed thereafter, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame after frame #M (AA105).

In the above description, the case where the roll-off rate is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Therefore, in FIG. 72, consider the case where the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ in frame #M (AA105). In this case,..., Roll-off rate of frame #MZ (AA101),..., Frame #M-3 (AA102), frame #M-2 (AA103), frame #M-1 (AA104) Is β ₁ and the roll-off rate of frame #M (AA105), frame #M+1 (AA 106),... Is β ₂ . (However, β ₁ ≠ β ₂ )

At this time, in frame #M−Z, in the frame of Z=15, the roll-off rate α becomes the frame Z=15 frames before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=15 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=14, the roll-off rate α is Z=14 frames before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=14 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'.
...

In the frame # M-3 (AA102), since the three frames before frame roll-off factor α is switched to beta ₂ (switch 3 frames before), in this _{frame, K 0 K 1 K 2 K} 3 = '0010' Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In frame #M-2 (AA103), the roll-off rate α is the frame two frames before switching to β ₂ (two frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001'. Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the roll-off rate α is one frame before switching to β ₂ (one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000'. Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Then, in frame #M (AA105) in which the roll-off rate has been switched to β ₂ , the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. .. If the roll-off rate is not changed thereafter, frame #M (AA105
) In the subsequent frames, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame.

Therefore, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=G (G is an integer equal to or greater than 16), the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ before Z=G frame (switch Z=before G frame). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1111'.

In frame #M-Z, in a frame of Z=H (H is an integer of 1 or more and 15 or less), the roll-off rate α is a frame before Z=H frame before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=before H frame). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='H binary expression'.

As described above, the transmitting station (on the ground) transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ and the terminal obtains K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , so that the frame in which the roll-off rate is switched can be known in advance. The advantage is that In the above description, as an example, the transmitting station notifies the terminal from 15 frames before the roll-off rate is switched, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmitting station may notify the terminal before the frame, or the transmitting station may notify the terminal 7 frames before. The frame at which the transmitting station starts notifying the terminal of the change of the roll-off rate may have any timing.

When switchable roll-off rate is 2 types as 0.10,0.05, the value of the switching of the roll-off rate, since the terminal can be estimated easily, terminal, K ₀ K ₁ By obtaining K ₂ K ₃ , it is possible to respond appropriately to changes in the roll-off rate.

When there are three or more switchable roll-off rates, new information may be transmitted as control information such as TMCC in addition to K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ . This point will be described below. However, even if there are two switchable roll-off rate values, the embodiments described below may be implemented.

Table 22 shows the relationship between L ₀ L ₁ and the roll-off rate. As an example, L ₀ L ₁ is transmitted as a part of the TMCC extension information. (Note that, as described in Embodiment F and the like, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and all extension identifications take values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000".) At the same time as L ₀ L ₁ , K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ described above is transmitted as a part of the extended information of TMCC.

A case will be described as an example where the roll-off rate α is changed from 0.10 to 0.05 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 72, the roll-off rate α is switched from frame #M (AA105) to 0.05. Therefore, the frame #M-Z (AA101) is a frame before the Z frame at which the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (before the switching Z frame).

Similarly, frame #M-3 (AA102) is a frame three frames before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (three frames before switching).

The frame #M-2 (AA103) is a frame two frames before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (two frames before switching).

The frame #M-1 (AA104) is a frame one frame before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (one frame before switching).

For example, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=15, the roll-off rate α is the frame before Z=15 frames before switching to 0.05 (switching Z=15 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01' based on Table 22.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=14, the roll-off rate α is Z=14 frames before switching to 0.05 (switching Z=14 frames before). Therefore, in this frame, The transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01' based on Table 22.
...

In frame #M-3 (AA102), the roll-off rate α is the frame three frames before switching to 0.05 (three frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01' based on Table 22.

In frame #M-2 (AA103), the roll-off rate α is the frame two frames before switching to 0.05 (two frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01' based on Table 22.

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the roll-off rate α is one frame before switching to 0.05 (one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01' based on Table 22.

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll-off rate has been switched to 0.05, the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. To do. In addition to this, since the change of the roll-off rate is completed, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='11' based on Table 22. If the roll-off rate is not changed thereafter, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111', L ₀ L ₁ ='11' in each frame in frame #M (AA105) and thereafter. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In the above description, the case where the roll-off rate is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In FIG. 72, consider the case where the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ in frame #M (AA105). In this case,..., Roll-off rate of frame #MZ (AA101),..., Frame #M-3 (AA102), frame #M-2 (AA103), frame #M-1 (AA104) Is β ₁ and the roll-off rate of frame #M (AA105), frame #M+1 (AA 106),... Is β ₂ . (However, β ₁ ≠ β ₂ )

At this time, in frame #M−Z, in the frame of Z=15, the roll-off rate α becomes the frame Z=15 frames before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=15 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=14, the roll-off rate α is Z=14 frames before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=14 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)
...

In the frame # M-3 (AA102), since the three frames before frame roll-off factor α is switched to beta ₂ (switch 3 frames before), in this _{frame, K 0 K 1 K 2 K} 3 = '0010' Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

In frame #M-2 (AA103), the roll-off rate α is the frame two frames before switching to β ₂ (two frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001'. Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the roll-off rate α is one frame before switching to β ₂ (one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000'. Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

Then, in frame #M (AA105) in which the roll-off rate has been switched to β ₂ , the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. .. If the roll-off rate is not changed thereafter, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame after frame #M (AA105). In addition to this, since the change of the roll-off rate is completed, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='11'. If the roll-off rate is not changed thereafter, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111', L ₀ L ₁ ='11' in each frame in frame #M (AA105) and thereafter. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Therefore, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=G (G is an integer equal to or greater than 16), the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ before Z=G frame (switch Z=before G frame). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1111'. In addition to this, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='11'.

In frame #M-Z, in a frame of Z=H (H is an integer of 1 or more and 15 or less), the roll-off rate α is a frame before Z=H frame before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=before H frame). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='H binary expression'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

As described above, the (offshore) transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ and L ₀ L ₁ , and the terminal obtains K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ so that the roll-off rate is switched. Since it is possible to know the value of the roll-off rate of the frame in which the roll-off rate is switched by obtaining L ₀ L _{1 in} addition, the terminal can accurately respond to the change of the roll-off rate. The effect of being able to respond can be obtained.

In the above description, as an example, the transmitting station notifies the terminal 15 frames before the roll-off rate is switched, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmitting station may notify the terminal before the frame, or the transmitting station may notify the terminal 7 frames before. The frame at which the transmitting station starts notifying the terminal of the change of the roll-off rate may be at any timing.

Further, in Table 22, three types of roll-off rate values that can be set have been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a roll-off rate value that can be set is three or more. The value of the roll-off rate that can be set may be 2.

Then, the timing at which the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ corresponding to the value of the roll-off rate to be switched is not limited to the above description, and the transmitting station switches to the roll-off to be performed before the frame for switching the roll-off rate. It is sufficient to send L ₀ L ₁ corresponding to the rate.

Next, a method different from that of Table 22 will be described.

Table 23 shows the relationship between M ₀ M ₁ and the roll-off rate during use. Note that, as an example, M ₀ M ₁ is transmitted as part of the TMCC extension information. Table 24 shows the relationship between M ₂ M ₃ and the roll-off rate for switching. Note that, as an example, M ₂ M ₃ is transmitted as part of the TMCC extension information.

As described in Embodiment F and the like, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and the extension identifications are all values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000". Moreover, it is assumed that K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ described above is transmitted at the same time as M ₀ M ₁ and M ₂ M ₃ as part of the extended information of TMCC.

A case will be described as an example where the roll-off rate α is changed from 0.10 to 0.05 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 72, the roll-off rate α is switched from frame #M (AA105) to 0.05. Therefore, the frame #M-Z (AA101) is the frame before the Z frame at which the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (before the switching Z frame).

Similarly, frame #M-3 (AA102) is a frame three frames before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (three frames before switching).

The frame #M-2 (AA103) is a frame two frames before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (two frames before switching).

The frame #M-1 (AA104) is a frame one frame before the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 (one frame before switching).

For example, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=15, the roll-off rate α is the frame before Z=15 frames before switching to 0.05 (switching Z=15 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.10, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' is set based on Table 23, and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05. _The transmission station transmits ₂ M ₃ ='01', M ₀ M ₁ ='11', and M ₂ M ₃ ='01'.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=14, the roll-off rate α is Z=14 frames before switching to 0.05 (switching Z=14 frames before). Therefore, in this frame, The transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'. In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.10, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' is set based on Table 23, and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05. _The transmission station transmits ₂ M ₃ ='01', M ₀ M ₁ ='11', and M ₂ M ₃ ='01'.
...

In frame #M-3 (AA102), the roll-off rate α is the frame three frames before switching to 0.05 (three frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.10
Therefore, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05. Therefore, based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01' and M ₀ M ₁ = The transmitting station transmits '11', M ₂ M ₃ = '01'.

In frame #M-2 (AA103), the roll-off rate α is the frame two frames before switching to 0.05 (two frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.10
Therefore, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05. Therefore, based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01' and M ₀ M ₁ = The transmitting station transmits '11', M ₂ M ₃ = '01'.

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the roll-off rate α is one frame before switching to 0.05 (one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000. 'Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.10
Therefore, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05. Therefore, based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01' and M ₀ M ₁ = The transmitting station transmits '11', M ₂ M ₃ = '01'.

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll-off rate has been switched to 0.05, the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. To do. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.05, M ₀ M ₁ ='01' is set based on Table 23. If the roll-off rate is not changed thereafter, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' and M ₂ M ₃ ='01 in each frame in frame #M (AA105) and thereafter. '(Based on Table 24) is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In the above description, the case where the roll-off rate is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In FIG. 72, consider the case where the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ in frame #M (AA105). In this case,..., Roll-off rate of frame #MZ (AA101),..., Frame #M-3 (AA102), frame #M-2 (AA103), frame #M-1 (AA104) Is β ₁ and the roll-off rate of frame #M (AA105), frame #M+1 (AA 106),... Is β ₂ . (However, β ₁ ≠ β ₂ )

At this time, in frame #M−Z, in the frame of Z=15, the roll-off rate α becomes the frame Z=15 frames before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=15 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ , and since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , M ₂ M _The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=14, the roll-off rate α is Z=14 frames before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=14 frames before). _The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ , and since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , M ₂ M _The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .
...

In the frame # M-3 (AA102), since the three frames before frame roll-off factor α is switched to beta ₂ (switch 3 frames before), in this _{frame, K 0 K 1 K 2 K} 3 = '0010' Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ , and since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , M ₂ M _The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

In frame #M-2 (AA103), the roll-off rate α is the frame two frames before switching to β ₂ (two frames before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001'. Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ , and since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , M ₂ M _The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the roll-off rate α is one frame before switching to β ₂ (one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000'. Is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ , and since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , M ₂ M _The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

Then, in frame #M (AA105) in which the roll-off rate has been switched to β ₂ , the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. .. If the roll-off rate is not changed thereafter, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame after frame #M (AA105). In addition to this, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₂ , M ₀ M ₁ is a bit corresponding to β ₂ . If the change of the roll-off rate does not occur thereafter, in each frame after frame #M (AA105), K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111', β ₂ as M ₂ M ₃ is set. The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to.

Therefore, in frame #M-Z, in the frame of Z=G (G is an integer equal to or greater than 16), the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ before Z=G frame (switch Z=before G frame). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1111'. In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ . Also, the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , but since G is an integer of 16 or more, the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₂ M ₃ .

In frame #M-Z, in a frame of Z=H (H is an integer of 1 or more and 15 or less), the roll-off rate α is a frame before Z=H frame before switching to β ₂ (switching Z=before H frame). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='H binary expression'. In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ . Further, since the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as M ₂ M ₃ .

As described above, the transmitting station (on the ground) transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , M ₀ M ₁ , and M ₂ M ₃ , and the terminal obtains K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ to roll. it is possible to know the frame-off rate is switched in advance, it is possible to know the value of the roll-off rate of the frame roll-off rate is switched to obtain the M ₂ M ₃ in addition, the terminal changes the roll-off rate In contrast, it is possible to obtain the effect of being able to respond appropriately.

In the above description, as an example, the transmitting station notifies the terminal 15 frames before the roll-off rate is switched, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmitting station may notify the terminal before the frame, or the transmitting station may notify the terminal 7 frames before. The frame at which the transmitting station starts notifying the terminal of the change of the roll-off rate may be at any timing.

Further, in Tables 23 and 24, four types of roll-off rate values that can be set have been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set-off roll-off rate values are 3 or more. Alternatively, the roll-off rate that can be set may be 2.

Then, the timing at which the transmitting station transmits M ₂ M ₃ corresponding to the value of the roll-off rate to be switched is not limited to the above description, and the transmitting station switches the roll-off before the frame for switching the roll-off rate. Just send M ₂ M ₃ corresponding to the rate.

Although some examples have been described above, important points in the present embodiment are as follows.
-The transmitting station transmits control information regarding the timing of the frame for changing the roll-off rate to the terminal in advance.
-The transmitting station transmits control information to the terminal so that the changed roll-off rate can be determined.

Next, the operation of the receiving device will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 75 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device of the terminal. Radio section AA301 receives the received signal received by the antenna, performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation, and outputs baseband signal AA302.

The band limiting filter AA303 receives the baseband signal AA302 and the control information AA320, and sets the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter AA303 based on the control information AA320. Then, the band limitation filter AA303 outputs the baseband signal AA304 after the band limitation.

The demapping unit AA305 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320 as input, extracts information such as a modulation scheme from the control information AA320, and further, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318. The frequency offset is removed and time synchronization is performed with to obtain a channel estimation value. Then, the demapping unit AA305 performs demapping (demodulation) of the band-limited baseband signal AA304 based on these pieces of information, and outputs, for example, a logarithmic likelihood ratio signal AA306.

The deinterleaving unit AA307 receives the log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 and the control information AA320, performs deinterleaving (sorting) on the logarithmic likelihood ratio information based on the control information AA320, and outputs the logarithm after the deinterleaving. The likelihood ratio signal AA308 is output.

The error correction decoding unit AA309 receives the log likelihood ratio signal AA308 after deinterleaving and the control information AA320 as input, extracts information of an error correction method (for example, a coding rate, etc.) from the control information AA320, and extracts the information. Based on this, error correction decoding is performed, and received data AA310 is output.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 inputs the band-limited baseband signal AA304, extracts a synchronization signal/pilot signal, etc., performs time synchronization, frame synchronization, frequency synchronization, channel estimation, etc., and outputs a synchronization/channel estimation signal. Outputs AA318.

The control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, and obtains TMCC information from the band-limited baseband signal AA304, for example. Then, the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 outputs control information AA320 including information such as an error correction code system and a modulation system.

In particular, the control information AA320 includes information on the roll-off rate change timing and the roll-off rate change value described above. Therefore, the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 is, for example, the information of (K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ) described above, or
(K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ L ₀ L ₁ ) information or (K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ M ₀ M ₁ M ₂ M ₃ ) information, and as described above, The roll-off rate change timing and the roll-off rate change value are estimated, and control information AA320 including this estimated information is output.

Then, the band limiting filter AA303 changes the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter at an appropriate timing based on this estimated information.

It should be noted that although an example in which K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , L ₀ L ₁ , M ₀ M ₁ , and M ₂ M ₃ are transmitted as part of extended information of TMCC has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , L ₀ L ₁ , M ₀ M ₁ , and M ₂ M ₃ as control information such as TMCC, and the terminal obtains these information. Can accurately respond to changes in the roll-off rate.

Further, although a system including a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal has been described as an example in the present embodiment, a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can of course be implemented in a similar manner. .. At this time, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , L ₀ L ₁ , M ₀ M ₁ , M ₂ M ₃ , and the terminal obtains this information, and the terminal receives the roll-off rate. It is possible to accurately respond to changes in.

Then, as the band limiting filter, the filter having the frequency characteristic of Expression (28) is dealt with, but it is not limited to this, and a filter having another frequency characteristic may be used. At this time, it is equivalent to prepare a filter having a narrow pass band and a filter having a wide pass band, and use a filter having a large α in Expression (28) is equivalent to using a filter having a wide pass band. In the above, using a filter with a small α is equivalent to using a filter with a narrow pass band, and by using this relationship, the embodiment described above can be implemented.

By carrying out as described above, the receiving device has an advantage that the roll-off rate can be changed accurately. Then, the transmission device can apply the high-speed baud rate by changing the roll-off rate, and thus can obtain the effect of improving the data transmission efficiency.

(Embodiment BB)
Embodiment AA has described the method of changing the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter and the method of configuring control information such as TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control).

In this embodiment, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC at the time of emergency alert broadcasting will be described. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which emergency alert broadcasting is performed for a transmission system based on the “advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting transmission system standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version”.

The configuration of TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.

In the present embodiment, message information (for example, character information displayed on a display device such as a television or a display) and/or information of an emergency alert (emergency warning) including information of a video or a still image. (For example, emergency earthquake information (source information, magnitude information indicating the magnitude of the earthquake, information on the seismic intensity (seismic intensity) of each region), information on the estimated seismic intensity in each region, and estimated arrival time of the earthquake in each region. , Consider the case where the transmitting station (ground station) transmits the arrival time of the tsunami, the scale of the tsunami (height of the tsunami), information about volcanic eruptions, and so on.

Satellite broadcasting such as advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting is characterized by distributing broadcasting signals in a wide range, but if this property is used, it is difficult to distribute different broadcasting signals for each local area. , For example, since the importance of information on emergency alerts (emergency alerts) such as the information on the occurrence of earthquakes described above differs depending on the region, emergency alerts (emergency alerts) can be added without adding priority information such as importance. It is not desirable for the transmitting station to send the information in consideration of the needs of each user of the information. (Note that the broadcast signal (transmission signal) is a signal transmitted by a satellite (repeater). However, the signal corresponding to the broadcast signal is transmitted by the transmitting station as described in the other embodiments. (It will be a ground station.)

Therefore, when transmitting the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), the information about the area covered by the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is added and transmitted, and by specifying the area, the emergency alert It is possible to accurately transmit (urgent bulletin) information to a user who is likely to want the information.

When the receiving device (terminal) obtains the information about the area transmitted together with the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), if it corresponds to the designated area, it receives (demodulates) the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert). Signal processing (reception processing) is performed.

Note that the region setting of the receiving device (terminal) may be specified by the region setting at the time of installing the GPS (Global Positioning System) or the receiving device (terminal), but is not limited to this. .. Then, the “correspondence/non-correspondence of the designated area” is performed by comparing the area information obtained by this setting method with the information about the area transmitted together with the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning).

Further, it is further suitable for the receiving device (terminal) that the broadcast signal (transmission signal) (for example, control information such as TMCC) includes a “flag indicating the presence/absence of information regarding the area”. For example, when there is no information about the area, the flag is set to "0" and the information about the area is not transmitted. When there is information about the area, the flag is set to "1" and the information about the area is transmitted. If there is a “flag indicating the presence or absence of information regarding the area”, the configuration of the control information related to the “emergency alert (emergency alert)” is as shown in FIG. It will consist of "information about the area" and "information on emergency alerts (emergency warnings)".

The receiving device (terminal) identifies the flag indicating the presence/absence of information regarding the area (included in the control information such as TMCC), and when there is the information regarding the area (that is, the flag described above is “1”). , Information about the area is acquired, and if the area corresponds to the designated area, signal processing (reception processing) for receiving (demodulating) the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) is performed. It should be noted that an example of the determination of “correspondence/non-correspondence in the designated area” is as described above.

As described above, for example, by using the satellite broadcasting by adding the information about the area targeted for the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) to the control information such as TMCC, and the (ground) transmitting station transmits the information. It is possible to distribute information of different importance depending on the area. In addition, by providing a flag indicating the presence or absence of information regarding the area in the control information such as TMCC, it is possible to obtain the effect that the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) can be transmitted more accurately.

When the (ground) transmitting station transmits the above-described flag as “0” (no information about the area), the receiving device (terminal) causes the receiving device (terminal) to receive an emergency alert (emergency warning) for all areas. ) Information may be determined, or the importance of the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) may not be determined.

“A broadcast signal (transmission signal) is a signal transmitted by a satellite (relay device). However, a signal corresponding to a broadcast signal is transmitted by a transmitting station (terrestrial) as described in other embodiments. However, even in a system in which a satellite generates a broadcast signal (transmission signal) and transmits it to a terminal (on the ground), it is possible to use the control information transmission method described above. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect that the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) can be accurately transmitted.

(Embodiment CC)
Embodiment AA has described the method of changing the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter and the method of configuring control information such as TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control).

In this embodiment, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC at the time of emergency alert broadcasting will be described. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which emergency alert broadcasting is performed for a transmission system based on the “advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting transmission system standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version”.
The configuration of TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.

In the present embodiment, electronic message information (for example, character information displayed on a display device such as a television or a display) and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic (for example, map) Information and/or information on emergency alerts (emergency warnings) consisting of voice information (for example, emergency earthquake information (information on the epicenter, magnitude information indicating the magnitude of the earthquake, shaking of each region)) (Information on seismic intensity), information on predicted seismic intensity of each place, predicted arrival time of earthquakes in each place, arrival time of tsunami, tsunami scale (tsunami height), information on volcanic eruptions, etc.) Consider the case where the ground station) transmits.

Satellite broadcasting such as advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting is characterized by distributing broadcasting signals in a wide range, but if this property is used, it is difficult to distribute different broadcasting signals for each local area. , For example, since the importance of information on emergency alerts (emergency alerts) such as the information on the occurrence of earthquakes described above differs depending on the region, emergency alerts (emergency alerts) can be added without adding priority information such as importance. It is not desirable for the transmitting station to send the information in consideration of the needs of each user of the information. (Note that the broadcast signal (transmission signal) is a signal transmitted by a satellite (repeater). However, the signal corresponding to the broadcast signal is transmitted by the transmitting station as described in the other embodiments. (It will be a ground station.)

Therefore, when transmitting the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), the information about the area covered by the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is added and transmitted, and by specifying the area, the emergency alert It is possible to accurately transmit (urgent bulletin) information to a user who is likely to want the information.

When the receiving device (terminal) obtains the information about the area transmitted together with the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), if it corresponds to the designated area, it receives (demodulates) the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert). Signal processing (reception processing) is performed.

Note that the region setting of the receiving device (terminal) may be specified by the region setting at the time of installing the GPS (Global Positioning System) or the receiving device (terminal), but is not limited to this. .. Then, the “correspondence/non-correspondence of the designated area” is performed by comparing the area information obtained by this setting method with the information about the area transmitted together with the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning).

Further, it is further suitable for the receiving device (terminal) that the broadcast signal (transmission signal) (for example, control information such as TMCC) includes a “flag indicating the presence/absence of information regarding the area”. For example, when there is no information about the area, the flag is set to "0" and the information about the area is not transmitted. When there is information about the area, the flag is set to "1" and the information about the area is transmitted. If there is a “flag indicating the presence or absence of information regarding the area”, the configuration of the control information related to the “emergency alert (emergency alert)” is as shown in FIG. 76, for example, and the “flag indicating the presence or absence of information regarding the area”. It will consist of "information about the area" and "information on emergency alerts (emergency warnings)".

The receiving device (terminal) identifies the flag indicating the presence/absence of information regarding the area (included in the control information such as TMCC), and when there is the information regarding the area (that is, the flag described above is “1”). , Information about the area is acquired, and if the area corresponds to the designated area, signal processing (reception processing) for receiving (demodulating) the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) is performed. It should be noted that an example of the determination of “correspondence/non-correspondence in the designated area” is as described above.

As described above, for example, by using the satellite broadcasting by adding the information about the area targeted for the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) to the control information such as TMCC, and the (ground) transmitting station transmits the information. It is possible to distribute information of different importance depending on the area. In addition, by providing a flag indicating the presence or absence of information regarding the area in the control information such as TMCC, it is possible to obtain the effect that the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) can be transmitted more accurately.

When the (ground) transmitting station transmits the above-described flag as “0” (no information about the area), the receiving device (terminal) causes the receiving device (terminal) to receive an emergency alert (emergency warning) for all areas. ) Information may be determined, or the importance of the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) may not be determined.

“A broadcast signal (transmission signal) is a signal transmitted by a satellite (relay device). However, a signal corresponding to a broadcast signal is transmitted by a transmitting station (terrestrial) as described in other embodiments. However, even in a system in which a satellite generates a broadcast signal (transmission signal) and transmits it to a terminal (on the ground), it is possible to use the control information transmission method described above. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect that the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) can be accurately transmitted.

(Embodiment DD)
Embodiment AA has described the method of changing the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter and the method of configuring control information such as TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control).

In the present embodiment, a method for changing the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter during emergency alert broadcasting will be described in detail. In addition, in the present embodiment, a method of changing the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter at the time of emergency alert broadcasting is compared with the transmission method based on the “advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting transmission method standard ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version”. explain.

The configuration of TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.

First, as a prerequisite for the broadcasting system, the transmitting station (ground station) described in the embodiment AA can select the roll-off rate value of the band-limiting filter from a plurality of values as in the case of the embodiment AA. Shall be (Of course, the receiving device (terminal) also changes the value of the roll-off rate as the value of the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter of the transmitting station changes.)

In the present embodiment, electronic message information (for example, character information displayed on a display device such as a television or a display) and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic (for example, map) Information and/or information on emergency alerts (emergency warnings) consisting of audio information (for example, emergency earthquake information (information on the epicenter, magnitude information indicating the magnitude of the earthquake), earthquakes in each region (seismic intensity) ) Information), information on predicted seismic intensity in each region, predicted arrival time of earthquakes in each region, tsunami arrival time, tsunami scale (tsunami height), volcanic eruption information, etc.) Consider the case where the station transmits. (Note that in the case of graphic information, earthquake information may be included on the map, and in the case of voice information, evacuation instruction information for each area may be included.)

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention transmits "information on an electronic message and/or information on an image or a still image, and/or information on an emergency alert (emergency warning) including graphic information and/or audio information. At this time, the transmission method, the reception method, the transmission device, and the reception device, where the roll-off rate of the band limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value).

(Example 1)
In FIG. 77, when the transmitting station (ground station) is transmitting a frame using the roll-off rate α=γ _i (where i is any integer greater than or equal to 1), emergency alert broadcasting is performed. The figure shows the state of the frame on the time axis when there is an interrupt. It also describes the state of Q ₀ described below in each frame.

Note that j is an integer of 1 or more, and γ _i ≠β holds for all j satisfying this. Then, j and k are integers of 1 or more, and j≠k holds, and γ _j ≠γ _k holds for all j and all k satisfying these.
In FIG. 77, it is assumed that frame #M (BB105) has a roll-off rate α=β and roll-off rate α=γ _i of a frame before frame #M (BB105). Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency alert (emergency alert) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information Is transmitted.

The frame #M-Z (BB101) is a frame before the Z frame of the frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i . (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
The frame #M-K (BB102) is a frame K frames before the frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i .
The frame #M-2 (BB103) is a frame two frames before the frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i .
The frame #M-1 (BB104) is a frame one frame before the frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i .
The frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β, and is composed of telegram information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.

The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is configured by the frame of FIG. 11, for example.
77 is characterized in that the transmitting station uses telegram information in a frame with a roll-off rate α=β, and/or video/still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. The information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) composed of is transmitted. With this, the receiving device can surely make an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is possible to obtain the effect that the information can be obtained, and thus the possibility that the safety of the user can be secured increases.

Next, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC in the present embodiment will be described.
The transmitting station (ground station) transmits Q ₀ as a part of TMCC information. At this time, Table 25 shows the relationship between Q ₀ and the emergency warning broadcast activation flag.

As shown in Table 25, when Q ₀ =“1”, it means that emergency alert broadcasting is not being performed. (In Table 25, “No start control” is described.) When Q ₀ =“0”, “Emergency broadcast will be performed (that is, a notice that the emergency broadcast will be performed later is given. It means that "there is an emergency broadcast". (In Table 25, "with activation control" is described.)

In FIG. 77, as illustrated, the transmitting station changes Q ₀ , which is a part of TMCC of frame #M-K (BB102), to “0”. (Frame # M-K-1 in Q ₀ is "1", also, Q ₀ in even the previous frame than is assumed to be "1".) Then, F is M-K an integer greater than or equal Then, in frame #F, Q ₀ is set to “1”.

Then, as described above, in FIG. 77, in frame #M (BB105), message information and/or, video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio It transmits the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) composed of information, and in the subsequent frames, the message information and/or the video and still image information and/or the graphic information, and ( Or), information of an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) composed of voice information is transmitted.

77, the last time of the frame of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) do not match, but this is as described in Embodiment AA. This is because the roll-off rate will change. At this time, there is a symbol configuration between time U and time V, for example, ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard intervals, as described in the embodiment AA. In addition, between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, a symbol for transmitting control information, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, a preamble, a symbol for performing synchronization, a symbol for a receiver to detect a signal). Symbol, a symbol for estimating a frequency offset, a symbol for estimating a phase, etc.) may be inserted.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits a frame as shown in FIG. 77 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device. Note that, in FIG. 78, those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75 are assigned the same numbers, and description of the operation is omitted.

When the frame #M-1 (BB104) in FIG. 77 and the frames before it are received, the roll-off rate α is set to γ _i in the band limiting filter AA303.

When the receiving apparatus receives the frame #M-Z in FIG. 77 (where Z is an integer equal to or greater than K+1), the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 inputs the band limitation. The control information (TMCC information) of frame #MZ is obtained from the subsequent baseband signal AA304. Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast is not activated, and subsequently performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding processing on each frame, The reception data AA310 is obtained (the demapping unit AA305, the synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317, the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319) handles the baseband signal after band limitation and performs each process. Become. ).

When the receiving apparatus receives frame #M-K (BB102) in FIG. 77, control information estimating section (TMCC information estimating section) AA319 receives frame #M from input baseband signal AA304 after band limitation. -Get K control information (TMCC information). Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast has been activated. In frame #M-K-1 and the frames before it, Q ₀ =“1”, which means that Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #M-K. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) is transmitted from the frame #M-K+1, which is the frame next to the frame #M-K. (However, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver even if the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) is transmitted to the frame #M-K. In this case, the receiving device receives the frame #M-K, (It is possible to obtain information on an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of message information and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or voice information.)

As described above, in the present embodiment, “emergency alert composed of “telegram information and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information” When transmitting (emergency bulletin) information, the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value) Transmission method, reception method, transmission device, reception Device". Therefore, since the band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 is a band limiting filter for receiving the emergency alert broadcast, the roll-off rate is β.

Further, the roll-off rate used when the transmitting station transmits frame #M-K+1 may be β. (Because Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #M-K (BB102).)

Therefore, the band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal AA302 as input, and based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320, bases corresponding to the frame #M-K+1 and the subsequent frames. The band signal is subjected to signal processing corresponding to the band limiting filter, and the base band signal BB202 after band limiting of the roll-off rate β is output.

78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and receives the roll-off rate β based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320. The baseband signal BB202 after band limitation is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, symbol synchronization and the like, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization is achieved is output.

In the case of the frame state of FIG. 77, in frame #M-K, Q ₀ =“0”, and the subsequent frames, that is, frame #M-K+1, frame #M-K+2,..., Frame #M. Also in -1, frame #M, frame #M+1,..., It is assumed that the transmitting station transmits the information of Q ₀ =“0”. Also, transmission of information on an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) shall be started from frame #M.

Therefore, in frame #M-K+1 to frame #M-1, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the rolloff rate β as input and rolls off. The baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the rate β cannot output frame synchronization, time synchronization, or symbol synchronization, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization is not achieved.

Then, in frame #M (BB105), the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input, and limits the band of the roll-off rate β. The later baseband signal BB202 can be frame-synchronized, time-synchronized, and symbol-synchronized, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved.

Also in the frame #M+1 (BB106) and the subsequent frames, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input, and the roll-off rate. The baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation of β can be frame-synchronized, time-synchronized, and symbol-synchronized, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved.

Accordingly, the demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 performs the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, the control information AA320. Is input, and the frame #M (BB105) and the subsequent frames are synchronized, so the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is demapped, and the log likelihood ratio signal AA306 is obtained. Output.

The demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 desynchronizes the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation because the frame #M-1 and the frames before it are not synchronized, and the log likelihood ratio signal AA306. Is output.
The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204 as input, and receives the frame #M (BB105) and thereafter. Since the frame is synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is used to perform time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

Since synchronization/channel estimation section AA317 in FIG. 78 is not synchronized in frame #M-1 and the frames before it, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and frequency synchronization are performed using band-limited baseband signal AA304. Channel estimation is performed and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

(Example 2)
79 and 80 show a state of a frame different from that in FIG. 77. The state of Q ₀ in each frame is also described. 79 and 80 are different from FIG. 77 in that there is an interruption of broadcasting an emergency alert while information is being transmitted at a roll-off rate α=β.

79 and 80, frame #M (BB105) has a roll-off rate α=β, and the roll-off rate of frames prior to frame #M (BB105) is also β. Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency alert (emergency alert) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information Is transmitted.

The frame #M-Z (BB101) is a frame before the Z frame of the frame #M (BB105), and the roll-off rate α=β. (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
The frame #M-K (BB102) is a frame K frames before the frame #M (BB105), and the roll-off rate α=β.
The frame #M-2 (BB103) is a frame two frames before the frame #M (BB105), and the roll-off rate α=β.
The frame #M-1 (BB104) is a frame one frame before the frame #M (BB105), and the roll-off rate α=β.
The frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β, and is composed of telegram information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.
The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is configured by the frame of FIG. 11, for example.

79 and 80, as in the case of FIG. 77, the transmitting station, in the frame of the roll-off rate α=β, and/or the message information and/or the video/still image information and/or the graphic information, (Or) It means that the information of an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) composed of voice information is transmitted. With this, the receiving device can surely make an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is possible to obtain the effect that the information can be obtained, and thus the possibility that the safety of the user can be secured increases.

Next, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC will be described.
The transmitting station (ground station) transmits Q ₀ as a part of TMCC information. At this time, the relationship between Q ₀ and the emergency warning broadcast activation flag is as shown in Table 25.

79 and 80, the transmitting station changes Q ₀ , which is a part of TMCC of frame #M-K (BB102), to “0” as illustrated. (Frame # M-K-1 in Q ₀ is "1", also, Q ₀ in even the previous frame than is assumed to be "1".) Then, F is M-K an integer greater than or equal Then, in frame #F, Q ₀ is set to “1”.

Then, as described above, in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, in frame #M (BB105), message information and/or information of a video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or ), information of an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) composed of audio information is transmitted, and in the subsequent frames, message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information. And/or, the information of an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) composed of voice information is transmitted.

Note that FIG. 79 shows an example in which the last time of the frame of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) match. In FIG. 80, the last time of the frame of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) do not match, but at this time, the symbol configuration between time U and time V, For example, as described in the embodiment AA, there are ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard sections. In addition, between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, a symbol for transmitting control information, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, a preamble, a symbol for performing synchronization, a symbol for a receiver to detect a signal). Symbol, a symbol for estimating a frequency offset, a symbol for estimating a phase, etc.) may be inserted. This is the difference between FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, and the transmitting station may transmit by any method.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits a frame as shown in FIG. 79 or 80 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device. Note that, in FIG. 78, those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75 are assigned the same numbers, and description of the operation is omitted.

When the frame #M-1 (BB104) of FIG. 79 or 80 and the frames before it are received, the roll-off rate α is set to β in the band limiting filter AA303.

When the receiving device receives the frame #M-Z of FIG. 79 or 80 (where Z is an integer equal to or greater than K+1), the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 receives the input. The control information (TMCC information) of frame #MZ is obtained from the baseband signal AA304 after a certain band limitation. Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast is not activated, and subsequently performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding processing on each frame, Received data AA310 is obtained. (The demapping unit AA305, the synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317, and the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319) handle the baseband signal after band limitation and perform each process. )

When the receiving apparatus receives the frame #M-K (BB102) of FIG. 79 or FIG. 80, the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 receives the input band-limited baseband signal AA304 from the input. The control information (TMCC information) of frame #M-K is obtained. Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast has been activated. In frame #M-K-1 and the frames before it, Q ₀ =“1”, which means that Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #M-K. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) is transmitted from the frame #M-K+1, which is the frame next to the frame #M-K. (However, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver even if the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) is transmitted to the frame #M-K. In this case, the receiving device receives the frame #M-K, (It is possible to obtain information on an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of message information and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information.)

As described above, in the present embodiment, “emergency alert composed of “telegram information and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information” When transmitting (emergency bulletin) information, the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value) Transmission method, reception method, transmission device, reception Device". Therefore, since the band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 is a band limiting filter for receiving the emergency alert broadcast, the roll-off rate is β.

The band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal AA302 as input, and based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320, the baseband signal corresponding to the frame #M-K+1 and the subsequent frames. On the other hand, the signal processing corresponding to the band limiting filter is performed, and the base band signal BB202 after band limiting of the roll-off rate β is output.

78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and receives the roll-off rate β based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320. The baseband signal BB202 after band limitation is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, symbol synchronization and the like, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization is achieved is output.

In the case of the frame state of FIG. 79 or 80, Q ₀ =“0” in frame #M-K, and the subsequent frames, that is, frame #M-K+1, frame #M-K+2,... In the frame #M-1, the frame #M, the frame #M+1,... Also, it is assumed that the transmitting station transmits the information of Q ₀ =“0”. Also, transmission of information on an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) shall be started from frame #M.

From frame #M-K+1 to frame #M-1, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the band-limited baseband signal BB202 of the roll-off rate β as input, and the roll-off rate β. Frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved by the baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation. Therefore, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 in FIG. 78 outputs the synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved. However, from frame #M-K+1 to frame #M-1, information on an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is not transmitted.

The demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320 as inputs. Since the frames #M-K+1 to #M-1 are synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is demapped and the log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. (However, from frame #M-K+1 to frame #M-1, the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is not transmitted.)

Then, in frame #M (BB105), the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input, and limits the band of the roll-off rate β. The later baseband signal BB202 can be frame-synchronized, time-synchronized, and symbol-synchronized, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved.

Also in the frame #M+1 (BB106) and the subsequent frames, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input, and the roll-off rate. The baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation of β can be frame-synchronized, time-synchronized, and symbol-synchronized, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved.

The demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320 as inputs. Since the frame #M (BB105) and the subsequent frames are synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is demapped and the log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. (In the frame #M (BB105) and the subsequent frames, information on an emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted.)

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204 as input, and from frame #M-K+1 to frame #M. In -1, since synchronization is achieved, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the band-limited baseband signal BB202 of the roll-off rate β, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204 as input, and receives the frame #M (BB105) and thereafter. Since the frame is synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is used to perform time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

(Example 3)
FIG. 81 shows that the emergency alert broadcast is performed when the transmitting station (ground station) is transmitting a frame using the roll-off rate α=γ _i (i is an integer of 1 or more). The figure shows the state of the frame on the time axis when there is an interrupt. The state of Q ₀ in each frame is also described.

Note that j is an integer of 1 or more, and γ _i ≠β holds for all j satisfying this. Then, j and k are integers of 1 or more, and j≠k holds, and γ _j ≠γ _k holds for all j and all k satisfying these.
In FIG. 81, it is assumed that frame #M (BB105) has a roll-off rate α=β and roll-off rate α=γ _i of a frame before frame #M (BB105). Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency alert (emergency alert) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information Is transmitted.

The frame #M-Z (BB101) is a frame before the Z frame of the frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i . (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
The frame #M-K (BB102) is a frame K frames before the frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i .

The frame #MY (BB501) is a frame before the Y frame of the frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i . Then, the frame #MY (BB501) is an emergency alert (emergency alert) composed of message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. This is the frame in which the bulletin information starts. It should be noted that Y is one of integers of 1 or more and K or less.
The frame #M-X is a frame before the frame #M (BB105) by X frames, and has a roll-off rate α=γ _i . Then, the frame #M-X is a telegram information and/or information of a video or a still image, and/or graphic information, and/or an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of audio information. It is assumed that information is being transmitted. Note that X is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less.

The frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β, and is composed of telegram information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.
The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is configured by the frame of FIG. 11, for example.

As a feature of FIG. 81, the transmitting station uses the frame of the roll-off rate α=β to transmit the message information and/or the information of the video or still image, and/or the graphic information, and/or It transmits emergency warning (emergency warning) information consisting of audio information, and also at other roll-off rates, telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information. In addition, and/or, it is possible to obtain the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) including the voice information, and thus it is possible to obtain the effect of increasing the possibility that the safety of the user can be secured.

Next, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC will be described.
The transmitting station (ground station) transmits Q ₀ as a part of TMCC information. At this time, the relationship between Q ₀ and the emergency warning broadcast activation flag is as shown in Table 25.
In FIG. 81, as shown in the figure, the transmitting station uses the TM of frame #M-K (BB102).
Change Q ₀ which is a part of CC to “0”. (Frame # M-K-1 in Q ₀ is "1", also Q ₀ is assumed to be "1" in front than that of the frame.) Then, F is M-K
When the above integer is used, Q ₀ is set to “1” in frame #F.

Then, as described above, in FIG. 81, in frame #MY (BB501), message information and/or information of a video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or , The information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of voice information is transmitted, and in the following frames, message information and/or video and still image information and/or graphic information, And/or, the information of an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) composed of voice information is transmitted.

In FIG. 81, the end time of the frame of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) do not match, but this is as described in Embodiment AA. This is because the roll-off rate will change. At this time, there is a symbol configuration between time U and time V, for example, ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard intervals, as described in the embodiment AA. In addition, between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, a symbol for transmitting control information, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, a preamble, a symbol for performing synchronization, a symbol for a receiver to detect a signal). Symbol, a symbol for estimating a frequency offset, a symbol for estimating a phase, etc.) may be inserted.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits a frame as shown in FIG. 81 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device. Note that, in FIG. 78, those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75 are assigned the same numbers, and description of the operation is omitted.

When the frame #M-1 (BB104) in FIG. 81 and the frames before it are received, the roll-off rate α is set to γ _i in the band limiting filter AA303.

When the receiving apparatus receives the frame #M-Z in FIG. 81 (where Z is an integer equal to or greater than K+1), the control information estimating unit (TMCC information estimating unit) AA319 inputs the band limitation as an input. The control information (TMCC information) of frame #MZ is obtained from the subsequent baseband signal AA304. Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast is not activated, and subsequently performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding processing on each frame, The reception data AA310 is obtained (the demapping unit AA305, the synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317, the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319) handles the baseband signal after band limitation and performs each process. Become. ).

When the receiving apparatus receives the frame #M-K (BB102) of FIG. 81, the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 receives the frame #M from the input baseband signal AA304 after band limitation. -Get K control information (TMCC information). Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast has been activated. In frame #M-K-1 and the frames before it, Q ₀ =“1”, which means that Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #M-K. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) is transmitted from the frame #M-K+1, which is the frame next to the frame #M-K. (However, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver even if the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) is transmitted to the frame #M-K. In this case, the receiving device receives the frame #M-K, (It is possible to obtain information on an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of message information and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information.)

In this example, unlike (Example 1), the roll-off rate is γ _i , and the message information and/or the video and/or the video are transmitted from any of the frames #M-K (BB102) and the subsequent frames. The point is that the information of the still image, and/or the graphic information, and/or the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of the voice information is transmitted. (However, even when the frame has a roll-off rate of β, it is composed of message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. Information on emergency alerts (emergency bulletins) shall be transmitted.)

In this example, “information on an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of “telegram information and/or video and still image information and/or graphic information and/or audio information is rolled. Frames with an off rate of β are also transmitted.” Therefore, since the band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 is a band limiting filter for receiving the emergency alert broadcast, the roll-off rate is β.

Further, the roll-off rate used when the transmitting station transmits frame #M-K+1 may be β. (Because Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #M-K (BB102).)

Therefore, the band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal AA302 as input, and based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320, bases corresponding to the frame #M-K+1 and the subsequent frames. The band signal is subjected to signal processing corresponding to the band limiting filter, and the base band signal BB202 after band limiting of the roll-off rate β is output.

78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and receives the roll-off rate β based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320. The baseband signal BB202 after band limitation is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, symbol synchronization and the like, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization is achieved is output.

In the case of the frame state of FIG. 81, in frame #M-K, Q ₀ =“0”, and the subsequent frames, that is, frame #M-K+1, frame #M-K+2,..., Frame #M. Also in -1, frame #M, frame #M+1,..., It is assumed that the transmitting station transmits the information of Q ₀ =“0”. Also, transmission of information on an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) shall be started from frame #MY.

Therefore, in frame #M-K+1 to frame #M-1, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the rolloff rate β as input and rolls off. The baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the rate β cannot output frame synchronization, time synchronization, or symbol synchronization, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization is not achieved.

Then, in frame #M (BB105), the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input, and limits the band of the roll-off rate β. The later baseband signal BB202 can be frame-synchronized, time-synchronized, and symbol-synchronized, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved.

Also in the frame #M+1 (BB106) and the subsequent frames, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input, and the roll-off rate. The baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation of β can be frame-synchronized, time-synchronized, and symbol-synchronized, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved.

The demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320 as inputs. Since the frame #M (BB105) and the subsequent frames are synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is demapped and the log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. (This makes it possible to obtain telegram information, and/or information on video and still images, and/or information on emergency alerts (emergency warnings) that are made up of graphic information and/or audio information. it can.)

The demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 desynchronizes the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation because the frame #M-1 and the frames before it are not synchronized, and the log likelihood ratio signal AA306. Is output. The frames from frame #MY to frame #M-1 are composed of message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is possible to obtain information on an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) to be performed.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204 as input, and receives the frame #M (BB105) and thereafter. Since the frame is synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is used to perform time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

Since synchronization/channel estimation section AA317 in FIG. 78 is not synchronized in frame #M-1 and the frames before it, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and frequency synchronization are performed using band-limited baseband signal AA304. Channel estimation is performed and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

(Example 4)
82 and 83 show a state of a frame different from that in FIG. 81. The state of Q ₀ in each frame is also described. 82 and 83 are different from FIG. 81 in that there is an interruption of performing an emergency alert broadcast when transmitting information at a roll-off rate α=β.

82 and 83, it is assumed that the roll-off rate α of the frame #M (BB105) is β and the roll-off rate of the frame before the frame #M (BB105) is β. Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency alert (emergency alert) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information Is transmitted.

The frame #M-Z (BB101) is a frame before the Z frame of the frame #M (BB105), and the roll-off rate α=β. (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
The frame #M-K (BB102) is a frame K frames before the frame #M (BB105), and the roll-off rate α=β.

The frame #MY (BB501) is a frame before the Y frame of the frame #M (BB105), and the roll-off rate α=β. Then, the frame #MY (BB501) is an emergency alert (emergency alert) composed of message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. This is the frame in which the bulletin information starts. It should be noted that Y is one of integers of 1 or more and K or less.
The frame #M-X is a frame before the frame #M (BB105) by X frames, and has a roll-off rate α=β. Then, the frame #M-X is a telegram information and/or information of a video or a still image, and/or graphic information, and/or an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of audio information. It is assumed that information is being transmitted. Note that X is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less.

The frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β, and is composed of telegram information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.
The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is configured by the frame of FIG. 11, for example.

82 and 83, as in the case of FIG. 81, the transmitting station, in the frame with the roll-off rate α=β, and/or the message information and/or the video/still image information and/or the graphic information, (Or) It means that the information of an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) composed of voice information is transmitted. With this, the receiving device can surely make an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is possible to obtain the effect that the information can be obtained, and thus the possibility that the safety of the user can be secured increases.

Next, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC will be described.
The transmitting station (ground station) transmits Q ₀ as a part of TMCC information. At this time, the relationship between Q ₀ and the emergency warning broadcast activation flag is as shown in Table 25.
82 and 83, the transmitting station changes Q ₀ , which is a part of TMCC of frame #M-K (BB102), to “0” as illustrated. (Frame # M-K-1 in Q ₀ is "1", also, Q ₀ in even the previous frame than is assumed to be "1".) Then, F is M-K an integer greater than or equal Then, in frame #F, Q ₀ is set to “1”.

Then, as described above, in FIGS. 82 and 83, in frame #MY (BB501), message information and/or information of video and still image, and/or graphic information, and (Or) The information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of audio information is transmitted, and in the following frames, message information and/or information of video or still image, and/or, The information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of graphic information and/or audio information will be transmitted.

Note that FIG. 82 is an example in which the last time of the frame of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) match. In FIG. 83, the last time of the frame of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) do not match, but at this time, the symbol configuration between time U and time V, For example, as described in the embodiment AA, there are ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard sections. In addition, between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, a symbol for transmitting control information, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, a preamble, a symbol for performing synchronization, a symbol for a receiver to detect a signal). Symbol, a symbol for estimating a frequency offset, a symbol for estimating a phase, etc.) may be inserted. This is the difference between FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, and the transmitting station may transmit by any method.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits a frame as shown in FIG. 82 or 83 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device. Note that, in FIG. 78, those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75 are assigned the same numbers, and description of the operation is omitted.

When the frame #M-1 (BB104) of FIG. 82 or FIG. 83 and the frames before it are received, the roll-off rate α is set to β in the band limiting filter AA303.

When the receiving device is receiving the frame #M-Z of FIG. 82 or FIG. 83 (where Z is an integer equal to or greater than K+1), the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 is input. The control information (TMCC information) of frame #MZ is obtained from the baseband signal AA304 after a certain band limitation. Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast is not activated, and subsequently performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding processing on each frame, Received data AA310 is obtained. (The demapping unit AA305, the synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317, and the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319) handle the baseband signal after band limitation and perform each process. )

When the receiving apparatus receives the frame #M-K (BB102) of FIG. 82 or FIG. 83, the control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 outputs the input band-limited baseband signal AA304. The control information (TMCC information) of frame #M-K is obtained. Then, of the control information (TMCC information), Q ₀ described above is obtained. At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency alert broadcast has been activated. In frame #M-K-1 and the frames before it, Q ₀ =“1”, which means that Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #M-K. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) is transmitted from the frame #M-K+1, which is the frame next to the frame #M-K. (However, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver even if the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) is transmitted to the frame #M-K. In this case, the receiving device receives the frame #M-K, (It is possible to obtain information on an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of message information and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information.)

As described above, in the present embodiment, “emergency alert composed of “telegram information and/or information of video or still image, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information” When transmitting (emergency bulletin) information, the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value) Transmission method, reception method, transmission device, reception Device". Therefore, since the band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 is a band limiting filter for receiving the emergency alert broadcast, the roll-off rate is β.

The band limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal AA302 as input, and based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320, the baseband signal corresponding to the frame #M-K+1 and the subsequent frames. On the other hand, the signal processing corresponding to the band limiting filter is performed, and the base band signal BB202 after band limiting of the roll-off rate β is output.

78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and receives the roll-off rate β based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320. The baseband signal BB202 after band limitation is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, symbol synchronization and the like, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization is achieved is output.

In the case of the frame state of FIG. 82 or FIG. 83, Q ₀ =“0” in frame #M-K, and the subsequent frames, that is, frame #M-K+1, frame #M-K+2,... In the frame #M-1, the frame #M, the frame #M+1,... Also, it is assumed that the transmitting station transmits the information of Q ₀ =“0”. Also, transmission of information on an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) shall be started from frame #MY.

In frame #M-K+1 to frame #M-Y-1, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the band-limited baseband signal BB202 of the roll-off rate β, and rolls off. Frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved by the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the rate β. Therefore, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 in FIG. 78 outputs the synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved. However, from frame #M-K+1 to frame #M-Y-1, information on an emergency alert (emergency alert) is not transmitted.

The demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320 as inputs. Since the frames #M-K+1 to #M-Y-1 are synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is demapped and the log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. .. (However, in the frame #M-K+1 to the frame #M-Y-1, the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) is not transmitted.)

Then, in frame #MY (BB501), the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input and sets the roll-off rate β. The baseband signal BB202 after band limitation can be frame-synchronized, time-synchronized, and symbol-synchronized, and thus outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved.

In the frames #M-Y+1 and subsequent frames, the emergency alert broadcast synchronization unit BB203 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β as input, and the roll-off rate β. In the baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation, the frame synchronization, the time synchronization, and the symbol synchronization can be established, and therefore, the synchronization signal BB204 indicating that the synchronization is achieved is output.

The demapping unit AA305 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320 as inputs. Since the frame #MY (BB501) and the subsequent frames are synchronized, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β is demapped and the logarithmic likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. .. (In the frame #MY (BB501) and the subsequent frames, information on an emergency alert (emergency warning) is transmitted.)

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 of FIG. 78 receives the baseband signal AA304 after band limitation, the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation of the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204 as input, and from frame #M-K+1 to frame #M. In -Y-1, since synchronization is achieved, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the band-limited baseband signal BB202 of the roll-off rate β, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output. ..

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 receives as input the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 of the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204, and inputs frames #MY (BB501) and Since synchronization is achieved in the subsequent frames, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the band-limited baseband signal BB202 of the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output. ..

Next, the operation of the (ground) transmitting station will be described. FIG. 7 shows the configuration of the transmitting station, and the operation of each unit has been described in the other embodiments, and therefore description thereof is omitted here. In FIG. 7, the detailed configuration of the mapping unit 708 is as shown in FIG. The operation of each unit in FIG. 10 has been described in the other embodiments, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

Control information generation and mapping section 704 in FIG. 7 receives a control signal, performs mapping for transmitting information related to TMCC in the control signal, and outputs the control information signal. Note that the control signal includes the information of Q ₀ shown in Table 25.

The mapping unit 708 of FIG. 7 receives the control signal and switches the roll-off rate when it is necessary to switch the roll-off rate based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control signal. Note that, as described above, the specific configuration of the mapping unit 708 is as shown in FIG.

It means that it transmits telegram information and/or video/still image information and/or graphic information and/or emergency alert information consisting of voice information. .. With this, the receiving device can surely make an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. As described in other embodiments, the information may be transmitted using the "extended information" of TMCC, or may be included in a transmission main signal (stream) and transmitted.

In the above description, regarding the frames in FIGS. 77, 79, 80, 81, 82, and 83, “The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA. , And the frame of FIG. 11”. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a frame for transmitting telegram information and/or information on video and still images, and/or graphic information, and/or emergency alert information composed of voice information. Is composed of frames conforming to "Satellite Digital Broadcasting Transmission System Standard ARIB STD-B20 3.0 Version, or Satellite Digital Broadcasting Transmission System Standard ARIB STD-B20 3.0 Version or Later ARIB STD-B20 Standard". May be. At this time, in order to transmit message information and/or information on video and still images, and/or information on emergency alerts (emergency warnings) consisting of graphic information, and/or audio information. The roll-off rate used is 0.35.

In addition, a frame for transmitting the information of an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of message information and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information You may change the target.

For example, after Q ₀ =“0”, in the frame of FIG. 11 described in the embodiment AA, the electronic message information and/or the information of the video or still image and/or the graphic information, And/or, it transmits the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) composed of audio information, and then, the telegram information and/or the information of the image or the still image, and/or the graphic information, and (Or) The information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) consisting of audio information is displayed in "Satellite Digital Broadcasting Transmission System Standard ARIB STD-B20 3.0 version or Satellite Digital Broadcasting Transmission System Standard ARIB STD-B20 3.0 It may be transmitted in a frame conforming to the standard of ARIB STD-B20 after the version”.

As described above, the transmitting station is composed of telegram information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information in a frame with a roll-off rate α=β. That is, the information of an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) to be transmitted is transmitted. With this, the receiving device can surely make an emergency alert (emergency warning) composed of electronic message information and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is possible to obtain the effect that the information can be obtained, and thus the possibility that the safety of the user can be secured increases.

In this embodiment, a system including a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G is used. Although explained as an example, it is obvious that a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can be similarly implemented.

(Embodiment EE)
In the embodiment CC and the embodiment DD, it has been described that the voice information can be selected as the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news). In the present embodiment, a method for surely transmitting the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) to the user having the receiving device (terminal) when the voice information is selected as the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert). explain.

The configuration of TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.

As described in Embodiment DD, as shown in Table 25, it is assumed that the transmitting station (ground station) transmits Q ₀ as a part of TMCC information.
However, in the embodiment DD,
"The transmitting station is an emergency alert that consists of telegram information in a frame with roll-off rate α=β and/or video/still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. (Emergency bulletin) information is being transmitted."
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the state of Q ₀ =1, normal information transmission is transmitted at the roll-off rate γ _i , and then Q ₀ =0, Even if the transmission method is such that the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is transmitted at the roll-off rate γ _i , the contents described below may be implemented.

Further, for example, it is assumed that information R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ related to a medium of information of an emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted as a part of control information such as TMCC. At that time, the following table shows the relationship between R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ and the type of information for emergency alert broadcasting.

As shown in Table 26, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“000”, the information of the emergency alert broadcast is assumed to be transmitted as electronic message information. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“001”, it is assumed that the emergency alert broadcast information is transmitted as video, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“010”, the emergency alert broadcast information is a still image. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ = “011”, the information of the emergency alert broadcast is transmitted as voice, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ = “100” to “111” Is undefined.

The information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is assumed to be transmitted by using the "extended information" of TMCC as an example.
Note that the configuration of the transmission station that transmits control information such as TMCC is assumed to be the configuration shown in FIG. 7, for example, as described in Embodiment DD. Since the detailed description has been given in the other embodiments, the description thereof is omitted here.

Next, the configuration of the receiving device (of the terminal) will be described.
FIG. 84 is an example of the configuration of the receiving apparatus, and those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 78 are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.
In FIG. 84, a decoder EE102 is a decoder relating to moving images and audio, receives the received data AA310, and outputs audio data and video data.

The emergency alert (emergency alert) information analysis unit EE101 in FIG. 84 receives the control information AA320 as input, and determines whether the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted according to the value of Q ₀ . In addition, the value of R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ is used to judge the medium of the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), and based on the judgment, the message, video, still image, or audio is decoded, Generates emergency alert (emergency alert) message information, emergency alert (emergency alert) video still image, or emergency alert (emergency alert) audio information from emergency alert (emergency alert) information included in the control information AA320. ,Output.

The audio controller EE103 shown in FIG. 84 receives the audio volume control signal and can adjust the audio volume. Therefore, the audio volume is set to a certain value. Let G be that value.
The voice controller EE103 of FIG. 84 receives voice data, emergency alert (emergency breaking news) voice information, and control information AA320 in addition to the voice volume control signal, and inputs the value of Q ₀ and R ₂ R ₁ included in the control information AA320. Based on the value of R ₀ , it is determined whether or not there is emergency alert (emergency breaking news) voice information. Then, when it is determined that the emergency alert (emergency breaking) audio information is present, the audio data output from the decoder EE102 is not included in the output audio (mute), and the emergency alert (emergency alert) is given priority. Bulletin) A voice based on voice information is output as an output voice. The output sound is converted into sound by the speaker, earphones, and headphones.

However, the control method is not limited to this. For example, the following method is also available.
The voice controller EE103 of FIG. 84 receives voice data, emergency alert (emergency breaking news) voice information, and control information AA320 in addition to the voice volume control signal, and inputs the value of Q ₀ and R ₂ R ₁ included in the control information AA320. Based on the value of R ₀ , it is determined whether or not there is emergency alert (emergency breaking news) voice information. When it is determined that the emergency warning (emergency breaking) voice information is present, the volume of the sound of the voice data output from the decoder EE102 is set to a volume smaller than the set value G, and the emergency warning is given priority. (Emergency Bulletin) A sound based on the voice data output from the decoder EE102 and a sound based on the emergency warning (emergency breaking) voice information are output as output voices so that the voice based on the voice information becomes loud.

As described above, by giving priority to the output of the emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information, the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking) can be reliably transmitted to the user having the receiving device (terminal). Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of increasing the possibility that the safety of the user can be secured.

In addition to Q ₀ and R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ , the transmitting station transmits the “information on the target area” of the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) as described in the embodiment BB and the embodiment CC. Sometimes. The operation in this case will be described.
The voice controller EE103 of FIG. 84 receives voice data, emergency alert (emergency breaking news) voice information, and control information AA320 in addition to the voice volume control signal, and inputs the value of Q ₀ and R ₂ R ₁ included in the control information AA320. Based on the value of R ₀ , it is determined whether or not there is emergency alert (emergency breaking news) voice information. In addition, the voice controller EE103 of FIG. 84 obtains the “information about the target area” of the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) included in the control information AA320, and the receiving device (terminal) issues the emergency alert (emergency alert). Determine whether it corresponds to the "target area" of the information. (Note that the determination method is as described in Embodiment BB and Embodiment CC.)

When the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 determines that the emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information is present and is the “target area” of the emergency alert (emergency breaking) information, the decoder EE102 detects The output voice data is not included in the output voice (mute), and the voice based on the emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information is preferentially output as the output voice. The output sound is converted into sound by the speaker, earphones, and headphones. As another method, when the voice controller EE103 of FIG. 84 determines that the emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information is present and is the “target area” of the emergency alert (emergency breaking) information, It is the output of the decoder EE102 so that the volume of the sound of the audio data output from the decoder EE102 is smaller than the set value G, and the volume of the sound based on the emergency alert (emergency breaking) audio information is preferentially increased. The sound of the sound data and the sound based on the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) sound information are output as the output sound.

When the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 determines that the emergency warning (emergency breaking) sound information is present and is not the “target area” of the emergency warning (emergency breaking) information, the output of the decoder EE102. Is output as output voice.

As described above, by controlling the voice output of the emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information, the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking) can be surely transmitted to the user having the receiving device (terminal). In addition to increasing the possibility of ensuring safety, it is possible to obtain the effect that the user can continue to hear the voice of the transmission main signal (stream) when the area is not the target area of the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin).

In the above description, it has been described that the electronic message information, the video, the still image, or the audio information is used for the emergency alert (emergency alert), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the emergency alert ( The electronic message information, the video, the still image, or the audio information may be transmitted for purposes other than the emergency bulletin). However, in this case, the transmitting station may transmit a flag indicating an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) as part of the control information such as TMCC. For example, it is assumed that the transmitting station transmits S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ as a part of control information such as TMCC. At this time, Table 27 shows the relationship between S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ and the purpose of using the information.

As shown in Table 27, when S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ =“000”, the telegram information, the video, the still image, or the audio information means the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning). doing. Then, when S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ =“001”, it means that the message information, video, still image, or audio information is information other than the emergency alert (emergency warning). .. The _{S 2 S 1 S 0 = "} 010" ~ When "111" is undefined.

The receiving apparatus (terminal) (even the transmitting station stops sending S ₂ S ₁ S ₀₎ without S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ exists as control information, from the value of Q _0, message information , Or video, still image, or audio information can be the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), the transmission station does not have to transmit S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ .

In the above description, "the information on the emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted using the "extended information" of TMCC as an example", but the information on the emergency alert (emergency alert) is The transmitting station may transmit using a transmission main signal (stream). At this time, regarding the transmission method of the control information such as TMCC, it is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned “for the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news), as an example, the “extended information” of TMCC is transmitted”. can do. FIG. 85 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device (terminal) when the transmitting station transmits the information of the emergency warning (emergency breaking news) by using the transmission main signal (stream).

In FIG. 85, the same components as those in FIGS. 78 and 84 are designated by the same reference numerals. 85 is different from FIG. 84 in that the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) information analysis unit EE101 receives the received data AA310. Otherwise, the configuration is the same and the operation is as described above, so description will be omitted.

The emergency alert (emergency alert) information analysis unit EE101 in FIG. 85 receives the control information AA320 as input, and determines whether or not the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted according to the value of Q ₀ . In addition, the value of R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ is used to judge the medium of the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), and based on the judgment, the message, video, still image, or audio is decoded, Generates emergency alert (emergency bulletin) message information, emergency alert (emergency bulletin) video still image, or emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information from emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information included in the reception data AA310. ,Output.

In this embodiment, a system including a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G is used. Although explained as an example, it is obvious that a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can be similarly implemented.

(Embodiment FF)
In the embodiment EE, the transmission of an emergency alert using voice using TMCC has been described. In this embodiment, an application example of the embodiment EE will be described.
As described in the embodiment EE, the method of transmitting the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) and the other information by using the TMCC has been described. In this embodiment, a sound output method to which the embodiment EE is applied will be described.

The configuration of TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.

As one example of the present embodiment, Q ₀ (start flag for emergency alert broadcast) in Table 25 described in the embodiment and R ₂ , R ₁ , R _{0 in} Table 26 described in the embodiment EE. (The information regarding the type of information (in the embodiment EE, it is described as the type of information of the emergency alert broadcast, but it is not limited to the emergency alert broadcast.)) is transmitted by the transmitting station (ground station). Be present.
At this time, the terminal can identify whether the information transmitted by TMCC is the information of the emergency alert broadcast or the information other than the emergency alert broadcast by Q ₀ .

As another example, Q ₀ (start flag for emergency alert broadcast) in Table 25 described in the embodiment, and R ₂ , R ₁ , R _{0 in} Table 26 described in the embodiment EE (related to the type of information) Information (the type of information of the emergency alert broadcast is described in the embodiment EE, but it is not limited to the emergency alert broadcast)), and S ₂ and S in Table 27 described in the embodiment EE. ₁ and S ₀ (information regarding the purpose of use of information (however, the purpose of use does not have to include an emergency alert (emergency warning))) is assumed to be transmitted by the (ground) transmitting station. To do.

At this time, the terminal can identify whether the information transmitted by TMCC is information of the emergency alert broadcast or information other than the emergency alert broadcast by Q ₀ and S ₂ , S ₁ , S _0. it can.
By any of the above methods, the terminal has a system capable of identifying whether the information transmitted using the TMCC area is the information of the emergency alert broadcast or the information other than the emergency alert broadcast. Think Then, let us consider a system in which “voice” (audio) can be designated as the information transmitted using the area of TMCC by R ₂ , R ₁ , and R ₀ (information regarding the type of information).

FIG. 86 shows an example of the configuration of the terminal according to the present embodiment, and those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 84 are assigned the same numbers. The difference between FIG. 86 and FIG. 84 is that the audio controller (EE103) receives the setting signal. Hereinafter, this part will be described in detail.
The present embodiment is characterized in that the audio output method can be controlled by a setting signal which is an input of the audio controller (EE103) in FIG.

In the embodiment EE, the transmission of information on the emergency alert (emergency alert) was dealt with, but in the present embodiment, the TMCC allows the use of “telegram information” or “video” other than the emergency alert (emergency alert). It deals with systems that can transmit information that belongs to "still images" or "audio" (audio). Therefore, in FIG. 86, the control information AA320 includes information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "voice" (audio) other than the emergency warning (emergency alert). It is assumed that Therefore, the audio (Audio) controller EE103 in FIG. 86 can obtain "audio" (audio) other than the emergency alert (emergency alert) from the input control information AA320. Note that this point is the same in FIG. 88 described later.

FIG. 87 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or a monitor, which relates to an audio output method that can be set by a setting signal.
In FIG. 87, for example, it is assumed that there are modes of "priority of program sound", "TMCC information sound priority", and "TMCC information sound priority in emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news)". (However, when it is displayed on the actual screen, another expression may be used even if it has the same content. Also, the modes displayed on the screen are "Prioritize program sound" and "TMCC information". It is not limited to "voice priority" and "TMCC information voice priority for emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news)", and another mode may exist, and "program voice has priority" and "TMCC information voice priority" It is not necessary to have all the modes of "TMCC information voice priority during emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news). The important point is that the audio output method can be set." It is as follows.

"Priority on program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as voice from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone or the like. Therefore, the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area is not prioritized as the output from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, or the like. As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"TMCC information voice priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, etc., over the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"Priority for TMCC information voice during emergency broadcast (Emergency breaking news)":
When the terminal selects this mode, the operation is as follows.
When the audio information of the emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted using the TMCC area, priority is given to outputting this audio information from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone or the like. (Therefore, it is not prioritized to output the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as voice from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, etc.)
When audio information other than emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted using the TMCC area, it is prioritized that the audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) is output as audio from a speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. To do. (Therefore, it is not prioritized to output voice information other than emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) as voice from the speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. using the TMCC area.)
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 86 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio (Audio) controller EE103 of FIG. 86 sets the priority order of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs the audio from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, etc. according to the set priority order. Will be done.

88 shows an example of the configuration of a terminal different from that in FIG. 86, and those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 85 are assigned the same numbers. Similar to FIG. 85, FIG. 88 shows the configuration of the terminal when the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) is being transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). )) The controller (EE103) receives the setting signal. Hereinafter, this part will be described in detail.

Similar to the above, the audio (audio) controller (EE103) of FIG. 88.
The feature is that the output method of the sound can be controlled by the setting signal which is the input of.
FIG. 89 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or a monitor regarding a sound output method that can be set by a setting signal.

In FIG. 89, for example, it is assumed that there are modes of "priority of program sound", "TMCC information sound priority", and "emergency broadcast (emergency breaking) sound priority during emergency broadcasting (emergency breaking)". (However, when displayed on the actual screen, another expression may be used even if the content is similar. Also, the modes displayed on the screen are "program sound priority" and "emergency broadcast". In case of (Emergency Bulletin), it is not limited to "Emergency broadcast (Emergency Bulletin) voice priority", and another mode may exist, and "Prioritize program voice", "TMCC information voice priority", "Emergency" It is not necessary to have all the modes of "Emergency broadcast (Emergency breaking) voice priority during broadcasting (Emergency breaking)". The important point is that the audio output method can be set.) It is as follows.

"Priority on program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as voice from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone or the like. Therefore, the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area is not prioritized as the output from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, or the like.
If the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), if the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the audio of the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted. Is output from a speaker, earphones, headphones, etc.
If the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), but the program you are watching is still being transmitted, the audio of the program you are watching is output from the speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. To be done.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"TMCC information voice priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, etc., over the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"Emergency Broadcast (Emergency Bulletin) Emergency Broadcast (Emergency Bulletin) Voice Priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the operation is as follows.
When voice information of emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), priority is given to outputting this voice information from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, or the like.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 88 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio (Audio) controller EE103 of FIG. 88 sets the priority order of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs the audio from the speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. according to the set priority order. Will be done.

As described above, by controlling the output of the sound according to the mode selected by the user, there is an advantage that the user can accurately hear the sound in the mode selected by the user. In addition, the user who prioritizes the "emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) sound" can listen to the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) sound accurately, which is effective in ensuring the safety of the selected user. You can also get it.

Next, an example of the operation in the case where the TMCC includes area information as described in the embodiment BB and the embodiment CC will be described with respect to the embodiment described above.
In the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, details of each mode described in FIG. 87 are as follows.

"Priority on program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as voice from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone or the like. Therefore, the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area is not prioritized as the output from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, or the like. As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"TMCC information voice priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, it operates as follows.
When the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted using the TMCC area from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, or the like.
When the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, priority is given to outputting the audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as a sound from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, or the like.
When the TMCC does not include area information, priority is given to outputting voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, or the like.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"Priority for TMCC information voice during emergency broadcast (Emergency breaking news)":
When the terminal selects this mode, the operation is as follows.
When transmitting voice information of emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) using the TMCC area, and if the region information included in the TMCC matches the region to which the terminal belongs, output this voice information from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. Prioritize.
If the audio information of emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted using the TMCC area and the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, output this audio information from a speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. Do not give priority. (Therefore, it is prioritized to output the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as voice from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, etc.)
When the audio information of the emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted using the TMCC area and the area information is not included in the TMCC, priority is given to outputting this audio information from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone or the like.
Then, when audio information other than emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted using the TMCC area, it is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) regardless of whether the TMCC includes regional information or not. Priority is given to outputting voice information as voice from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. (Therefore, it is not prioritized to output voice information other than emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) as voice from a speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. using the TMCC area.)
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 86 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio (Audio) controller EE103 of FIG. 86 sets the priority order of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs the audio from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, etc. according to the set priority order. Will be done.

In the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, details of each mode described in FIG. 89 are as follows.

"Priority on program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as voice from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone or the like. Therefore, the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area is not prioritized as the output from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, or the like.
If the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), if the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the audio of the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted. Is output from a speaker, earphones, headphones, etc.
If the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), but the program you are watching is still being transmitted, the audio of the program you are watching is output from the speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. To be done.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"TMCC information voice priority":
When the terminal selects this mode and the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted using the TMCC area from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, or the like. ..
When the terminal selects this mode and the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, outputting the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from the speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. is not prioritized. ..
When the terminal selects this mode and the TMCC does not include area information, priority is given to outputting voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, or the like.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of “priority”, a method of not outputting one voice and a method of giving a volume relationship to two voices can be considered.

"Emergency Broadcast (Emergency Bulletin) Emergency Broadcast (Emergency Bulletin) Voice Priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the operation is as follows.
Transmit the audio information of emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) by the transmission main signal (stream), and output the audio information from the speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. when the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs. Prioritize.
If the audio information of emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) and the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, output this audio information from the speaker, earphones, headphones, etc. Do not give priority.
When the audio information of the emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) and the area information is not included in the TMCC, priority is given to outputting this audio information from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone or the like.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 88 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio controller EE103 of FIG. 88 sets the priority order of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs the audio from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, etc. according to the set priority order.

In this embodiment, a system including a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G is used. Although explained as an example, it is obvious that a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can be similarly implemented.

(Embodiment GG)
In the embodiment FF, the setting method relating to audio has been described. In the present embodiment, a screen setting method of the terminal will be described.
The configuration of TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.
As one example of the present embodiment, Q ₀ (start flag for emergency alert broadcast) in Table 25 described in the embodiment and R ₂ , R ₁ , R _{0 in} Table 26 described in the embodiment EE. (The information regarding the type of information (in the embodiment EE, it is described as the type of information of the emergency alert broadcast, but it is not limited to the emergency alert broadcast.)) is transmitted by the transmitting station (ground station). Be present.

At this time, the terminal can identify whether the information transmitted by TMCC is the information of the emergency alert broadcast or the information other than the emergency alert broadcast by Q ₀ .
As another example, Q ₀ (start flag for emergency alert broadcast) in Table 25 described in the embodiment, and R ₂ , R ₁ , R _{0 in} Table 26 described in the embodiment EE (related to the type of information) Information (the type of information of the emergency alert broadcast is described in the embodiment EE, but it is not limited to the emergency alert broadcast)), and S ₂ and S in Table 27 described in the embodiment EE. ₁ and S ₀ (information regarding the purpose of use of information (however, the purpose of use does not have to include an emergency alert (emergency warning))) is assumed to be transmitted by the (ground) transmitting station. To do.

At this time, the terminal can identify whether the information transmitted by TMCC is information of the emergency alert broadcast or information other than the emergency alert broadcast by Q ₀ and S ₂ , S ₁ , S _0. it can.
By any of the above methods, the terminal has a system capable of identifying whether the information transmitted using the TMCC area is the information of the emergency alert broadcast or the information other than the emergency alert broadcast. Think Then, by using R ₂ , R ₁ , and R ₀ (information regarding the type of information), “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” can be designated as the information transmitted using the TMCC area. Think of the system.

FIG. 90 shows an example of the configuration of the terminal according to the present embodiment, and those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 75 are assigned the same numbers. A characteristic point of this embodiment is an emergency alert (emergency breaking news) information analysis unit GG101, a decoder GG102, and a screen controller GG103. Therefore, in the following, these parts will be described in detail.
In this embodiment, a particularly characteristic point is that the output method of the screen can be controlled by the setting signal which is an input of the screen controller (GG103) in FIG. Hereinafter, the description will be made in order.

In the embodiment EE, the transmission of information on the emergency alert (emergency alert) was dealt with, but in the present embodiment, the TMCC allows the use of “telegram information” or “video” other than the emergency alert (emergency alert). It deals with systems that can transmit information belonging to "still images" or "audio". Therefore, in FIG. 86, the control information AA320 may include information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” other than the emergency alert (emergency alert). And Therefore, the screen controller GG103 of FIG. 90 can obtain “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” other than the emergency warning (emergency breaking news) from the input control information AA320.

90 will be described, but the description of the parts that operate similarly to FIG. 75 will be omitted. The emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information analysis unit GG101 receives the control information AA320 and determines whether or not the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is transmitted. Then, the information medium of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is judged, and based on the judgment, a telegram, a video, or a still image. Alternatively, the audio is decoded, and from the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) included in the control information AA320, the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) message information, or the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) video (or) still image, or Generates and outputs emergency alert (emergency breaking news) voice information.
The decoder GG102 is a decoder related to moving images and audio, receives the received data AA310, and outputs audio data and video data.
The present embodiment is characterized in that a screen output method can be controlled by a setting signal which is an input of the screen controller (GG103) in FIG.

FIG. 91 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or a monitor, which relates to a screen output method that can be set by a setting signal.
In FIG. 91, for example, it is assumed that there are modes of “screen parallel display”, “TMCC information screen priority”, “TMCC information screen priority in emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news)”, and “broadcast screen priority”. (However, when it is displayed on the actual screen, another expression may be used even if it has the same content. Also, the modes displayed on the screen are "screen parallel display" and "TMCC information screen priority". It is not limited to "TMCC information screen priority in emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news)" and "broadcast screen priority", and another mode may exist, and "screen parallel display""TMCC information screen priority" It is not necessary to have all modes of "TMCC information screen priority during emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news)" and "broadcast screen priority". The important point is that the screen output method can be set.) Each mode The details of are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
When the terminal selects this mode, when the video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information" is displayed. "Video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, for example, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is displayed on screen #1 (GG201), and "Transmission main" is displayed on screen #2 (GG202). The image information (or the still image information) transmitted by the signal (stream) is displayed, and two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When "TMCC video information, still picture information, or electronic message information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. 93, the monitor G200 displays "video information transmitted by transmission main signal (stream)". (Or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)) is displayed.

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, when the video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the “TMCC video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information” is displayed. Display on the monitor with priority. Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
There are three methods for preferential display.

<Priority display method>
(First method):
When there is the first information and the second information, only one information is displayed on the monitor. For example, as shown in FIG. 93, on the monitor (GG200), the first information is displayed like the screen #1 (GG201), and the second information is not displayed. (The first information has priority.)

(Second method):
When there is the first information and the second information, the screen #1 (GG201) and the screen #2 (GG202) are displayed in an overlapping manner on the monitor. However, as shown in FIG. 94, the first information is displayed as the screen #1 (GG201) and the second information is displayed as the screen #2 (GG202), that is, the screen size is different. I shall. At this time, the screen size of the screen #1 is larger than that of the screen #2, and therefore the first information is the information to be prioritized.
Note that the screen size and screen position (vertical/horizontal) can be changed by setting, as in screen #2 in FIG. 94. (For the screen #1 as well, the size and position of the screen may be changeable.)

(Third method):
When there is the first information and the second information, the screen #1 (GG201) and the screen #2 (GG202) are displayed on the monitor without overlapping. However, as shown in FIG. 95, the first information is displayed as the screen #1 (GG201) and the second information is displayed as the screen #2 (GG202), that is, the screen size is different. I shall. At this time, the screen size of the screen #1 is larger than that of the screen #2, and therefore the first information is the information to be prioritized.
The screen size and the screen position (vertical/horizontal) of screen #1 and screen #2 in FIG. 95 can be changed by setting.

"Priority for TMCC information screen during emergency broadcast (Emergency breaking news)":
When the terminal selects this mode and the TMCC transmits the emergency alert (emergency alert) image information, the still image information, or the telegram information, “TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert) image” is displayed. Information, still image information, or message information" is displayed preferentially on the monitor.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information is not transmitted, the video information (or the video information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) is displayed on the monitor. , Still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in the TMCC, when video information other than an emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted, “video information transmitted by a transmission main signal (stream) (or still image) "Image information)" is prioritized, and display of video information other than TMCC emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or message information is not prioritized.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 90 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the screen controller GG103 of FIG. 90 sets the priority order of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority order.
96 shows an example of the configuration of a terminal different from that of FIG. 90, and those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 85 are assigned the same numbers. Similar to FIG. 85, FIG. 96 shows the configuration of the terminal when the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) is being transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). The difference from FIG. 85 is the screen controller (GG103). Is that the setting signal is input. Hereinafter, this part will be described in detail.
Similar to the above, the feature is that the output method of the screen can be controlled by the setting signal which is the input of the screen controller (GG103) of FIG.
FIG. 97 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or a monitor, which relates to a screen output method that can be set by a setting signal.
In FIG. 97, for example, it is assumed that there are modes of “screen parallel display”, “TMCC information screen priority”, “emergency broadcast (urgent breaking news) information screen priority of emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news)”, and “broadcast screen priority”. (However, when it is displayed on the actual screen, another expression may be used even if it has the same content. Also, the modes displayed on the screen are "screen parallel display" and "TMCC information screen priority". "In case of emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin), it is not limited to "information screen priority of emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)" and "broadcast screen priority", other modes may exist, and "screen parallel display" It is not necessary to have all modes of "TMCC information screen priority", "emergency broadcast (emergency breaking news) information screen priority for emergency broadcasting (emergency breaking news)", and "broadcast screen priority". The output method can be set.) The details of each mode are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
When the terminal selects this mode, when the video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information" is displayed. "Video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, for example, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is displayed on screen #1 (GG201), and "Transmission main" is displayed on screen #2 (GG202). The image information (or the still image information) transmitted by the signal (stream) is displayed, and two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When "TMCC video information, still picture information, or electronic message information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. 93, the monitor G200 displays "video information transmitted by transmission main signal (stream)". (Or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)) is displayed.
Also, if the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), if the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the screen of the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is displayed. Is displayed on the screen #1 (GG201) of the monitor G200, as shown in FIG.

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, when the video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the “TMCC video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information” is displayed. Display on the monitor with priority.
When emergency broadcast (urgent breaking news) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), when emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, emergency broadcasting instead of the program you are watching When (urgent breaking news) is transmitted, the screen of the emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Priority of information screen for emergency alert (emergency bulletin) during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
When the terminal selects this mode and the TMCC transmits the emergency alert (emergency alert) image information, the still image information, or the telegram information, “TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert) image” is displayed. Information, still image information, or message information" is displayed preferentially on the monitor.
When emergency broadcast (urgent breaking news) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), when emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, emergency broadcasting instead of the program you are watching When (urgent breaking news) is transmitted, the screen of the emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information is not transmitted, the video information (or the video information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) is displayed on the monitor. , Still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in the TMCC, when video information other than an emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted, “video information transmitted by a transmission main signal (stream) (or still image) "Image information)" is prioritized, and display of video information other than TMCC emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or message information is not prioritized.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 96 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the screen controller GG103 of FIG. 96 sets the priority order of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority order.

As described above, by controlling the output of the screen according to the mode selected by the user, there is an advantage that the user can accurately see the screen in the mode selected by the user. In addition, the user who prioritizes the "emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen" will be able to accurately see the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen, which has the effect of ensuring the safety of the selected user. You can also get it.
Next, an example of the operation in the case where the TMCC includes area information as described in the embodiment BB and the embodiment CC will be described with respect to the embodiment described above.
The details of each mode described in FIG. 91 in the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91 are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
When the terminal selects this mode, when the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, when video information, still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC “Video information, still image information, or electronic message information” and “Video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)” are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, for example, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is displayed on screen #1 (GG201), and "Transmission main" is displayed on screen #2 (GG202). The image information (or the still image information) transmitted by the signal (stream) is displayed, and two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When the area information included in the TMCC and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, as shown in FIG. 93, the “video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)” (screen) is displayed on the monitor G200. #1 (GG201)) is displayed.
If the area information included in the TMCC is not included, or if the video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, “If the image information of the TMCC, the still image information, or the electronic message is transmitted,” "Information" and "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When "TMCC video information, still picture information, or electronic message information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. 93, the monitor G200 displays "video information transmitted by transmission main signal (stream)". (Or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)) is displayed.

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and when video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the "Video information, still image information, or electronic message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, and video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the message "Transmit main signal (stream)" is sent to the monitor. Video information (or still image information)” displayed.
When the image information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC when the area information included in the TMCC is not included, “the image information of the TMCC or the still image information or the electronic message is displayed. Information is displayed on the monitor with priority.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Priority for TMCC information screen during emergency broadcast (Emergency breaking news)":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and the TMCC transmits the image information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information. In the case of being performed, "the image information of the TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
When the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, and when the image information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the message "Transmitter Video information (or still image information) transmitted as a signal (stream)" is preferentially displayed.
When the image information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC when the area information included in the TMCC is not included, “the image information of the TMCC or the still image information or the electronic message is displayed. Information is displayed on the monitor with priority.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information is not transmitted, the video information (or the video information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) is displayed on the monitor. , Still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in the TMCC, when video information other than an emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted, “video information transmitted by a transmission main signal (stream) (or still image) "Image information)" is prioritized, and display of video information other than TMCC emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or message information is not prioritized.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 90 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the screen controller GG103 of FIG. 90 sets the priority order of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority order.

The details of each mode described in FIG. 97 in the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97 are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
When the terminal selects this mode, when the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, when video information, still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC “Video information, still image information, or electronic message information” and “Video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)” are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, for example, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is displayed on screen #1 (GG201), and "Transmission main" is displayed on screen #2 (GG202). The image information (or the still image information) transmitted by the signal (stream) is displayed, and two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When the area information included in the TMCC and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, as shown in FIG. 93, the “video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)” (screen) is displayed on the monitor G200. #1 (GG201)) is displayed.
If the area information included in the TMCC is not included, or if the video information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, “If the image information of the TMCC, the still image information, or the electronic message is transmitted,” "Information" and "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When "TMCC video information, still picture information, or electronic message information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. 93, the monitor G200 displays "video information transmitted by transmission main signal (stream)". (Or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)) is displayed.
Also, if the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), if the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the screen of the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is displayed. Is displayed on the screen #1 (GG201) of the monitor G200, as shown in FIG.

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and when video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the "Video information, still image information, or electronic message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, and video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the message "Transmit main signal (stream)" is sent to the monitor. Video information (or still image information)” displayed.
When the image information, the still image information, or the electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC when the area information included in the TMCC is not included, “the image information of the TMCC or the still image information or the electronic message is displayed. Information is displayed on the monitor with priority.
When emergency broadcast (urgent breaking news) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), when emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, emergency broadcasting instead of the program you are watching When (urgent breaking news) is transmitted, the screen of the emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Priority of information screen for emergency alert (emergency bulletin) during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and the TMCC transmits the image information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information. In the case of being performed, "the image information of the TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
When the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, and when the image information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the message "Transmitter Video information (or still image information) transmitted as a signal (stream)" is preferentially displayed.
If the area information included in the TMCC is not included, and the image information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the telegram information is transmitted in the TMCC, the message “Tmcc emergency alert (emergency alert) ) Video information, still image information, or message information” is displayed preferentially on the monitor.
When emergency broadcast (urgent breaking news) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), when emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, emergency broadcasting instead of the program you are watching When (urgent breaking news) is transmitted, the screen of the emergency broadcasting (urgent breaking news) is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information of the emergency alert (emergency alert), the still image information, or the electronic message information is not transmitted, the video information (or the video information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) is displayed on the monitor. , Still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in the TMCC, when video information other than an emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted, “video information transmitted by a transmission main signal (stream) (or still image) "Image information)" is prioritized, and display of video information other than TMCC emergency alert (urgent alert), still image information, or message information is not prioritized.
Then, in the TMCC, when the video information, the still image information, or the telegram information is not transmitted, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 96 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the screen controller GG103 of FIG. 96 sets the priority order of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority order.

In the above description, the TMCC transmits "video information of an emergency alert (emergency alert), still image information, or message information" or "video information, still image information, or message information". I explained. In particular, when the transmitting station transmits "still image information" and "telegram information", the terminal does not depend on the terminal for the display processing, specifically the processing for the display time on the monitor, even if the terminal obtains this information. Therefore, the broadcasting system does not spread information to terminals in a wide, accurate, and fair manner.
Therefore, it is proposed that the transmitting station transmits the information about the time displayed on the screen by the terminal when transmitting the "still image information or electronic message information" in TMCC.

Table 28 shows an example of the relationship between Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ and display time. In Table 28, Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ is information regarding the display time transmitted using TMCC. (However, although the information of 3 bits is used here, it is not limited to this.)
When the transmitting station transmits “000” as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of “still image information or message information” transmitted using TMCC is 1 minute.
Similarly, the transmitting station
When 001 is sent as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 2 minutes,
When "010" is transmitted as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" transmitted using TMCC is 3 minutes,
When "011" is transmitted as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" transmitted using TMCC is 4 minutes,
When "100" is transmitted as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" transmitted using TMCC is 5 minutes,
When "101" is transmitted as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" transmitted using TMCC is 10 minutes,
When "110" is transmitted as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" transmitted using TMCC is 30 minutes,
When “111” is transmitted as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of “still image information or message information” transmitted using TMCC is 60 minutes.

However, the terminal does not necessarily have to adhere to the display time obtained with Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ . For example, when the user sets the display cancellation of the “still image information or electronic message information” transmitted using TMCC, the “still image information or electronic message information” transmitted using TMCC is displayed. You may cancel the display.
Also, using TMCC, the first “still image information or message information” and Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ are transmitted from the transmitting station, and the first “still image information or message information” Consider a case where the second “still image information or electronic message information” is transmitted from the transmitting station within the display time. In this case, the terminal is within the display time of the first “still image information or message information”, but when the second “still image information or message information” is obtained, the second “ Still image information or electronic message information" may be displayed.

However, in this case, the transmitting station may store the first “still image information or message information” within the time set by Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ .
That is, in Table 28, by transmitting Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , it may be interpreted that the accumulation time of the “still image information or message information” transmitted using TMCC is set. Therefore, after the accumulation time, the “still image information or electronic message information” transmitted using TMCC will be deleted from the terminal.

In this case, when a plurality of “still image information or electronic message information transmitted using TMCC” is accumulated in the terminal, the user using the terminal displays “transmitted using TMCC” on the monitor. Still image information or electronic message information" is selected.
Further, as another method, the TMCC transmits a display start flag along with the transmission of the “still image information or message information”. (However, the display start flag may be transmitted in a frame different from the frame in which the “still image information or message information” is transmitted.) After that, a display end flag for ending the display is transmitted to the transmitting station. May be transmitted.

In this way, by setting the display time or the accumulation time of "still image information or message information transmitted using TMCC", "still image information or message information transmitted using TMCC" is set. It is possible to provide a broadcasting system that transmits information to terminals in a wide, accurate, and fair manner as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of ensuring the safety of the selected user.
In this embodiment, a system including a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G is used. Although explained as an example, it is obvious that a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can be similarly implemented.

(Embodiment HH)
In the embodiment AA, the embodiment BB, the embodiment CC, the embodiment DD, the embodiment EE, the embodiment FF, and the embodiment GG, information of emergency broadcast (emergency alert) is used by using TMCC. It has been described to send. In the present embodiment, a more specific transmission method of emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information will be described.
As described in Embodiment FF and Embodiment GG, the transmitting station needs to transmit accurately to the terminal because of the role of the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a method for accurately transmitting the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) will be described (since it is likely to aim to ensure the safety of the user).

In the present embodiment, for example, as described in the embodiment FF and the embodiment GG, an emergency broadcast (emergency alert) belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” is given. Consider a case where the transmitting station uses the TMCC to transmit information or information other than the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio".
At this time, it is unlikely that one frame of TMCC can transmit information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “voice”, or the like. Therefore, when the transmitting station transmits to the terminal the number of frames (however, only the TMCC area is used) necessary for transmitting the information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio", etc. Good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 98, 3 frames (however, only the TMCC area is used) are required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” to the terminal. Suppose At this time, information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “audio”, etc. is divided into “first division information”, “second division information”, and “third division information” to obtain the first division information. It is assumed that the "first division information" is transmitted in the frame, the "second division information" is transmitted in the second frame, and the "third division information" is transmitted in the third frame. Note that in FIG. 98, the horizontal axis represents time.

At this time, the TMCC includes information other than information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" and information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio". Since the TMCC contains information and is data after error correction coding, for example, when a systematic code such as LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) code is used, it is composed of information and parity. ing. Therefore, the "first division information" is a part of the "first TMCC", the "second division information" is a part of the "second TMCC", and the "third division information" is the "first". Of the TMCC”. Then, the "first TMCC" is transmitted in the first frame, the "second TMCC" is transmitted in the second frame, and the "third TMCC" is transmitted in the third frame.

Table 29 shows the relationship between δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and the number of frames (the number of required TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio”, Table 30 shows the relationship between ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and the numbers of frames transmitting information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice”.
From Table 29, δ ₀ δ ₁ when the number of frames (the number of necessary TMCCs) necessary for transmitting information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio” is ₁ Set δ ₂ =“000”.

Similarly, when the number of frames (the number of necessary TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “audio”, etc. is 2, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ Set ₂ = "001".
When the number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio” is 3, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set it to 010”.
When the number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio” is 4, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set it to 011”.
When the number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” is 5, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set it to 100”.
When the number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio” is 6, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set to 101”.
When the number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio” is 7, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set it to 110”.
When the number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 8, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set it to 111”.

In this example, three bits of δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ are used, but the configuration is not limited to this.
The number of bits required to notify the terminal of the number of frames (the number of required TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 2 It may be more than a bit.
Note that the table 30 will be described in detail when the example of FIG. 98 is described.
The TMCC information includes δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ in Table 29 and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε _{2 in} Table 30. Therefore, the transmitting station determines that the transmitting station has δ ₀ δ ₁ δ _{2 in} Table 29 and Table 30. ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ is transmitted together with information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “voice”, or the like.

Next, setting values of δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ in Table 29 and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε _{2 in} Table 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 98 as an example.
In FIG. 98, information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is divided into "first division information", "second division information" and "third division information", and the first Frame, the “first division information” (“first TMCC”) is transmitted, the second frame transmits the “second division information” (“second TMCC”), and the third frame transmits the “first division information” (“second TMCC”). The third division information"("thirdTMCC") is transmitted. That is, three frames are required to transmit information that belongs to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “voice”, or the like. Therefore, from Table 29, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“ 010” is set. Then, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“ 010” is transmitted by the “ _first TMCC” transmitted in the first frame. Similarly, to transmit the second frame to transmit the "second TMCC" in _{δ 0 δ 1 δ 2 = "} 010", the "third TMCC" be transmitted in the third frame [delta] ₀ [delta] ₁ [delta] ₂ = Transmit "010".

Table 30 shows ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice”.
It is the relationship of the numbers of the frames transmitting the information that belongs to, etc. Accordingly, since the transmission to "first division information" in the first frame, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ = set to "000", "first TMCC" in _{ε 0 ε 1 ε 2 = "} 000 ”Is transmitted.
Similarly, in the second frame, since the transmission of the "second division information", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ = set to "001", the "second TMCC" ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ = Transmit "001".
Then, in the third frame, since the transmission of "third division information", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ = set to "010", "third TMCC" in ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ = " 010” is transmitted.
That is, in the case of FIG. 98, information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and "Yth division information" is obtained. (Y is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less), 3 bits of ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ at which the frame number in Table 30 is the “Yth frame” are used as a part of the TMCC and the transmitting station. To send.

(However, in this example, it is composed of 3 bits of ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ but is not limited to this, and belongs to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice”, etc. The number of bits required to notify the terminal of the number of the frame transmitting information may be two or more.)
By obtaining δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ , the terminal can know the number of frames required to obtain information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice”. Then, by obtaining ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ , it is possible to know how many frames of the required number of frames have been received.
Next, an embodiment different from FIG. 98 will be described.
Due to the role of emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information, the transmitting station needs to transmit accurately to the terminal. As shown in FIG. 98, in the case of transmission, if the terminal cannot correctly obtain any of the “first division information”, the “second division information”, and the “third division information”, an emergency broadcast (emergency alert) It becomes difficult to provide the content to the user. Therefore, it is important to apply a method capable of receiving all the "first division information", "second division information" and "third division information" as accurately as possible. Especially, when the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) is "still image", "audio" or "telegram information", all the "first division information", "second division information" and "third division information" are possible. It is hoped to apply the method that can be received correctly. (In the case of video, there is a possibility that an emergency broadcast (emergency alert) will be transmitted even if part of the video in the middle cannot be reproduced.)

Therefore, we propose a method in which the transmitting station repeatedly transmits "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information" so that the terminal can obtain information more accurately.
Table 31 shows the relationship between σ ₀ σ ₁ and the number of repetitions. Note that σ ₀ σ ₁ will be transmitted by the transmitting station as part of the TMCC information.

Table 31 has the following meaning.
When the number of repetitions is 1, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“00” is set, and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“00”.
When the number of repetitions is set to 2, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01” is set, and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01”.
When the number of repetitions is 3, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“10” is set, and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“10”.
When the number of repetitions is 4, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“11” is set, and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“11”.
Although it is configured with 2 bits like σ ₀ σ ₁ , it is not limited to this, and the required number of bits will change according to the maximum number of repetitions supported by the transmitting station.

FIG. 99 shows the state of frame transmission when the number of repetitions is two. Note that in FIG. 99, the horizontal axis represents time.
Note that, as in the case of FIG. 98, "video information of emergency broadcast (emergency alert), still image information, or message information" is replaced with "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information". , And the terminal obtains “first division information”, “second division information”, and “third division information” to obtain “emergency broadcast (emergency alert) video information, still image information, or It is possible to generate "telegram information".

Therefore, the "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) image information, still image information, or message information" is divided into three and repeated twice, so "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) image information or The number of frames required to transmit the still image information or the electronic message information is 3×2=6. Therefore, in FIG. 99,
"First division information in the first frame"
"Second division information in the second frame"
"Third division information in the third frame"
"First division information in the fourth frame"
"Second division information in the fifth frame"
"Third division information in sixth frame"
Is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
“In the first frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the second frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the third frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the fourth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“011”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the fifth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“100”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the sixth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“101”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
(This transmission method is called a "first repeating method".)

Note that the frame transmission state when the number of repetitions is two is not limited to that in FIG. 99, and another transmission order may be used. As an example, FIG. 100 shows the state of frame transmission when the number of repetitions is two. Note that in FIG. 100, the horizontal axis represents time.

In FIG. 100,
"First division information in the first frame"
"First division information in the second frame"
"Second division information in the third frame"
"Second division information in the fourth frame"
"Third division information in the fifth frame"
"Third division information in sixth frame"
Is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
“In the first frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the second frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the third frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the fourth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“011”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the fifth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“100”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
“In the sixth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“101”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01””
(This transmission method is called a "second repeating method".)

Although the “first iterative method” and the “second iterative method” have been described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the order of transmitting the division information is not limited to those in FIGS. 99 and 100. The value of ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ also needs to be associated with the order in which the division information is transmitted.
In the above, an example has been described in which TMCC transmits δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ . Hereinafter, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ in place in the _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2, ε 0 instead of _{ε 1 ε 2 ε' 0 ε} '1 ε' how to transmit ₂ with TMCC be described.

Table 32 shows the number of frames required to transmit δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ and information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” without repeating ( The relationship of the required number of TMCCs), ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ and information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” are transmitted in Table 33 without repeating. Shows the relationship between the numbers of the frames being transmitted.

As shown in Table 32, the number of frames required to transmit information that belongs to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” (assuming that the required TMCC When the number of) is 1, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“000” is set. It should be noted that as will be described later in detail, the process may be repeated. The setting of δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ when repeated is also described later in detail.
Similarly, the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) for transmitting information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" assuming that repetition is not performed. When is 2, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“001” is set.
The number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 3 when it is assumed that it is not repeated. At this time, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010” is set.
The number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 4 At this time, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 011” is set.
The number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 5 Then, set δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 100”.
The number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 6 when it is assumed that repetition is not performed. Then, set δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 101”.
The number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 7 At this time, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 110” is set.
The number of frames (the required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is 8 Then, set δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 111”.

In this example, 3 bits of δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ are used, but the present invention is not limited to this. “Electronic message information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice”, etc. The number of bits required to notify the terminal of the number of frames (the number of required TMCCs) required to transmit the information belonging to (1) on the assumption that it is not repeated may be two or more.
The table 33 will be described in detail when the example of FIG. 98 is described.

The TMCC information includes δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ in Table 32 and ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ _{2 in} Table 33. Therefore, the transmitting station determines that δ′ ₀ δ in Table 32. _'1 δ' ε ₂ and Table 33 _'0 ε' ₁
ε′ ₂ is transmitted together with information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “voice”, or the like.
Next, setting values of δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ in Table 32 and ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ in Table 33 will be described with reference to FIG. 98 as an example.

In FIG. 98, information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is divided into "first division information", "second division information" and "third division information", and the first Frame, the “first division information” (“first TMCC”) is transmitted, the second frame transmits the “second division information” (“second TMCC”), and the third frame transmits the “first division information” (“second TMCC”). The third division information"("thirdTMCC") is transmitted. That is, three frames are required to transmit information that belongs to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “voice”, or the like. Therefore, from Table 32, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010” is set. Then, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010” is transmitted by the “ _first TMCC” transmitted in the first frame. Similarly, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010” is transmitted by the “ _second TMCC” transmitted in the second frame, and δ′ is transmitted by the “third TMCC” transmitted in the third frame. transmitting _{0 δ '1 δ' 2 =} "010".

Table 33 shows the frames being transmitted when ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ and information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “voice” is transmitted without repeating. It is the relationship of the numbers.
Therefore, since the “first division information” is transmitted in the first frame, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000” is set, and ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ is set in the “first TMCC”. to transmit the ε _'2 = "000".
Similarly, in the second frame, since the “second division information” is transmitted, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001” is set and ε′ ₀ ε is set in the “second TMCC”. transmitting _{'1 ε' 2 = "001} ".
Then, in the third frame, since “third division information” is transmitted, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′
₂ =“010” is set, and ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010” is transmitted by the “third TMCC”.

That is, in the case of FIG. 98, information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio” is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and “Yth division information” is obtained. "(Y is an integer 1 or Y) in the frame for transmitting the 3 bit frame number" of the Y frame "become _{ε '0 ε' 1 ε '} 2 of Table 33 as part of the information of the TMCC , The transmitting station transmits.
(However, in this _{example, ε '0 ε' 1 ε} ' not but ₂ is constituted by 3 bits limited to this, "message information" or "image" or "still picture" or "voice" The required number of bits for notifying the terminal of the frame number of the frame transmitting the information belonging to the above may be two or more.)

The terminal _{then, δ '0 δ' 1 δ} '2 to obtain a, when there is no repetition, "message information"
Or it is possible to know the number of frames required to achieve the "Video" or "still picture" or "voice" information belonging to such, and, to obtain a _{ε '0 ε' 1 ε '} 2, required frame It is possible to know how many of the frames have been received.

Next, an embodiment different from FIG. 98 will be described.
Due to the role of emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information, the transmitting station needs to transmit accurately to the terminal. As shown in FIG. 98, in the case of transmission, if the terminal cannot correctly obtain any of the “first division information”, the “second division information”, and the “third division information”, an emergency broadcast (emergency alert) It becomes difficult to provide the content to the user. Therefore, it is important to apply a method capable of receiving all the "first division information", "second division information" and "third division information" as accurately as possible. Especially, when the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) is "still image", "audio" or "telegram information", all the "first division information", "second division information" and "third division information" are possible. It is hoped to apply the method that can be received correctly. (In the case of video, there is a possibility that an emergency broadcast (emergency alert) will be transmitted even if part of the video in the middle cannot be reproduced.)
Therefore, in order to enable the terminal to obtain information more correctly, the transmitting station repeatedly transmits "information on emergency broadcast (emergency alert)".

The relationship between σ ₀ σ ₁ and the number of repetitions is as shown in Table 31, and the details are as described above.
FIG. 99 shows the state of frame transmission when the number of repetitions is two. Note that in FIG. 99, the horizontal axis represents time.
Note that, as in the case of FIG. 98, "video information of emergency broadcast (emergency alert), still image information, or message information" is replaced with "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information". , And the terminal obtains “first division information”, “second division information”, and “third division information” to obtain “emergency broadcast (emergency alert) video information, still image information, or It is possible to generate "telegram information".

Therefore, the "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) image information, still image information, or message information" is divided into three and repeated twice, so "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) image information or The number of frames required to transmit the still image information or the electronic message information is 3×2=6. Therefore, in FIG. 99,
"First division information in the first frame"
"Second division information in the second frame"
"Third division information in the third frame"
"First division information in the fourth frame"
"Second division information in the fifth frame"
"Third division information in sixth frame"
Is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ and ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
"In the first frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 000 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the second frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 001 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the third frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 010 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the fourth frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 000 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the fifth frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 001 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
“In the sixth frame, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010”, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
"01""
(This transmission method is called a "third repeating method".)

In the above-described iterative method, the number of iterations is two, so σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01”.
The number of frames (the number of required TMCCs) necessary for transmitting information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “audio”, etc. without repetition is three. , Δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010”.

“First division information in the first frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000” from the relationship of Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the first frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000”” is transmitted.
“Second division information in the second frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001” from the relationship in Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the second frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001”” is transmitted.
“Third division information in the third frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010” from the relationship in Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the third frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010”” is transmitted.
“First division information in the fourth frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000” from the relationship of Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the fourth frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000”” is transmitted.
“The second division information is transmitted in the fifth frame”, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001” from the relationship of Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the fifth frame” ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001”” is transmitted.
“Third division information in the sixth frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010” from the relationship in Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the sixth frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010”” is transmitted.

That is, in the case of FIG. 99, information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and "Yth division information" is obtained. (Where Y is an integer equal to or greater than 1 and equal to or less than Y), 3 bits of ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ at which the frame number in Table 33 is the “Yth frame” are used as part of the TMCC information. The transmitting station transmits.

The state of frame transmission when the number of repetitions is two is not limited to that in FIG. 99, and another transmission order may be used. As an example, FIG. 100 shows the state of frame transmission when the number of repetitions is two. Note that in FIG. 100, the horizontal axis represents time.
In FIG. 100,
"First division information in the first frame"
"First division information in the second frame"
"Second division information in the third frame"
"Second division information in the fourth frame"
"Third division information in the fifth frame"
"Third division information in sixth frame"
Is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ and ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
"In the first frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 000 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the second frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 000 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the third frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 001 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the fourth frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 001 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
"In the fifth frame _{δ '0 δ' 1 δ '} 2 =" 010 ", ε' 0 ε '1 ε' 2 =" 010 ", σ 0 σ 1 =
"01""
“In the sixth frame, δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010”, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
"01""
(This transmission method is called a "fourth repetition method".)

In the above-described iterative method, the number of iterations is two, so σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01”.
The number of frames (the number of required TMCCs) necessary for transmitting information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “audio”, etc. without repetition is three. , Δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ =“ 010”.

“First division information in the first frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000” from the relationship of Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the first frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000”” is transmitted.
“The first division information is transmitted in the second frame”, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000” from the relationship in Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the second frame” ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“000”” is transmitted.
"In the third frame the second division information" and transmits this time, from the relationship of the table _{33, ε '0 ε' 1} ε '2 = "001" , and the "in the third frame epsilon' ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001”” is transmitted.
“The second division information is transmitted in the fourth frame”, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001” from the relation of Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the fourth frame” ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“001”” is transmitted.
“Third division information in the fifth frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010” from the relationship in Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the fifth frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010”” is transmitted.
“Third division information in the sixth frame” is transmitted, and at this time, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010” from the relationship in Table 33, and “ε′ ₀ in the sixth frame”. ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ =“010”” is transmitted.

That is, in the case of FIG. 100, information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still image”, “voice”, etc. is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and “Yth division information” is obtained. (Where Y is an integer equal to or greater than 1 and equal to or less than Y), 3 bits of ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ at which the frame number in Table 33 is the “Yth frame” are used as part of the TMCC information. The transmitting station transmits.
Although the “third repetition method” and the “fourth repetition method” have been described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the order of transmitting the division information is not limited to those in FIGS. 99 and 100. Then, the values of ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ also need to be associated according to the order in which the division information is transmitted.

Next, the relationship between division information and other TMCC information will be described in detail. As described above, the division information is, for example, “video information of emergency broadcast (emergency alert), still image information, or message information”, “first division information”, “second division information”. When divided into “third division information”, it means each division information of “first division information”, “second division information”, and “third division information”. (For example, the "first division information" is division information.)

FIG. 101 shows an example of a TMCC generation method to be transmitted in each frame.
First, the "division information" and "other TMCC information" form all the TMCC information. It should be noted that, in the above description, in addition to the division information, information to be transmitted by TMCC (for example, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ (or δ′ ₀ δ′ ₁ δ′ ₂ ), ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ (or ε′ ₀ ε′) _{1 ε '2), σ 0} σ 1) is to be included in other TMCC information.
Then, as shown in FIG. 101, BCH (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem) encoding and null data insertion are performed on the “division information” and the “other TMCC information”, and the “division information”, the “other TMCC information”, and the “other TMCC information” are inserted. Information for performing LDPC coding composed of "BCH parity" and "null data" is generated. The null data is, for example, data composed of a plurality of "0"s. (The configuration method of null data is not limited to this, and may be data predetermined by the transmitting station and the terminal.)

Then, as shown in FIG. 101, LDPC coding is performed on the “division information”, “other TMCC information”, “BCH parity”, and “null data” to generate “parity” (see FIG. 101). Therefore, in FIG. 101, “division information”, “other TMCC information”, “BCH parity”, “null data”, and “parity” are data after LDPC coding. (Here, it is assumed that a block code is handled as the LDPC code.)
Among the “division information”, “other TMCC information”, “BCH parity”, “null data”, and “parity”, the terminal knows the “null data” inserted by the transmitting station, so the transmitting station deletes the “null data”. , “Division information”, “other TMCC information”, “BCH parity”, and “parity” will be transmitted.

The configuration of each unit that realizes FIG. 101 will be described. The configuration of the transmitting station is as described in the other embodiments and is as described with reference to FIGS. 7, 39, 41, 42, 71, and the like. In the following, a configuration example of the part related to TMCC generation in FIG. 101 will be described.
In FIG. 102, the BCH encoding unit (HH102) receives the control signal HH101, extracts the TMCC information (“division information” and “other TMCC information” in FIG. 101) included in the control signal HH101, and extracts the BCH code. And outputs the data (HH103) after BCH coding (“division information”, “other TMCC information”, and “BCH parity” in FIG. 101).

The null data insertion unit (HH104) receives the data (HH103) after BCH encoding, inserts null data (corresponding to the null data in FIG. 101), and inserts the null data (HH105) (“division information” in FIG. 101). "Other TMCC information""BCHparity""nulldata") is output.
The LDPC encoding unit HH106 receives the data (HH105) after the insertion of null data, encodes the LDPC code, and the data after the LDPC encoding (HH107) (“division information” “other TMCC information” in FIG. 101). "BCH parity""nulldata""parity") is output.

The null data deletion unit HH108 receives the LDPC encoded data (HH107), deletes the null data ((“null data” in FIG. 101), and deletes the null data HH109 (“division information” in FIG. 101 “others”). TMCC information", "BCH parity", "parity") is output, and the data HH109 ("division information" "other TMCC information" "BCH parity" "parity" in FIG. 101) after null data deletion is transmitted as TMCC. The station will transmit.

Next, FIG. 103 shows the configuration of the part related to TMCC generation different from that in FIG. 103 is different from FIG. 102 in that the order of arrangement of the BCH encoding unit HH102 and the null data insertion unit HH104 is different.

In FIG. 103, the null data insertion unit HH104 receives the control signal HH101 as input, extracts TMCC information (“division information” and “other TMCC information” in FIG. 101) included in the control signal HH101, and null data (FIG. 101). (Corresponding to the null data) and the data (HH201) after the null data insertion (“division information” “other TMCC information” “null data” in FIG. 101) is output.
The BCH encoding unit HH102 receives the data (HH201) after null data insertion as input, performs BCH encoding, and the data (HH202) after BCH encoding (“division information”, “other TMCC information”, and “BCH” in FIG. 101). "Parity""nulldata") is output.

LDPC encoding section HH106 receives BCH-encoded data (HH202) as input, encodes LDPC code, and LDPC-encoded data (HH107) (“division information” “other TMCC information in FIG. 101”). “BCH parity” “null data” “parity”) is output.
The null data deletion unit HH108 receives the LDPC-coded data (HH107), deletes the null data ((“null data” in FIG. 101), and deletes the null data HH109 (“division information” in FIG. 101 “others”). TMCC information", "BCH parity", "parity") is output, and the data HH109 ("division information""other TMCC information""BCHparity""parity" in FIG. 101) after null data deletion is transmitted as TMCC. The station will transmit.

FIG. 104 shows an example of the configuration of the control information estimating unit (TMCC information estimating unit) in the receiving device of the terminal described with reference to FIGS.
The log-likelihood ratio insertion unit HH302 for null data receives the log-likelihood ratio (HH301) of the TMCC unit obtained by demapping and inputs the log-likelihood ratio of null data corresponding to “null data” in FIG. It is inserted into the log-likelihood ratio, and the log-likelihood ratio (HH303) after insertion of the log-likelihood ratio for null data is output.

The belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) (HH304) receives the log-likelihood ratio (HH303) after insertion of the log-likelihood ratio for null data as an input, and, for example, sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP decoding, Belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as Normalized BP decoding, Offset BP decoding, min-sum decoding, Layered BP decoding, etc. is performed to obtain decoded data (“division information” “other TMCC in FIG. 101”). Information” “BCH parity” “null data” “parity” estimated data) (HH305) is output.

The BCH decoding unit (HH306) receives the decoded data HH305 as input, performs error correction of the TMCC information by performing BCH decoding, and estimates the TMCC information (estimated data of "division information" and "other TMCC information" in FIG. 101). ) (HH307) is output.
As described above, the transmitting station creates TMCC data. At this time, the “third iterative method” when the “first iterative method”, the “second iterative method”, the “third iterative method”, and the “fourth iterative method” described above are applied. , "Fourth iteration method" will be described.

When considering a standard based on "Transmission system standard for advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 1.0 version", for example, embodiment AA, embodiment BB, embodiment CC, embodiment DD, In the embodiment EE, the embodiment GG, and the present embodiment, the contents of the data of the TMCC information other than the TMCC extension information (“extension identification” and “extension area”) do not change rapidly, that is, , It is very unlikely that it will change on a frame-by-frame basis.

Therefore, for example, when the “third repetition method” is used, the TMCC data of the “first frame” in the “first frame” and the “fourth frame” that transmit the “first division information” There is a very high possibility that the TMCC data of and “the fourth frame” will be the same.
Similarly, in the "second frame" and the "fifth frame" transmitting the "second division information", the TMCC data of the "second frame" and the TMCC data of the "fifth frame" are the same. Very likely to be.
In the "third frame" and the "sixth frame" that transmit the "third division information", the TMCC data of the "third frame" and the TMCC data of the "sixth frame" can be the same. It has a very high quality.

Then, the transmitting station may accumulate the TMCC data of the "first frame" and transmit the accumulated data in the "fourth frame". There is an advantage that can be reduced.
Similarly, the transmitting station may store the TMCC data of the “second frame” and transmit the stored data in the “fifth frame”. The data may be accumulated and the accumulated data may be transmitted in the “sixth frame”.
Similarly, the “fourth iterative method” has an advantage that the number of times of processing related to error correction coding can be reduced.

When considering an error due to a decrease in the received electric field strength of the terminal due to radio, using the “first iterative method” and the “third iterative method” may reduce the possibility of erroneous TMCC data. Is high.
When any of the "first iterative method" and the "third iterative method" is used, the "first division information" is not transmitted in adjacent frames. The same applies to the “second division information” and the “third division information”. Therefore, the possibility of being affected by a burst error due to a decrease in the received electric field strength of the terminal is reduced. Therefore, using the “first iterative method” and the “third iterative method” reduces the possibility of erroneous TMCC data. The more likely you are to be.

In the present embodiment, the method for accurately transmitting the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) to the terminal has been described. By carrying out various examples of the present embodiment, the terminal can obtain the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) accurately, and thus the safety of the user can be enhanced. Can be obtained.
In addition, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment B, the embodiment C, the embodiment D, the embodiment E, the embodiment F, and the embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are included. Although the system has been described as an example, a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can of course be implemented in the same manner.

(Embodiment II)
In the above-described embodiments, an example of transmitting emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information, message information, video information, still image information, and audio information using TMCC has been described.
In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which a terminal that has obtained information such as emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information, message information, video information, still image information, and audio information transmits to another device.

In this specification, as an example, in each satellite, control information such as TMCC is transmitted, and a terminal, a communication system, a relay system, and the like using the control information are described in each embodiment. The transmission station transmits control information such as TMCC by a system such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, and mobile broadcasting. Each embodiment described in the manual may be implemented. Regarding this point, the present embodiment is also the same.
Then, the configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are as described in the embodiment AA, and using the TMCC, information on an emergency alert (emergency breaking news), message information, video information, The method of transmitting the still image information and the audio information is the same as that described in Embodiment AA or later, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.
FIG. 105 shows the relationship between a receiving terminal that receives a modulated signal including control information such as TMCC transmitted from the transmitting station and other devices.

In FIG. 105, terminal II 103 receives a modulated signal transmitted by a transmitting station and relayed by a repeater, for example, at antenna II 101, and obtains received signal II 102. Then, the terminal II 103 extracts the control information (TMCC) included in the received signal II 102. Then, as described in the other embodiments, it is assumed that the terminal II 103 has obtained the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) transmitted using the TMCC. Then, the terminal II 103 outputs, for example, the modulated signal II 104 including the information related to the emergency alert (emergency alert) from the antenna II 105. At this time, as the wireless communication system, for example, Wi-Fi (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), Gigbee, etc. can be considered (however. , These are not the only ones.) In addition, the terminal II 103 outputs a signal II 106 containing information related to an emergency alert (emergency breaking news). At this time, it is assumed that the signal is a signal based on a wired communication method such as signal II106 Ethernet (registered trademark), USB (Universal Serial Bus), PLC (Power Line Communication), and HDMI (registered trademark) (High-Definition Multimedia Interface). (However, these are not the only ones.)

The device #A (II107), the device #B (II108), the device #C (II109), and the device #D (II110) receive the signals transmitted by the terminal II103 based on the wireless communication system and/or the wired communication system. However, processing such as detection, demodulation, and error correction decoding is performed to obtain information related to the emergency alert (emergency warning).
At this time, a device having a monitor or a speaker among the device #A (II107), the device #B (II108), the device #C (II109), and the device #D (II110) becomes, for example, an emergency warning (emergency warning). The related information may be displayed on the monitor, or the sound of the information related to the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) may be output from the speaker.

In addition, among the devices #A (II107), the devices #B (II108), the devices #C (II109), and the devices #D (II110), devices that may pose a danger to the human body (for example, devices that handle gas). , Ovens, electric stoves, gas stoves, and other devices that may cause fire or that may affect the life of the human body) receive signals transmitted by the terminal II 103, and information related to emergency alerts (emergency warnings). Therefore, the control is performed so that the possibility of giving a danger to the human body is reduced, for example, processing such as turning off the power is performed.
As described above, the terminal II 103 obtains the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) transmitted by the transmitting station, transmits the information related to this information to the other device, and the other device obtains this information. Proper processing will increase the possibility of ensuring the safety of the user.

In FIG. 105, the terminal II 103 and the devices #A to #D may directly communicate with each other, or may use a relay device (for example, an access point (access point of a LAN (Local Area Network)) or a cellular base station). The terminal II 103 and the devices #A to #D may communicate via the terminal II 103.
In addition, in the above description, it is described that the terminal II 103 of FIG. 105 transmits information related to the emergency warning (emergency alert). This point will be described.

The terminal II 103 obtains the information on the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) transmitted using TMCC. Then, the terminal II 103 will transmit the information related to the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) to the devices #A to #D according to the application, but even if the information to be transmitted for each device is generated. Good.
For example, for a device equipped with a monitor, the terminal II 103 will generate and transmit information to be displayed on the monitor from the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) included in the TMCC transmitted by the transmitting station. ..

Further, for a device equipped with a speaker, the terminal II 103 will generate and transmit information to be output from the speaker from the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) included in the TMCC transmitted by the transmitting station. ..
Then, when controlling the device such as “turning off the power”, from the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning) included in the TMCC transmitted by the transmitting station, the information regarding the control to be performed on the device (for example, turning the power off). If the power is turned off, information that the power is turned off will be generated and transmitted to the device.

In the above description, the terminal II 103 temporarily stores the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) transmitted using the TMCC, and then generates the information to be transmitted to the other device from the accumulated information, and the other device Alternatively, the information may be transmitted.
It should be noted that “the terminal II 103 obtains information on the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) transmitted using the TMCC. Then, the terminal II 103 requests the devices #A to #D to perform the emergency alert (the emergency alert This means that the information related to the emergency alert will be transmitted.” This is because the terminal II 103 transmits the information related to the emergency alert (emergency alert) according to the regional information described in the other embodiments. You may control whether or not.
For example, when the area information and the area to which the terminal belongs match, the terminal II 103 obtains the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) transmitted using TMCC. Then, the terminal II 103 will transmit the information related to the emergency warning (emergency alert) to the devices #A to #D according to the purpose.

On the other hand, if the area information and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, the terminal II 103 performs a process of not transmitting information to the devices #A to #D.
Further, in the above description, an example is described in which the terminal II 103 generates information from “emergency alert (emergency alert) information” and transmits the information to another device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal II 103 Information to be transmitted to another device may be generated based on TMCC information transmitted by the transmitting station (information transmitted using the TMCC described in other embodiments).
In addition, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment B, the embodiment C, the embodiment D, the embodiment E, the embodiment F, and the embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are included. Although the system has been described as an example, a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can of course be implemented in the same manner.

(Embodiment JJ)
This embodiment proposes a method of transmitting information of URL (Uniform Resource Locator) or URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) by TMCC.
In this specification, as an example, in each satellite, control information such as TMCC is transmitted, and a terminal, a communication system, a relay system, and the like using the control information are described in each embodiment. The transmission station transmits control information such as TMCC by a system such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, and mobile broadcasting. Each embodiment described in the manual may be implemented. Regarding this point, the present embodiment is also the same.

Then, the configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are as described in the embodiment AA, and using the TMCC, information on an emergency alert (emergency breaking news), message information, video information, The method of transmitting the still image information and the audio information is the same as that described in Embodiment AA or later, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.

In the embodiment EE and the like, the method of transmitting the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), the electronic message information, the video information, the still image information, and the audio information using the TMCC has been described. At that time, it has been described that the information of the message information, the image information, the still image, and the emergency warning (emergency warning) by voice is transmitted using the TMCC. However, since the TMCC is only an area for transmitting control information, the data transmission rate of data transmission using TMCC is higher than that of data transmission using the transmission main signal of the broadcasting system. Is very slow, for example, it is not possible to transmit a large amount of data for emergency warning (emergency warning) by TMCC, and in consideration of user safety, some large amount of data can be obtained quickly in time. Such system construction is desired.

Therefore, as the type of information to be transmitted using TMCC, "URL (Uniform Resource Locator) or URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) information" can be selected TM
A CC transmission method is proposed.
As described in the embodiment EE, it is assumed that the information R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ related to the medium of the information of the emergency alert (emergency warning) is transmitted as a part of the control information such as TMCC. Table 34 shows a “relationship between R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ and the type of emergency alert broadcast information” that is different from Table 26.

As shown in Table 34, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“000”, the information of the emergency alert broadcast is assumed to be transmitted as electronic message information. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“001”, it is assumed that the information of the emergency alert broadcast is transmitted as video, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“010”, the information of the emergency alert broadcast is a still image. If R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ = “011”, the information of the emergency alert broadcast shall be transmitted by voice, and if R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ = “100”, the information of the emergency alert broadcast shall be transmitted. It is assumed that URL or URI information for obtaining information is transmitted, and it is undefined when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“101” to “111”.
The method of transmitting information related to TMCC is as described in Embodiment AA, Embodiment BB, Embodiment CC, Embodiment DD, Embodiment EE, etc. ), the information is, for example, transmitted using the "extended information" of TMCC.

Note that the configuration of the transmission station that transmits control information such as TMCC is assumed to be the configuration shown in FIG. 7, for example, as described in Embodiment DD. Since the detailed description has been given in the other embodiments, the description thereof is omitted here.
FIG. 106 shows the configuration of the terminal (II103). It should be noted that the same numbers are assigned to those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. The terminal II 103 receives the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitting station and relayed by the relay by the antenna II 101, and obtains the received signal II 102. Then, the terminal II 103 extracts the control information (TMCC) included in the received signal II 102. Then, as described in the other embodiment, it is assumed that the terminal II 103 has obtained the URL or URI information for obtaining the information of the emergency alert broadcast transmitted using TMCC.
Then, for example, when the OS (Operating System) is not activated, the terminal II 103 activates the OS, activates the browser, and connects to the URL or URI transmitted using TMCC via the network. , Get information about emergency alerts (emergency bulletins).

The antenna of JJ101 in FIG. 106 is, for example, an antenna for connecting to a network using a wireless LAN (as an example of a method, Wi-Fi (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.)). , WiGiG, WirelessHD, etc.), JJ101 is an interface for connecting a wired network (as an example of a system, Ethernet (registered trademark), PLC, etc.).

The terminal II 103 is connected to the URL or URI transmitted using the TMCC, for example, via the antenna JJ101 or the interface JJ101, so that the emergency warning (
You will get the information of the emergency bulletin). At this time, for example, the terminal II 103 is connected to the URL or URI transmitted using the TMCC via the access point JJ 103 and the cellular base station JJ 104 (but not limited to this).
As described above, by linking the terminal to the URL of the TMCC or the URI information, a large amount of data can be obtained at high speed, and the information can be obtained immediately. It is possible to obtain the effect of increasing the possibility that

Further, the URL or URI information obtained by the terminal obtaining TMCC may be transmitted to another device. FIG. 107 shows an example of a system configuration diagram at that time. Note that, in FIG. 107, the same numbers are given to those that operate in the same manner as in FIGS. 105 and 106.
Similar to FIG. 106, the terminal (II 103) in FIG. 107 connects to the URL or URI transmitted using TMCC via the network, and obtains information on an emergency alert (emergency alert). In addition, the terminal (II103) transmits the information of the URL or URI obtained by obtaining TMCC to the device #A (II107) and the device #B (II108) as shown in FIG. 107, as in FIG. To send. (Note that the terminal II 103 and the devices #A and #B may directly communicate with each other, or may be connected via a relay (for example, an access point (LAN (Local Area Network) access point) or a cellular base station). The II 103 and the devices #A and #B may communicate with each other.)

Then, the devices #A and #B access the URL or URI obtained from the terminal (II103) via the network (for example, via an access point or a cellular base station), and (there is a relatively large amount of data). It is possible to obtain the effect that the safety of the user may be secured by obtaining the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin).

It should be noted that "the terminal II 103 obtains information (URL or URI information) of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) transmitted using TMCC, and the terminal II 103 decides to transmit the information to the devices #A and #B. However, this may control whether or not the terminal II 103 transmits information related to an emergency alert (emergency alert) based on the area information described in the other embodiments.
For example, when the area information and the area to which the terminal belongs match, the terminal II 103 obtains the information (URL or URI information) of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) transmitted using TMCC. Then, the terminal II 103 transmits information (URL or URI information) related to the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) to the devices #A and #B.

On the other hand, if the area information and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, the terminal II 103 performs a process of not transmitting information to the devices #A and #B.
In addition, as described in the other embodiments, the terminal II 103 connects to the URL or URI transmitted using TMCC when the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs. Good.

Further, in the above description, the URL or URI relating to the information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) is dealt with, but it is not limited to this, and the transmitting station transmits the information of the URL or URI other than the emergency alert (emergency alert) by TMCC. Even in the case of doing so, the above-described embodiment can be implemented.
In addition, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment B, the embodiment C, the embodiment D, the embodiment E, the embodiment F, and the embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are included. Although the system has been described as an example, a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can of course be implemented in the same manner.

(Embodiment KK)
A wireless transmission method such as changing the roll-off rate (Embodiment AA, Embodiment DD, etc.) or changing the ring ratio when using the 16APSK, 32APSK method (Embodiment A to Embodiment G, etc.) The method of transmitting the information for changing the number using the TMCC extension area has been described.
On the other hand, in the embodiments BB and beyond, the case has been described where various types of information are transmitted using the TMCC extension area.
Also, control information is transmitted in areas other than the TMCC extension area.

By the way, as a simple method, a method is conceivable in which the transmission of “information regarding a change in the wireless transmission method” using the TMCC extension area and the transmission of “various types of information” using the TMCC extension area are performed simultaneously. .. This method has an advantage that the wireless transmission method can be changed for each of a plurality of frames.
However, in consideration of the actual operation of broadcasting, it is not always desirable to have a system that changes the wireless transmission method for every plurality of frames. (There may be a case where a system that changes the wireless transmission method for every plural frames is desired.) In consideration of this, the transmission of "information regarding the change of the wireless transmission method" using the TMCC extended area and the TMCC extended area A method of transmitting "various types of information" using will be described.

In this specification, as an example, in each satellite, control information such as TMCC is transmitted, and a terminal, a communication system, a relay system, and the like using the control information are described in each embodiment. The transmission station transmits control information such as TMCC by a system such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, and mobile broadcasting. Each embodiment described in the manual may be implemented. Regarding this point, the present embodiment is also the same.
Then, the configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, and the like are as described in the embodiment AA, and using the TMCC, information on an emergency alert (emergency breaking news), message information, video information, The method of transmitting the still image information and the audio information is the same as that described in Embodiment AA or later, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (ground) transmitting station, A system including a repeater (satellite) and a terminal will be described as an example.

In the embodiment EE, the embodiment JJ and the like, the method of transmitting the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), the message information, the image information, the still image information and the voice information using the extended area of the TMCC has been described. Further, the method of transmitting "URL (Uniform Resource Locator) or URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) information" using the extended area of TMCC has been described.
As described in the embodiment EE, the embodiment JJ, etc., for example, as a part of the control information such as TMCC, the information R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ regarding the medium of the information to be transmitted by using the extension area of the TMCC is provided. Shall be transmitted. Table 35 shows "relationship between types of information transmitted using R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ and the TMCC extension area", which is different from Tables 26 and 34.

As shown in Table 35, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“000”, it is assumed that the information transmitted using the TMCC extension area is transmitted as electronic message information. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“001”, the information transmitted using the TMCC extension area is assumed to be transmitted as video, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“010”, the TMCC extension area. information to be transmitted using is assumed to be transmitted in the still image, information to be transmitted using the extended area of the TMCC when _{R 2 R 1 R 0 = "} 011" is assumed to be transmitted by voice, R _{2 When} R ₁ R ₀ =“100”, it is assumed that the URL or URI information to obtain the information is transmitted, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“101”, it is transmitted using the TMCC extension area. It is assumed that the information related to “change of transmission method parameter” has been transmitted, and it is undefined when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“110” to “111”.
The method of transmitting information related to TMCC is as described in Embodiment AA, Embodiment BB, Embodiment CC, Embodiment DD, Embodiment EE, etc. In this case, it is assumed that the information is transmitted using the "extended information" of TMCC.

Further, "change transmission method parameter" in Table 35 changes the roll-off rate (Embodiment AA, Embodiment DD, etc.) or changes the ring ratio when the 16APSK or 32APSK method is used (Embodiment). This means that when the wireless transmission method is changed from A to the embodiment G or the like), information is transmitted using the TMCC extension area.
Note that the configuration of the transmission station that transmits control information such as TMCC is assumed to be the configuration shown in FIG. 7, for example, as described in Embodiment DD. Since the detailed description has been given in the other embodiments, the description thereof is omitted here.

The configuration of the receiving device of the terminal is as shown in FIG. The control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319 in FIG. 75 will determine the type of information to be transmitted using the TMCC extension area based on Table 35.
For example, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“101”, the terminal determines that the “information transmitted using the TMCC extension area is information related to “transmission method parameter change””, and the transmission method parameter The changes will be estimated. The “estimation of transmission method parameter change content” is as described in the other embodiments. As described in the other embodiments, in “Transmission method parameter change”, “Satellite digital broadcasting transmission method standard ARIB STD-B20 3.0 version or satellite digital broadcasting transmission method standard ARIB STD- It is also possible to switch to the transmission method of "ARIB STD-B20 standard of B20 3.0 version or later".

By adopting the above-described transmission method of "information regarding change of wireless transmission method" using the TMCC extension area and transmission of "various types of information" using the TMCC extension area, the "wireless transmission method" Change information" and "various types of information" using the TMCC extension area are not transmitted in parallel. Therefore, the transmission rate of data of "various types of information" using the TMCC extension area is changed. The advantage is that it can be higher.
In addition, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment B, the embodiment C, the embodiment D, the embodiment E, the embodiment F, and the embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are included. Although the system has been described as an example, a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can of course be implemented in the same manner.

(Embodiment LL)
In the present embodiment, an example of a method of utilizing electronic message information, video information, still image information, audio information, and URL (URI) information transmitted using TMCC will be described.
FIG. 108 shows an example of the configuration of the terminal according to the present embodiment, and those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted here.
The electronic message information storage unit LL101 receives the control information AA320 and the control signal as input, and when the information transmitted using TMCC in the control information AA320 is electronic message information, the electronic message information storage unit LL101 stores the information. .. At this time, tag information that is "telegram information" is added to the stored information and stored at the same time.
Similarly, when the video information storage unit LL103 receives the control information AA320 and the control signal and the information transmitted using TMCC in the control information AA320 is video information, the video information storage unit LL103 determines that information. Memorize At this time, tag information that is "video information" is added to the stored information and stored at the same time.

The still image information storage unit LL105 receives the control information AA320 and the control signal as input, and in the control information AA320, when the information transmitted using TMCC is still image information, the still image information storage unit LL105 uses the information. Memorize At this time, tag information that is "still image information" is added to the stored information and stored at the same time.
The URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 receives the control information AA320 and the control signal as input, and stores the URL (URI) information when the information transmitted using TMCC in the control information AA320 is the URL (URI) information. The unit LL107 stores the information. At this time, tag information that is “URL (URI) information” is added to the stored information and stored at the same time.
The voice information storage unit LL109 receives the control information AA320 and the control signal as input, and when the information transmitted using TMCC in the control information AA320 is voice information, the voice information storage unit LL109 stores the information. At this time, tag information that is "voice information" is added to the stored information and stored at the same time.

In the above description, the electronic message information storage unit LL101, the video information storage unit LL103, the still image information storage unit LL105, the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107, and the voice information storage unit LL109 are prepared, but they are integrated. The storage unit LL100 may be included in the terminal. However, the type of information (telegram information, video information, still image information, URL (URI) information, or audio information) transmitted using TMCC is stored together with the information.

Then, when the electronic message information storage unit LL101 receives a control signal “display stored electronic message information on the monitor”, for example, according to a user's instruction, the electronic message information storage unit LL101 “stores it. The electronic message information" is output (LL102). In addition, the electronic message information storage unit LL101 can erase part or all of the "stored electronic message information" by a control signal (instructed by the user).
Similarly, when the video information storage unit LL103 receives a control signal “display stored video information on a monitor” in response to a user's instruction, for example, the video information storage unit LL103 “stores the video information”. "Video information present" is output (LL104). Further, the video information storage unit LL103 can erase part or all of the "stored video information" by a control signal (instructed by the user).

For example, when the still image information storage unit LL105 receives a control signal “display stored still image information on a monitor” according to a user's instruction, the still image information storage unit LL105 “stores the stored image information”. "Still image information" is output (LL106). Further, the still image information storage unit LL105 can erase part or all of the "stored still image information" by a control signal (instructed by the user).
For example, when the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 receives a control signal “display stored URL (URI) information on a monitor” according to a user's instruction, the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107. Outputs "stored URL (URI) information" (LL108). Further, the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 can erase a part or all of the "stored URL (URI) information" by a control signal (instructed by the user). And
It is assumed that the voice information storage unit LL109 can erase part or all of the “stored voice information” by a control signal (instructed by the user).

As described above, by storing the information transmitted using TMCC, the user can acquire the information and can organize it, so that more useful information can be utilized effectively for the user. There is an advantage that you can.
Note that the electronic message information stored in the electronic message information storage unit LL101 may be information transmitted using TMCC or information after decoding for the electronic message may be performed. The LL 101 may store information in any format.
Similarly, the video information stored in the video information storage unit LL103 may be information transmitted using TMCC, or may be information after decoding for video, and video information storage. The section LL103 may store information in any format.

The still image information stored in the still image information storage unit LL105 may be information transmitted using TMCC, or may be information after decoding for still images. The storage unit LL105 may store information in any format.
The URL(URI) information stored in the URL(URI) information storage unit LL107 may be information transmitted using TMCC or information after decoding for the URL(URI). Alternatively, the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 may store the information in any format.
The voice information stored in the voice information storage unit LL109 may be information transmitted using TMCC or information after decoding for voice, and the voice information storage unit LL109 is The information may be stored in any format.

Further, information may be stored by adding a tag for each field to each information.
For example, when the first information transmitted using TMCC is information related to economic news, a tag called economic news is also stored when the information is stored.
When the second information transmitted using TMCC is information related to sports news, a tag called sports news is also stored when the information is stored.
Similarly, for the third information, the fourth information,..., Tags for each field are stored together with the information.
The terminal can display the information on the screen by organizing each item based on the information of these tags.
For example, when displaying telegram information, there are items to be classified such as "domestic news", "international news", "economic news", "sports news", "science news", etc., and the information belonging to that item is displayed for each item. The screen is displayed such as "Yes".

Specifically, the display is as follows.
"Domestic news"
{The content of the first information is described}
{Contents of eighth information are described}
"International News"
{The content of the sixth information is described}
{Content of seventh information is described}
"Economic News"
{The content of the third information is described}
{Contents of ninth information are described}
"Sports news"
{The content of the second information is described}
{The content of the fourth information is described}
"Science News"
{The content of the fifth information is described}
{The content of the tenth information is described}

Regarding this point, the display of a still image screen, the display of a video image, and the display of a URL (URI) screen are similarly arranged and displayed for each item.

(Embodiment MM)
The setting of the audio output method in the embodiment FF and the setting method of the screen output in the embodiment GG have been described. In the present embodiment, as an example, a setting method using a remote controller (remote controller) and a touch panel will be described. A touch panel is an electronic component that combines a display device such as a liquid crystal panel or an organic EL panel with a position input device such as a touch pad. is there. (Touchpad: A type of pointing device that operates a mouse pointer by tracing a planar sensor with your finger)

Any method may be used to set the audio output method in the embodiment FF and the screen output setting method in the embodiment GG. For example, the setting may be performed by an operation such as pressing a switch or a button mounted on the terminal. Alternatively, the setting may be performed by a remote controller (remote controller) capable of controlling the terminal by wireless transmission or infrared transmission.
In this embodiment, a setting method using a remote controller (remote controller) and a touch panel included in a terminal will be described.

For example, assuming a terminal such as a television or a device for recording video, press the button of the remote controller (remote controller) attached to the terminal and transmit the information to the terminal by wireless transmission or infrared transmission. However, the terminal will perform control based on the information. At this time, since the number of buttons on the remote controller (remote controller) is large, there is a high possibility that the user is at a loss as to which button to press, and control may be difficult.
On the other hand, depending on the terminal, a control button for making various settings may be mounted, but in general, the number of buttons is small and there is a high possibility that the user's operation is difficult.
The setting method using the remote controller (remote controller) and the touch panel included in the terminal described in this embodiment is a setting method that may reduce the above two problems.

FIG. 109 shows states of the terminal and the remote controller (remote controller) according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 109, MM101 is a remote controller (remote controller), and MM102 is a terminal. At this time, the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 has a button or a touch panel simulating the button, and is pressed by the user pressing the button (or the button) (MM103). The information corresponding to the button is transmitted to the terminal MM102. When the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 transmits information to the terminal MM102, wireless transmission or infrared transmission will be used.
When the terminal MM102 receives the information transmitted by the remote controller (remote controller) MM101, the terminal MM102 performs processing based on the received information. The terminal MM102 has a screen (display unit) for displaying images, message information, still images, etc., but the screen portion (display unit) has a touch panel function. And
The characteristic processing of this embodiment is as follows.

<1> First, the user presses one or a plurality of buttons on the remote controller (remote controller) MM101, and accordingly, the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 transmits information to the terminal MM102.
<2> The terminal MM102 receives the information transmitted by the remote controller (remote controller) MM101, and the terminal MM102 can select the display unit having the function of the touch panel included in the terminal MM102 by the touch panel based on the received information. Display a plurality of options (the options do not necessarily have to be plural).
<3> The user wants to make a selection by, for example, touching the display portion of any of the displayed options (may be touched with a finger or with another). Choices are selected.

In addition, in <3>, "the user touches the display portion of any of the displayed options (may be touched with a finger or another). , "The option that the user wants to select is selected.", but "the user touches the display part of any of the displayed options (may be touched with a finger or other By doing so, the option displayed in the portion touched by the user becomes a candidate for selection, and then a confirmation screen, for example, “OK (may be set)” or “Cancel (original) “Return to”) is displayed, and when “OK (may be set)” is touched, the option that was a selection candidate is selected, and when “Cancel (return to the original)” is touched, the option is displayed again. "
The above is an example, and the important point as <3> is that “a user touches a display portion of any of the displayed options (may be touched with a finger or other options. You may touch it.) That is, the touch panel reacts."
As a specific example, the audio output method in the embodiment FF will be described.
When the user sets the voice output method, the following processing is performed.

<#1> The user presses one or a plurality of buttons on the remote controller (remote controller) MM101, and the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 displays the information that “starts the setting of the audio output method” to the terminal. Send to MM102.
<#2> The terminal MM102 receives the information “start setting of the audio output method” transmitted from the remote controller (remote controller) MM101, and the terminal MM102 includes the terminal MM102 based on the received information. A screen as shown in FIG. 87 is displayed on the display unit having a touch panel function.
<#3> The user makes a selection by, for example, touching a display portion of any of the displayed options (may be touched with a finger or another). The choices you want to make are selected.

(Note that, as described above regarding <3>, <#3> may be another process described above.)
As described above, by adopting the setting method using the remote controller and the touch panel provided in the terminal, the button that the user presses (or touches) is easy to understand, so various settings can be made without confusion. There is an advantage that you can.

The processing of <1><2><3> may be used for the setting of the audio output method in the embodiment FF and the setting of the screen output in the embodiment GG. The processing of <1><2><3> may be applied to. In addition, when the terminal has an application installed, the user also presses the button when using a remote controller and a touch panel included in the terminal to set the application or operate the application. There is an advantage that the (or touch) button becomes easy to understand.

(Supplement)
As a matter of course, a plurality of embodiments described in the present specification may be combined and implemented.

In this specification, when “∀” and “∃” are present, “∀” represents a universal symbol (universal quantifier) and “∃” represents an existential quantifier.

Further, in the present specification, when there is a complex plane, the unit of phase such as an argument is “radian”.

By using the complex plane, it is possible to display in polar form as a polar coordinate representation of a complex number. A complex number z = a + jb (a and b are both real numbers and j is an imaginary unit), and a point on the complex plane (
When this point is expressed in polar coordinates as [r, θ] when a, b) are associated, a=r×cos θ, b=r×sin θ,

Where r is the absolute value of z (r = |z|), and θ is the argument. Then, z=a+jb is expressed as r×e ^j θ.

Note that, for example, a program that executes the above communication method is stored in advance in a ROM (Read Only).
Alternatively, the program may be stored in a memory (Memory) and operated by a CPU (Central Processor Unit).

A program for executing the above communication method is stored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in the storage medium is recorded in a RAM (Random Access Memory) of the computer, and the computer is operated according to the program. You may do it.

Each configuration of each of the above-described embodiments may be realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration) that is typically an integrated circuit. These may be individually made into one chip, or may be made into one chip so as to include all or part of the configurations of the respective embodiments. The name used here is LSI, but it may also be called IC (Integrated Circuit), system LSI, super LSI, or ultra LSI depending on the degree of integration. Further, the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI, and it may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. A programmable programmable gate array (FPGA) that can be programmed after the LSI is manufactured, or a reconfigurable processor that can reconfigure the connection and setting of circuit cells inside the LSI may be used.

Furthermore, if integrated circuit technology comes out to replace LSI's as a result of the advancement of semiconductor technology or a derivative other technology, it is naturally also possible to carry out function block integration using this technology. Biotechnology may be applied.

Note that a supplementary explanation regarding the transmission method will be given below.

In the description of the present invention, when single carrier transmission is used as the transmission method, for example, FIG. 29 is a diagram in which a mapping portion and a band limiting portion in the mapping unit 708 and the modulation unit 710 in FIG. 7 are extracted. Show.

In FIG. 29, a mapping unit 2902 receives a control signal and a digital signal as input, performs mapping based on information about a modulation scheme (or a transmission method) included in the control signal, and maps the in-phase component and base of the baseband signal after mapping. Outputs the quadrature component of the band signal.

The band limiting filter 2904a receives the in-phase component of the baseband signal after mapping and the control signal as input, sets the roll-off rate included in the control signal, performs band limiting, and outputs the in-phase component of the baseband signal after band limiting. Output.

Similarly, the band-limiting filter 2904b receives the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping and the control signal, sets the roll-off rate included in the control signal, performs band limitation, and outputs the baseband signal after the band limitation. Output the quadrature component.

The frequency characteristic of the band limiting filter that limits the band of the carrier wave is represented by the following Expression (30).

In the above equation, F is the center frequency of the carrier wave, F _n is the Nyquist frequency, and α is the roll-off rate.

At this time, if it is possible to change the roll-off rate at the time of transmitting the data symbol by the control signal, it is possible to change the ring ratio by each modulation method and transmission method along with the change of the roll-off rate. However, in this case, it is necessary to transmit the information regarding the change of the ring ratio to the receiving device as in the above example. Then, the receiving device can perform demodulation/decoding based on this information.

Further, when the roll-off rate can be changed when transmitting the data symbol, the transmitting device needs to transmit the information regarding the roll-off rate change as the control information symbol. At this time, the control information symbol may be generated with a certain set roll-off rate.

In Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, d ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c _{7, b 0 b 1 b 2} b 3, x 0 x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 x 5, x 6 x 7 x 8 x 9 x 10 x 11, y 0 y 1 y 2 y 3 y 4 y 5, The case of transmitting y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ using the TMCC extension information has been described, but a method of transmitting without using the TMCC extension information is also conceivable.

In the case of transmitting without using the extended information of TMCC, when two methods coexist, such as “method A” and “method B”, embodiment B, embodiment C, embodiment D ₀ described in D, the embodiment E, the embodiment F, and the embodiment G will be transmitted (however, the extension information of TMCC is not used). On the other hand, if there are no two methods, such as “method A” and “method B”, that is, if there is only one method, there is no need to transmit the information of d ₀ . In this case, the process related to system identification described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G is unnecessary, and other processing, That is, the ring ratio can be changed as described in the embodiment B, the embodiment C, the embodiment D, the embodiment E, the embodiment F, and the embodiment G.

Further, in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, a system including a transmission station, a relay, and a terminal has been described as an example. However, it goes without saying that a system including a transmitting station and a terminal can be implemented in the same manner. At this time, the transmitting station is d ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ , sends _{x 6 x 7 x 8 x 9} x 10 x 11, y 0 y 1 y 2 y 3 y 4 y 5, y 6 y 7 y 8 y 9 y 10 y 11, the terminal obtains the information As a result, it is possible to detect and demodulate after knowing that the APSK ring ratio has been changed.

In this specification, there is a description called "audio information (Audio data)" (or "audio (Audio)"). Regarding the interpretation regarding the “voice information”, one of the following two cases is considered. (However, it is not limited to this.)

In the first case:
"Audio data" is "information obtained by signal processing and digitizing human voices,""speech synthesis information," and "information obtained by signal processing and digitizing human voices. And "information other than "speech synthesis information".
In the second case:
The "audio data" is "information about the sound of a word or sentence based on a certain language" and "other information".

In the embodiment EE, when the transmitting station transmits "emergency alert (emergency alert) voice information" and the terminal obtains this "emergency alert (emergency alert) voice information", the terminal outputs "emergency alert (emergency alert) voice information". The method of preferentially outputting the sound of “voice information” from the speaker, the earphone, the headphone, or the like has been described. When interpreting the above “first case”, “emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information” belongs to “information obtained by signal processing and digitizing a human voice” or “voice synthesis information”. In this case, the “emergency alert (emergency alert) voice information described in the embodiment EE is output preferentially to the output voice, so that the user having the receiving device (terminal) can reliably issue the emergency alert (emergency alert). The effect of increasing the possibility that the safety of the user can be ensured is greater.

In the case of interpreting the above “second case”, if the “emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information” belongs to the “information of the sound of a word or a sentence based on a certain language”, it is described in the embodiment EE. "By giving priority to the output of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information, it is possible to reliably convey the information of the emergency alert (emergency early warning) to the user who has the receiving device (terminal). The effect of increasing the possibility of ensuring safety is greater.
Note that this can be similarly applied to the embodiment FF as well.

When interpreting the above “first case”, “emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information” belongs to “information obtained by signal processing and digitizing a human voice” or “voice synthesis information”. In this case, the “emergency alert (emergency alert) voice information described in the embodiment EE is output preferentially to the output voice, so that the user having the receiving device (terminal) can reliably issue the emergency alert (emergency alert). The effect of increasing the possibility that the safety of the user can be ensured is greater.
In the case of interpreting the above “second case”, if the “emergency alert (emergency breaking) voice information” belongs to the “information of the sound of a word or a sentence based on a certain language”, it is described in the embodiment EE. "By giving priority to the output of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information, it is possible to reliably convey the information of the emergency alert (emergency early warning) to the user who has the receiving device (terminal). The effect of increasing the possibility of ensuring safety is greater.

Further, in the embodiments EE and FF, a supplementary explanation will be given on an example of the receiving operation of the terminal when the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) including the voice information is transmitted.
When the receiving unit of the terminal receives the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news) including the voice information, the receiving unit immediately decodes (voices) the voice information included in the information of the emergency warning (emergency breaking news) and outputs the sound. Although it may be output from a speaker, earphones, headphones, etc., a warning sound (alarm sound) stored in advance in the terminal at the time of detecting reception of information of an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is output to the speaker, earphones, headphones. May be output from a speaker, earphones, headphones or the like.

With this configuration, the viewer can be alerted by a warning sound (alarm sound) or the like that is output as a sound in advance. Therefore, immediately after receiving the information of the emergency warning (emergency warning), the warning of the emergency warning (emergency warning) is sent. Compared with the case where the sound of information is output from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, etc., it is possible to reduce the possibility that the viewer will miss the information of the emergency alert (emergency breaking news). If the sound information itself includes a warning sound (alarm sound) and sound information of a word or a sentence in any language, the above configuration is not necessary, and the above configuration is more reliable. The viewer may be allowed to hear the audio information.

In this specification, transmission of "regional information" by TMCC is described. At this time, as a method of designating a region by the "region information", a plurality of regions may be designated at the same time, or a specific region may be designated alone. The "region information" may be able to designate all regions (for example, "national") when a plurality of regions are designated at the same time.

Although the configuration of the “terminal” is described in the present specification, the configuration of the terminal is not limited to the configuration described in each embodiment. Specifically, the terminal does not have an antenna, and in this case, the terminal has an interface for inputting a signal received by the antenna.

In the present specification, as an example, the terminal, the communication system, the relay system, and the like that transmit control information such as TMCC in satellite broadcasting and utilize the control information have been described in the respective embodiments. The present invention is not limited to the use by transmitting control information as described above, but the transmitting station transmits control information such as TMCC by a system such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, and mobile broadcasting. You may implement each embodiment described. Therefore, as a transmission method in the wireless transmission described in the example, a MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) transmission method in which signal processing such as OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing), precoding and space-time (frequency space) coding is performed. Alternatively, a MISO (Multiple Input Single Output) transmission method or a spread spectrum communication method may be used.

The terminal described in the present specification outputs a speaker, a liquid crystal screen for displaying an image, an organic EL (Organic Electro-Luminescence) screen, an audio output terminal, an output screen for an image, etc. It may be equipped with terminals.

In the embodiment FF, the setting of the audio (audio) output method is described, and in the embodiment GG, the setting related to the screen display is described. However, the terminal itself is a controller (switch) for these settings (for control). May be equipped with, and the terminal and remote controller (remote controller) are connected by infrared rays, wireless (for example, Wi-Fi or Bluetooth (registered trademark)), and the output method of audio (audio) is set by the remote controller. Alternatively, an instruction may be given to the setting related to the screen display, the output method of the terminal audio (audio), and the setting related to the screen display may be performed.

The terminal in this specification does not have to have a screen display unit and a speaker. In this case, the terminal is externally connected to the screen display device (for example, monitor), the amplifier and the speaker.

The transmitter according to the present invention can apply an error correction code having a high error correction capability to a communication/broadcast system, and contribute to improving the reception quality of data when iterative detection is performed on the receiving side.

200 transmitter

Claims (5)

A transmission method for transmitting an emergency alert,
Before SL generates an emergency alert Rume message explaining the content and the URL indicating the acquisition destination of the emergency alert details content (Uniform Resource Locator),
Storing the message and the URL in the emergency alert,
Broadcast the emergency alert,
Furthermore, when the target area of the emergency alert is a part of the broadcast area of the broadcast, area information indicating the target area is generated and stored in the emergency alert,
The emergency alert which does not include the regional information indicates that the target area of the emergency alert is the entire broadcasting area . A transmission system for transmitting an emergency alert,
Before SL generates an emergency alert Rume message explaining the content and URL indicating where to obtain the detailed content of the emergency warning (Uniform Resource Locator), and stores the message and the URL to the emergency alert, a generation unit A transmitter for transmitting the emergency alert by broadcast ,
When the target area of the emergency alert is a part of the broadcast area of the broadcast, the generation unit generates area information indicating the target area and stores the area information in the emergency warning,
The emergency alert that does not include the regional information indicates that the target area of the emergency alert is the entire broadcast area . A receiving method for receiving an emergency alert in a receiving device, comprising:
Transmitted by the broadcast, receiving the emergency alarm the containing emergency alert explaining the contents of the message and URL indicating where to obtain the detailed content of the emergency warning (Uniform Resource Locator),
If the emergency alert including regional information indicating the target area of the emergency alert, to determine whether there into the region showing the receiver of the local information,
If the emergency alert does not include the area information, it is determined that the receiving device exists in the area indicated by the area information,
When it is determined that the receiving device exists in the area indicated by the area information, the message is displayed, the detailed content of the emergency alert is decrypted based on the URL ,
The emergency alert which does not include the regional information indicates that the target area of the emergency alert is the entire broadcast area of the broadcast . Generating first control information for controlling the first receiving device and second control information for controlling the second receiving device, each of which is associated with the emergency alert.
Transmitting the emergency alert and the first control information to the first receiving device via a LAN (Local Area Network);
Transmitting the emergency alert and the second control information to the second receiving device via the LAN,
The first receiving device performs a first operation according to the first control information,
The second receiving device executes a second operation different from the first operation according to the second control information.
The receiving method according to claim 3. A receiving device for receiving an emergency alert,
A receiving unit for receiving an emergency alert transmitted by broadcasting, including a message explaining the content of the emergency alert and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) indicating the acquisition destination of the detailed content of the emergency alert;
When the emergency alert includes area information indicating a target area of the emergency alert, it is determined whether the receiving device exists in the area indicated by the area information, and the emergency alert does not include the area information. Determines that the receiving device exists in the area indicated by the area information, and when the receiving device determines that the receiving apparatus exists in the area indicated by the area information, displays the message and displays the emergency based on the URL. An analysis unit for decoding the content related to the alarm, and
The emergency alert that does not include the regional information indicates that the target region of the emergency alert is the entire broadcast region of the broadcast.
Receiver equipped with.

Images